CHRIST (Deemed to University), Bangalore

DEPARTMENT OF institute-of-management-mba

master-of-business-administration-(mba)

Syllabus for
Post Graduate Diploma in Management
Academic Year  (2019)

 
1 Semester - 2019 - Batch
Course Code
Course
Type
Hours Per
Week
Credits
Marks
MBA111 MENTORING AND CURRENT AFFAIRS - 3 3 100
MBA131 FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING FOR MANAGERS - 3 3 100
MBA132 MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS - 3 3 100
MBA133 MANAGING IT, DATA AND BUSINESS SYSTEMS - 3 3 100
MBA134 UNDERSTANDING BUSINESS - 3 3 100
MBA135 STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT - 3 3 100
MBA136 FOUNDATIONS OF MARKETING MANAGEMENT - 1 1 50
MBA181 ORGANIZATION STRUCTURE TRAINING - 0 2 100
2 Semester - 2019 - Batch
Course Code
Course
Type
Hours Per
Week
Credits
Marks
MBA211 MENTORING AND CURRENT AFFAIRS - 3 3 100
MBA231 MARKETING MANAGEMENT - 3 3 50
MBA232 INDIVIDUAL AND GROUP BEHAVIOUR IN ORGANIZATIONS - 3 3 100
MBA233 MANAGEMENT SCIENCE - 3 3 100
MBA234 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT - 3 3 100
MBA235 MICROSOFT EXCEL - 2 2 50
MBA236 OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT - 3 3 100
MBA237 ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING AND E-BUSINESS - 3 3 100
MBA239 ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS - 1 1 50
3 Semester - 2019 - Batch
Course Code
Course
Type
Hours Per
Week
Credits
Marks
MBA3041L QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS AND PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT - 3 3 100
MBA3042F MANAGEMENT OF BANKS - 3 3 100
MBA3043L LEAN OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT - 3 3 100
5 Semester - 2018 - Batch
Course Code
Course
Type
Hours Per
Week
Credits
Marks
MBA5041B BIG DATA ANALYTICS - 3 3 100
MBA5041F MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING - 2 3 100
MBA5041H ORGANIZATIONAL CHANGE AND DEVELOPMENT - 3 3 100
MBA5041M MARKETING METRICS - 3 3 100
MBA5042B PREDICTIVE ANALYTICS II - 3 3 100
MBA5042H LABOUR LAW -II - 3 3 100
MBA5042M STRATEGIC MARKETING MANAGEMENT - 3 3 100
MBA5043B TEXT AND SOCIAL MEDIA ANALYTICS - 3 3 100
MBA5043H COMPENSATION MANAGEMENT - 3 3 100
MBA531A ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND STARTUP - 3 3 100
MBA531B INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS - 3 3 100
MBA531C BLUE OCEAN STRATEGY - 3 3 100
MBA532A PROJECT MANAGEMENT - CONCEPTS AND APPLICATION - 3 3 100
MBA532B ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE FOR MANAGERS - 3 3 100
MBA542AF MERGERS, ACQUISITIONS AND RESTRUCTURING - 3 3 100
MBA542BF FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT - 3 3 100
MBA542BL SUPPLY CHAIN DESIGN AND MODELLING - 3 3 100
MBA542CL AGILE MANAGEMENT OF SOFTWARE PROJECTS - 3 3 100
MBA543AL WORLD CLASS MANUFACTURING - 3 3 100
MBA543AM ADVERTISING AND PUBLIC RELATIONS - 3 3 100
MBA543BF ANALYTICS FOR FINANCE - 3 3 100
MBA543BL IT SERVICE MANAGEMENT - 3 3 100
MBA543BM RETAILING MANAGEMENT - 3 3 100
MBA543CF FINANCIAL PLANNING AND WEALTH MANAGEMENT - 3 3 100
MBA544AH HUMAN RELATIONS SKILLS - 3 3 100
MBA544AL SERVICE OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT - 3 3 100
MBA544BH ADVANCED ORGANIZATION BEHAVIOUR AND EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE - 3 3 100
MBA544BL MANAGING AUDIT OF INFORMATION SYSTEMS, RISKS AND CONTROLS - 3 3 100
MBA545A CUSTOMER CENTRICITY - 30 3 3
MBA545B PERSONAL FINANCIAL PLANNING - 1 1 0
MBA545C SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS MANAGEMENT - 2 1 0
MBA545D MANAGING PEOPLE AT WORK - 3 3 150
MBA545E FAMILY BUSINESS MANAGEMENT - 2 1 0
MBA551F SMALL AND MEDIUM ENTERPRISES - 1 0 50
MBA552F PROJECT APPRAISAL AND FINANCE - 1 1 50
MBA583 INDUSTRY PRACTICUM - LOS - 1 1 0
MBA584 INDUSTRY PRACTICUM - MARKETING - 1 2 150
MBA585 INDUSTRY PRACTICUM - HR - 3 4 150
MBA586 CAPSTONE PROJECT - 3 4 200
6 Semester - 2018 - Batch
Course Code
Course
Type
Hours Per
Week
Credits
Marks
MBA6041B COGNITIVE ANALYTICS - 3 1 50
MBA6041F STRATEGIC FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT - 3 3 100
MBA6041H INTERNATIONAL HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - 3 3 100
MBA6041L SUSTAINABLE OPERATIONS - 3 3 100
MBA6041M BRAND MANAGEMENT - 3 3 100
MBA6042B ANALYTICS APPLICATIONS IN FUNCTIONAL AREAS - 3 3 100
MBA6042H LATEST TRENDS IN HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT - 3 3 100
MBA631A LEADERSHIP AND BUSINESS ETHICS - 3 3 100
MBA631B INNOVATION AND DESIGN THINKING - 3 3 100
MBA631C COST ANALYSIS AND MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEMS - 3 3 100
MBA631D E-BUSINESS - 3 3 100
MBA642AF INSURANCE - 3 3 100
MBA642AL BUSINESS ANALYSIS - II - 3 3 100
MBA642AM DIGITIAL MARKETING - 3 3 100
MBA642BL INTERNATIONAL LOGISTICS - 3 3 100
MBA642BM CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT - 6 3 100
MBA642CF FINANCIAL ENGINEERING - 3 3 100
MBA642DF BEHAVIORAL FINANCE - 3 3 100
MBA645A CUSTOMER CENTRICITY - 30 3 3
MBA645B PERSONAL FINANCIAL PLANNING - 3 3 150
MBA645C SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS MANAGEMENT - 3 3 150
MBA645D MANAGING PEOPLE AT WORK - 3 3 150
MBA645E FAMILY BUSINESS MANAGEMENT - 3 3 150
MBA651F ETHICS AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE - 1 1 50
MBA651L IT LEADERSHIP AND GOVERNANCE - 2 2 100
MBA682 MASTERS THESIS - 15 1 50
MBA683 INDUSTRY PRACTICUM - LOS - 3 3 150
MBA684 INDUSTRY PRACTICUM - MARKETING - 2 3 150
MBA685 INDUSTRY PRACTICUM - HR - 3 4 150
MBA686 CAPSTONE PROJECT - 3 4 100
    

    

Introduction to Program:
The MBA programme consists of six trimesters. Students move to specialization courses during the last four trimesters. Most of the courses are of 3 credits with coverage of 30 hours. The course curriculum is designed for academic depth and employability in the industry. Variety of pedagogy are used in addition to the regular class room teaching, such as case sessions, simulations, management games, laboratories and research-based assignments. Experiential, student centric learning is the highlight of the programme. Co-curricular activities such as organizational study, mentoring and current affairs sessions, book reviews, paper presentation conferences augment the regular classes. Extracurricular activities hone up the organizing skills and teamwork among the students. In addition to the regular MBA programme, Institute of Management also offers three post graduate programmes in collaboration with foreign universities. In collaboration with University of Applied Sciences W?rzburg-Schweinfurt (FHWS), MBA from FHWS and MB in Finance/Marketing from CHRIST (Deemed to be University) is offered.
Assesment Pattern

CIA I - 10 marks

CIA II - 25 marks (mid-term exam)

CIA III -30 marks

Attendancce - 5 marks

End-term exam - 30 marks

Examination And Assesments

CIA I:     Assignment -  10 marks  

CIA II:     Mid-term exam - 25 marks

CIA III:   MCQ and Research Based Assignment  - 30 marks 

Attendance                                                                    5 Marks

End term:                                                                   30  marks 

Two  hours examination on topics covered in all the units. Questions based on understanding and application of concepts related to the course. 

MBA111 - MENTORING AND CURRENT AFFAIRS (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Mentoring is a highly valuable development activity where a more experienced and knowledgeable person guides a less experienced and less knowledgeable person to achieve one’s career goals and objectives. It is an one-on-one ongoing interaction between the mentor and the mentee focussing on his/her individual development over a period of time.

 

Course Outcome

Knowledge: Mentees develop a habit of keeping themselves updated on the latest happenings in the business world. They also get clarity on the choice of specialization to be pursued. Skill: Mentees develop presentation skills, communication skills, leadership skills and analytical skills. Attitude: Mentees develop a positive attitude towards learning process apart from time management and punctuality.  

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:30
Industrial Domain Knowledge
 

Developing various soft skills and analytical skills through analysis of current affairs on a continuous basis 

Text Books And Reference Books:

Reading material as provided by mentor

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Daily newspaper and periodicals

Evaluation Pattern

Mentees are assessed based on the following parameters:

Review of SWOT - II Book reading and review Preparation for regular updation of news events Individual contribution to the mentoring session (Enthusiasm, initiative) Group presentations (Content, Delivery) Any other activity adopted by mentor

MBA131 - FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING FOR MANAGERS (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

Accounting is at the heart of the information age. By studying this course, the student will learn about the concepts, rules and procedures, and analysis that are useful in everyday activity connected to finance.  This course describes the concepts of accounting, its principles, users and uses of the accounting information, recording of transactions in journal, ledger and subsidiary books, bank reconciliation statement and trial balance.  The course also discusses preparation of income statement and balance sheet.

Course Objective

This course attempts to familiarize the students the concepts, principles and the role of accounting in business so as to make them skilled enough to analyze and interpret the financial health of an organization and use the same for fact based decision making.

Course Outcome

By the end of the course, the students should be able to:

Knowledge

  • Understand  the  fundamentals  of  financial accounting, the principles and concepts underlying them. (CLO 1)
  • Understand the language of business through financial accounting. (CLO 1)
  • Appreciate decision facilitating roles of accounting information. (CLO 2)
  • Read and understand contemporary developments in the area of accounting. (CLO 12)

Skills

  • Analyse a transaction throughout its cycle and record them too. (CLO 13)
  • Construct the financial statements viz., the Income Statement and Balance Sheet. (CLO 15)

Attitude

  • Develop an attitude of integrative thinking while analyzing and interpreting financial statements and accounting information. (CLO 23)
  • Appreciate the ethical dimensions in accounting and reporting and be able to adopt a socially responsible outlook while preparing accounting statements. (CLO 25)
  • Appraise an integrative understanding of the entire business while reading and / or preparing financial statements. (CLO 21)
  • Understand the importance of collaborative functioning in diverse teams to achieve the common organizational goal of value creation to all the stake holders.  (CLO 21)

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:2
Introduction to Accounting
 
  • Introduction to Accounting, Need for Accounting, Aim and influence of accounting in the information age.
  • Identification of forms of organization and their characteristics.
  • Identification and description of three major activities in organizations.
  • Identification of users and uses of accounting.
  • Explanation and interpretation of accounting equation
Unit-2
Teaching Hours:5
Financial Accounting ? Concept, Conceptions, IGAAP & IFRS
 
  • Accounting Standards - IGAAP & IFRS                   
  • Meaning of accounting principles – Concepts & Conventions
  • Accounting Process
  • Accounting equation – Asset account, Liability account & Equity account
  • Analyzing transactions – Transaction analysis
  • Debits and credits and explanation regarding their role in double-entry accounting.

 

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:10
Steps in Processing Transaction
 
  • Double-entry book-keeping system, Journal, Ledger, Posting, Debits, Credits,
  • Trial Balance, Adjusting entries,
  • Final Accounts for non-corporate (Manufacturing Trading, P&L, B/S),
  • Final Accounts for Corporate (P&L, B/S, P&L Appropriation).

 

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:5
Subsidiary Books
 
  • Meaning of subsidiary books
  • Types of subsidiary books
  • Preparation of Cash book – Two column & three column cash book
  • Bank reconciliation statement
  • Meaning & classification of accounting errors
Unit-5
Teaching Hours:8
Preparation of Disclosure ? Annual Report
 
  • Disclosure of information
  • Indian Accounting Standards
  • Legal requirement (Company” Act, SEBI, Income-Tax Act etc.)
  • Revenue Recognition
  • Fixed Assets & Depreciation Accounting
  • Intangible Assets
  • Inventory valuation.
Text Books And Reference Books:

Naryanaswamy, R. Financial accounting – A Management perspective, (6th ed.). PHI

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading
  1. Anthony, Robert. (2009), Accounting text and cases. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill Publications.
  2. Bhattacharya, A.B. (2010). Financial accounting for business managers. (3rd Ed.). New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India.
  3. Gupta, Ambrish., Financial accounting for management. New Delhi: Pearson Publications.
  4. Lal, Jawahar., & Srivastava, Seema. Cost accounting. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Publications.
  5. Maheshwari S.N., Advance accounting. New Delhi: Vikash Publishing House.
  6. N.Ramchandran., & Kakani. (2010), Financial accounting for management (3rd ed.). Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill Publications.
  7. Prasanna, Chandra.(2010). Managers guide to finance and accounting. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill Publications.
  8. Tulsian, P.C. (2010). Financial accounting. New Delhi:  Pearson Publications.

 

Evaluation Pattern

#

Component

% of Marks

Details

1

CIA 1

10%

 Marks

(One Assignment, group or individual)

2

CIA 2

25%

Marks

(Written Exam for 2 Hrs)

3

CIA 3

30%

Marks

(15% One Assignment, 15% Quiz)

4

End Term Examination

30%

Marks

(Written Exam for 2 Hrs)

5

Attendance

5%

Marks

(Based on Attendance)

 

Total

100%

Marks

 

MBA132 - MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course is offered as core paper in first trimester for 3 credit hours. The subject will equip the students with the art of managerial decision making at the firm level. The subject focuses on markets, pricing and managerial decision making. Essentially on concepts such as scarcity and efficiency, problems of economic society, demand analysis, elasticity, consumer behavior, producer behavior, and cost analysis as well inclusion of advanced topics in economic analysis, with a focus on strategic behavior of different kinds of market structures and pricing.

This course attempts to equip the students with the art of managerial decision-making, based on economic principles.

 

Course Outcome

At the end of the course, the student should be able to:

 

Knowledge (CL 01) (CL02)

·         Look at economic principles as foundation to  functional  subjects

·         Evaluate consumer behavior  in the light of economic theory

·         Analyze various product and factor markets to  take better business decisions

·         Critically examine market structures using economic logic and apply the same in taking strategic decisions.

 

Skills (CLO 13)  (CLO 15)

·         Use excel in analyzing economic information

·         Estimate demand using excel

·         Prepare of industry reports

 

Attitude (CL0 21)  (CLO 23)

·         Appreciate the interdependence of functional areas in business.

·         Develop an approach that transcends functional fixation in business decision problems

 

Level of knowledge

·         Understand basic concepts and practical application in relevance

·         Learning the art of decision making and integrate with other inter-disciplinary subjects

·         Useful in understanding the optimal combination and trade off with available alternatives

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:4
Introduction
 

Introduction to Managerial Economics-Economic Systems-Principles of managerial economics, Integration with other managerial decision making process-Tools and analysis of optimization-role of Government, private**, Competition Vs Cooperation. Relationship with other management subjects*.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:6
Demand and Supply Analyses (Application)
 

Definition of demand, Law of demand and its determinants and exceptions, movement along the demand curve and shift in demand curve. Demand and supply relationship*. Definition of supply, Law of supply, Movement along the supply curve and shift in supply curve, Factors affecting supply, Market equilibrium and pricing, floor price and ceiling price. Application of demand and supply analyses: Concepts of elasticity, degree, determinants & types, practical implication, Relationship of Revenue and elasticity of demand, Demand forecasting and its use in demand. Qualitative and Quantitative interpretation of demand techniques-model specification using regression and OLS.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:6
Consumer Behaviour (Application)
 

Introduction to Consumer behavior, Utility, Cardinal approach, Ordinal approach, Consumer’s equilibrium using Indifference curve analysis and Consumer surplus, Application of Indifference curve analyses

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:5
Analyses of Production, Costs and Revenues
 

Production functions, Law of Variable proportions, returns to scale and economies of scale. Producers surplus-   Costs , Isoquants, Least cost combination types of costs , Short run costs and long run cost, Revenue Analysis –TR, AR and MR, and  break even analysis, ( case study)

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:9
Market structures and decision making
 

Market types, characteristics, Perfect competition features, Price determination and equilibrium in the short run and the long run, Monopoly - features, equilibrium condition, Price discrimination. Monopolistic competition- features, Oligopoly - Cartels as one of the feature of Oligopoly, Game theory-types, static and dynamic games-Pricing Strategy (Case study), Sustainability business model- Circles of Sustainability .

                                                            

Text Books And Reference Books:

Mankiw, N. Gregory. (2015). Principles of Micro Economics(7th ed.). New Delhi: Cengage Learning 

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.       Salvatore, D. (2013). Managerial economics Principles and worldwide applications,  New York: Oxford University Press New Delhi.

2.       Geetika., Ghosh., Piyali., &  Choudhari, P. R. (2012). Managerial Economics.(2nd ed.). New Delhi,India:McGraw Hill Higher Education.

3.       Trivedi M.L. (2010). Managerial economics - Theory and applications . New Delhi: TATA MC graw Hill.

4.       Managerial Economics A problem -solving approach, Nick Wilkinsin,(2005) Cambridge University press e-copy.

 

 

Evaluation Pattern

Course Outcomes

Components of assessment

CIA1(RBA)

CIA2 (Mid-term 50 Marks)

CIA3 (Group Presentations) as well report

CIA3(MCQs)

CLO 1

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

CLO 2

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

CLO 12

Yes

 

Yes

 

CLO18

 

 

Yes

 

CLO21

 

 

Yes

 

CLO23

 

 

Yes

 

MBA133 - MANAGING IT, DATA AND BUSINESS SYSTEMS (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

The course provides a comprehensive foundation for understanding the scope of information systems in a business environment. It covers the fundamental concepts of information and IT infrastructure including hardware, software, network, database and applications. It also includes aspects related to strategy and innovation, Information system management, development and operations including security. Latest IS paradigms like Artificial Intelligence, Machine Learning, Cloud, IoT, Blockchain etc are given an introduction in the course. Sustainability aspects like Green IT as well as Ethical issues are addressed in the course. Additionally, use of IS and IT for societal good and nation building are also bought to students’ attention through the topics of Smart Cities, E-Govenance etc.

Course Objectives

The course aims to provide students with the knowledge of the role of IT, IS, Information system design and development and security related aspects in managing the business entity. It also strives to enable students to participate in design and review of MIS solutions for various business functions. Another key objective is to develop an attitude of use of technology in a sustainable, inclusive manner with due consideration to nation and society.

Course Outcome

 

At the end of the course, students should be able to:

 

Knowledge

 

·         Realize the impact of technology on business enterprises and the deployment / utilization of information systems to gain competitive advantage (CLO1, CLO23, CLO24, CLO25)

 

·         Develop awareness of management, development and operations of Information Systems, including lifecycles, project management and security (CLO1)

 

·         Learn the basics of IT infrastructure components (CLO1)

 

·         Understand the database-related aspects and its use and management (CLO1)

 

  • Get up-to-date with latest paradigms of AI, ML, Cloud, IoT, Block Chain etc (CLO1)

 

Skill

 

·         Plan, analyze and design information system solutions for various functionalities of an organization (CLO2, CLO11, CLO12, CLO13, CLO14, CLO18, CLO21, CLO22)

 

·         Use basic SQL to analyze data for managerial decision-making (CLO2, CLO11, CLO13, CLO14)

 

Attitude

 

·         Bring managerial perspective to development and use of Information Technology (CLO2, CLO22, CLO23, CLO24, CLO25)

 

·         Approach Technology as a strategic asset for the growth of the organization in a globally competitive market (CLO2, CLO23, CLO24, CLO25)

Utilize Lean and Green principles as well as consider the society and nation at large while exploiting technology (CLO2, CLO11, CLO12, CLO13, CLO14, CLO22, CLO23, CLO24, CLO25)

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:3
Introduction and Overview
 

Information Systems vs Information Technology, Interaction Model for Managing Information Systems.

 

DIKW hierarchy, Information as a Resource, Information in Organisational Functions, Types of Information Technology.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:6
Managing & Developing Information Systems, Innovation & Strategy
 

Business Innovations with IT, Using IT for Competing, Information Goods, Information Systems & Competitive Strategy.

Vendor Management, Role of CIO, IT Governance, Challenges for the Manager.

 

IT Infrastructure Decisions.

Overview of IT Security, Basics of IT Operations and Lean IT.

 

Business Process Analysis Overview, Business Process Integration, Life Cycle Models, Introduction to Software Project Management.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:3
IT Infrastructure components
 

Basics of Hardware, Software, Open Source.

 

Overview of Networks, Data Centre concepts.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:3
Information Systems for Business
 

Enterprise Business Applications, Overviews of ERP, Supply Chain Management System, CRM, International Information Systems.

 

Transaction Processing Systems, MIS, DSS, Analytics and Business Intelligence, Knowledge Management Systems.

 

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:4
Managing Data Resources
 

Challenges of Data Management, Database Concepts, Database Elements, E-R Diagrams, SQL.

 

Practice of SQL

 

Data Warehouses, Data Mining, Big Data.

 

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:6
Disrupting Technologies
 

Artificial Intelligence, Machine Learning, AI & ML - Implications for Managers.

 

Cloud, Virtualization, IOT.

 

Blockchain

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:5
Sustainability, Ethics and Emerging Trends in Information Systems
 

Green IT, Ethical Issues, Dark Side of IT, Social Issues of Technology.

ICT for National Development, E-Governance Concepts, Smart Cities.

Industry 4.0, Service 4.0,

Autonomous Robots, Robotic Process Automation,

Virtual Reality, Augmented Reality,

3D Printing,

Wearables Technology, Bionics.

 

Current developments and trends.

Text Books And Reference Books:

De, R. (2018). Managing Information Systems in Business, Government and Society (2nd ed.).New Delhi: Wiley India Pvt. Ltd.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Recommended Reading

1

Bidgoli, H., Chattopadhyay, N. (2016). Management Information Systems – A South-Asian Perspective. CENGAGE Learning.

2

Laudon, K., Laudon, J., & Dass, R. (2017). Management Information Systems – Managing the Digital Firm. New Delhi: Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd.

3

O'Brien J.A., Marakas G.M., & Ramesh. B. (2013). Management information systems (10th ed.): Tata McGraw Hill India Publishing Co. Ltd.

4

Hoffer J.A., Ramesh V., & Heikki T. (2016). Modern database management (12th ed.).New Delhi: Pearson.

5

Singh A.N., Singh A. (2018). Lean IT – Principles to Practice (1st ed.): Notion Press.

6

Johnson, B.(2013, 27 October).  How Data Centers Work. HowStuffWorks.com. Retrieved from https://computer.howstuffworks.com/data-centers.htm Last Accessed on 8 October 2018

7

Tapscott D., Tapscott A. (2018). Blockchain Revolution (2nd ed). Portfolio Penguin.

Articles

1

Weinberger, D; The problem with the data-information-knowledge-wisdom hierarchy; Harvard Business Review, Feb 2010

2

Linked data - Connecting and Exploiting Big Data; A White paper; Fujitsu; March 2012

3

Chakraborty, D. (2019, March). A Short Guide to Smart Cities in India. ISBInsight March 2019

4

Embracing Industry 4.0—and Rediscovering Growth; BCG

5

Tapping into the Transformative Power of Service 4.0: BCG

6

2019 Planning Guide for Cloud Computing; Gartner Research Technical Professional Advice, pub 05-Oct-18

Cases

1

BP's Office of the Chief Technology Officer; 2017; Kellogg School of Management Cases, Emerald Insight

2

Knowledge Sharing at REMA 1000; 2018; Harvard Business School

3

Selling groceries through the cloud in a Tier II city in India; 2016; Emerald Emerging Markets Case Studies

Other Resources

1

https://www.w3schools.com/sql/default.asp (using Chrome)

Evaluation Pattern

CIA-1: 10 marks

CIA-2: 25 marks

CIA-3: 30 marks

End Term: 30 marks

Attendance: 5 marks

 

MBA134 - UNDERSTANDING BUSINESS (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description - This course is offered as a core subject in first trimester with 3 credits score. Organizations are all around and they shape the businesses in many ways. Business organizations create a drive for innovation rather than a reliance on standard products and outmoded approaches to management and organization design. This course will provide a general introduction to management studies and a brief outline on history and development of management thought.

 
Course Objectives - Managers are evaluated in term of success in adapting themselves to changing business environment. This course describes the steps necessary to understand an organization that are aligned with business objectives and provides an insight to address a range of challenges that every manager encounter. It aims to prepare students for an exciting challenging and rewarding managerial career through case studies on ‘Global Perspective’.

Course Outcome

At the end of the course students will be able to:

KNOWLEDGE
•    Application of management concepts to understand the major internal features of a business system and the environment in which it operates. (CLO1 & CLO2)

SKILL
•    Conduct case study analysis to apply theoretical concepts. (CLO11)
•    Evaluate and compare the management practices of the key economies of the world (CLO12)
•    Ability to think creatively and scientifically to manage events (CLO 14)
•    Demonstrate critical and analytical thinking when presented with managerial problems and express their views and opinions on managerial issues (CLO13, CLO15, CLO16, CL017)

ATTITUDE
•    Ability to work in dynamic teams (CLO21)
•    Evaluate the global context for taking managerial actions of planning, organizing and controlling with an ethical outlook. (CLO23 & CLO25)




Unit-1
Teaching Hours:6
A) Nature and purpose of Management
 
  • Management: Meaning; Scope; Managerial levels and skills;
  • Managerial Roles; Management: Science, Art or Profession; Universality of Management.

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:6
B) Evolution of Management Thought
 
  • Ancient roots of management theory; Classical schools of management thought; Behavioral School, Quantitative School; Systems Approach, Contingency Approach;
  • Contemporary Management thinkers & their contribution. Ancient Indian Management systems & practices. Comparative study of global management systems & practices.
Unit-2
Teaching Hours:6
Planning
 
  • Types of plans; Steps in Planning Process; Strategies, Policies and Planning premises (Planning approaches); Decision making, Forecasting & MBO.
  • HBS Case Study
Unit-3
Teaching Hours:3
Organizing
 
  • Organizational structure and design; types of organizational structures; authority, delegation, decentralization and reengineering
Unit-4
Teaching Hours:3
Staffing
 
  • Human resource planning, Recruitment, selection, training & development, performance appraisal, managing change, compensation and employee welfare.
  • Article Stress Management & Career path,
Unit-5
Teaching Hours:3
Leading
 
  • Leadership concept, leadership theories, motivation & communication.
  • Article on Styles of leadership by Daniel Goleman
Unit-6
Teaching Hours:3
Controlling
 
  • Nature of organizational control; control process; Methods and techniques of control; Designing control systems.
Unit-7
Teaching Hours:6
Social Responsibility, Ethics and Stress Management
 
  • Concept of social responsibility; corporate governance, managing ethical behaviour, Tools of Ethics and Management of Stress.
  • HBS case study
Text Books And Reference Books:
  • Heinz. W, Mary V Cannice & Koontz.H (2013). Management (13th Edition). Tata McGraw Hill Publications.
Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.    Daft, R. L. (2013). The new era of management (10th Edition). Cengage Publications.
2.    Prasad, L.M., Principles and practices of management. New Delhi: Sultan Chand & Sons.    
3.    Stoner, J.F., Freeman, E. R., & Gilbert, D.R. (2013). Management (6th Edition). Pearson Publications.
4.    Joseph L Massie, Essentials of Management. Prentice-Hall India, New York.

Evaluation Pattern

Assignment Number

 

Assignment Description

 

Assignment

Marks

Assignment Weightage

 

CIA-1

Research Based Assignment

20

10

CIA-2: Midterm Exam

 

 Midtrimester

50

 25

CIA-3A

 

Infographics Assignment

 

 30

15

CIA-3B

 

MCQ

30

15

 

End trimester

 

 

50

 

30

Attendance

 

 

5

TOTAL

 

100

MBA135 - STATISTICS FOR MANAGEMENT (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description:

This is a core course for 3 credit hours. It will discuss from both conceptual and application perspective, basic statistical methods widely used in business applications. The course gives an introduction to statistical methods needed in data analysis work related to applications in Economics, Finance, Marketing, Operations and Human Resources. Further it enables to conceptualize business problems in statistical terms and enhances understanding and application of fact and evidence based decision making process.

 

Course Objective:

This course attempts to enable the students to conceptualize business problems in statistical terms and to enhance their understanding and application of fact and evidence based decision making process.

Course Outcome

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of the course, the student should be able to acquire the following knowledge, skills and attitude

 

Knowledge:

  • Know the practical application of selected statistical tools (CLO2)
  • Prepare data for statistical analysis leading to business decisions (CLO1)
  • Statistically analyse basic economic indicators (CLO1,CLO2)

Skills:

  • Work efficiently with statistical functions in MS Excel (CLO11, CLO13)

·         Conduct basic statistical analysis using MS Excel (CLO11, CLO12)

Attitude:

  • Appreciate the use of statistical thinking in taking effective business decisions.(CLO22)

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:3
Data Visualization
 

Frequency distributions, histograms, stem-and-leaf displays, cross-tabulation, bar charts, pie charts, and scatter plots.

Data Preparation: Editing, coding, data entry, cross-tabulation, and graphical displays using MS Excel

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:4
Introduction to Probability
 

Probability - Event algebra*. Conditions of statistical dependence and independence, Types of probability, probabilities under conditions of statistical independence, conditional probability under statistical dependence, Bayes’ theorem and its applications.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:4
Probability Distributions
 

Meaning of Probability Distribution, Random variables, Discrete and continuous random variables. Expected value, Use of expected value in decision making, Variance of a random variable. Binomial, Poisson, Uniform, Normal and Exponential distributions and their properties and applications.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:5
Sampling Methods and Estimation
 

Sampling - Need, benefits and limitations. Probability and Non-probability sampling methods. Sampling distributions, Central Limit Theorem

Estimation: Point and Interval estimators of mean and proportion - Determining sample size using confidence interval approach.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:5
Testing of Statistical Hypothesis
 

Concepts basic to hypothesis, null and alternative hypothesis, testing procedure, level of significance, Types of errors. Measuring power of a hypothesis test. Testing of means and proportions for small and large samples, testing of difference between means and proportions for small and large samples.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:4
Chi-square Test and Analysis of Variance
 

Chi-Square test of goodness of fit and test of independence. ANOVA, Multiple comparison procedures.

Inference about population variance. Overview of Analysis of CRD, RBD, LSD, and factorial designs.

t-Tests, Chi-square test for Goodness of Fit and independence of attributes, ANOVA using MS Excel.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:5
Correlation and Regression
 

Concept of Correlation - Measure of Correlation & Interpretation. Simple Linear Regression - Form, fitting, prediction, hypothesis testing in linear regression. Residual analysis for validation of assumptions* - normality, homoscedasticity, outliers and influential observations.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Anderson, D.R., Sweeny, D.J., Williams, T.A., Camm, J.D., Cochran, J.J. (2017). Statistics for business & economics, 13thEdition .Boston: CengageLearning. 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Levin, I. R. & Rubin, D. S. (2011). Statistics for management. New Delhi: Prentice Hall India Publications.

Black, K. (2013). Applied business statistics. New Delhi: Wiley Publications.

Levine, D. M., Stephan, D. F., Krehbiel, T. C. & Berenson, M. L. (2011). Statistics for managers using microsoft excel, 6th ed. New Delhi: Prentice Hall India Publications.

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation Pattern

CIA I                                                                                                                            10

CIA II                                                                                                                          25

CIA III                                                                                                                        30

End Trimester                                                                                                             30

Attendance                                                                                                                  05

Total                                                                                                                          100

CIA I consists of MCQ, CIA II consists of Midterm, and CIAIII consists of Assignment and MCQs. End term examination is for 50 marks, converted for 30 marks.   

 *self learning,

** Ethical issues

MBA136 - FOUNDATIONS OF MARKETING MANAGEMENT (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:10
No of Lecture Hours/Week:1
Max Marks:50
Credits:1

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

 

Course description:

 

This course is designed to offer the fundamental aspects, ideas, concepts and examples of how marketing is understood and practiced to the students of MBA during the first trimester. The course will focus on establishing a strong understanding of the role played by the customer in the larger idea of business and how a marketer could spearhead business decisions by providing customer insights to the top management or decision makers. The course will discuss at length the philosophy behind marketing as a business orientation in comparison with other orientations such as production, product and sales.

 

 

 

In addition to the mentioned aspects, the course will dwell into offering practical understanding of why and how markets are segmented. What are the pre-requisites to be considered while choosing a target market? And what positioning strategies could be developed to create the required impact in the chosen market.

 

 

 

The course is offered using class discussions, micro-projects, case study analysis as pedagogic tools. This course has two components of continuous internal assessments, one mid-trimester examination and an end-trimester examination.

 

Course Outcome

 

On completion of the course, the participant will be able to;

 

Knowledge

 

  1. Define marketing and provide his/her own understanding (meaning) of marketing.
  2. Have clarity on the philosophy of marketing and how it affects overall business environment
  3. Know how segmentation, targeting and positioning strategies are formulated and implemented.

 

 

 

Skills

 

  1. Work in teams on micro-projects
  2. Look for customer insights from various data sources presented to them
  3. Make presentations and communicate his/her perspective and ideas clearly and confidently to the audience.

 

Attitude:

 

1.       Effectively realize the importance of customer orientation in business decisions.

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:6
Introduction to Basic Marketing Concepts
 

 

Introduction to Marketing

 

 Importance and Scope of Marketing; Core marketing concepts; Company Orientations; Marketing Realities; Integrated, Internal and Performance Marketing; Marketing Management Tasks

 

Value Philosophy in Marketing

 

 

 

Understanding the value philosophy, Meaning of value; Value Creation and Delivery; Value Delivery Process; Value Delivery and Upstream Marketing; Value Innovation; Co-creation of value

 

 

 

Analysing the Marketing Environment

 

 

 

Components of Environment; Macro Environment; Environment specific to the firm; Global Environment – global economy, global demographics, consumer environment, technology environment, competition environment.

 

 

Marketing environment of India and the Marketing Challenges

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:4
Market Segmentation, Targeting, Differentiation & Positioning
 

 

Levels of Segmentation; Bases for Segmenting Consumer and Business Markets;

 

Market Targeting

 

Developing and Communicating a Positioning Strategy

 

Differentiation Strategies

                                                    

Text Books And Reference Books:

Kotler, P., Keller, K. L., Koshy, A. & Jha, M. (2009); Marketing Management – A South Asian Perspective. 13thEd, Pearson, New Delhi.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

 

Ramaswamy,V.S. &Namakumari. (2013); Marketing Management. 5thEd, McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

 

 

 

Evaluation Pattern

 

Evaluation Pattern

 

Marks Break up

Out of

Weight

Attendance

Total

CIA-II(Report-10 marks & Presentation-10 marks)

20

20

0

 

20

 

CIA-III (MCQ – 10 Marks

& Assignment – 15 marks)

25

25

0

25

 

 

 

TOTAL

45+5=50 marks

 

MBA181 - ORGANIZATION STRUCTURE TRAINING (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:0
No of Lecture Hours/Week:0
Max Marks:100
Credits:2

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course is undertaken by the students as a self-study project.  The project is carried out by the students for one month before joining the MBA program and is evaluated during Trimester 1. It will be an organizational study in a manufacturing-oriented, large organization for a minimum of thirtydays.

Course Outcome

At the end of the course, students should have the knowledge and application of

·         Vision, mission and objectives of business organization

·         Organizational structure in business organizations

·         Business functions in a business firm

·         Organization type  the business under study fits in

·         SWOT analysis for a business organization

·         Key Result Areas of a business organization

·         Business growth over years with appreciation of enablers and barriers

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:0
Topics
 

OST project work should cover the following topics.

a)      Organization’s history

b)      Profile of the product

c)      Mission, objectives and strategies of the organization

d)     Organization chart - Design & Structure

e)      Policies and procedures followed

f)       Functions of various departments and their managers

g)      SWOT analysis of the organization

h)      Key Result Areas (KRAs) of the organization

i)        Significant factors for success

j)        System of accounting followed

k)      Product promotional measures

l)        Career planning and promotion policy of employees

m)    Training measures

n)      System followed for purchase of materials

o)      HRD measures (including welfare measures)

p)      Manpower planning

q)      Performance appraisal system

r)       Financial highlights during the last three years

s)       Future plans for growth of the organization

t)       Views of managers at various levels and non-managerial staff by detailed interaction.

u)      Advantages and drawbacks of the organization structure

v)      Recommendations to overcome the drawbacks.

w)    Modifications, if any, to the organization structure.

Note: Relevant software applications used in the organization need to be identified, wherever applicable for the above topics.

Text Books And Reference Books:

1.      Harold Koontz and Heinz Weihrich. Principles of management. Tata McGraw Hill.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.      Meenakshi Gupta. Principles of management. PHI.

2.      Tripathi and Reddy. Principles of management. Tata McGraw Hill.

3.      Interaction with company people

4.      Website of organization

Evaluation Pattern

Parameter With Maximum Marks

Excellent

(100% of marks allotted for parameter)

Good

(75% of marks allotted for parameter)

Satisfactory

(60% of marks allotted for parameter)

Poor

(40% of marks allotted for parameter)

Number of topics studied (10)

>23

20 to 23

10 to 19

<10

Mapping the organization to its type (10)

Right mapping with justification

 

Right mapping without justification

Wrong mapping

No mapping

OST Completion Certificate (10)

Available and includes work appreciation

Available and does not include work appreciation

Available with delay

Not Available

SWOT Analysis (15)

Proper identification of all elements of SWOT

Majority elements properly identified

Majority elements improperly identified

SWOT Analysis not done

No of Days of OST Work (10)

Beyond 30 Days

30 Days

25 to 29 Days

Up to 24 Days

Presentation (15)

Well-structured presentation covering all the topics with excellent Communication

Semi-structured presentation covering all the topics with good communication

Semi-structured structured presentation not covering all topics with good communication

Unstructured presentation with poor communication

Report (15)

As per the format

Slight deviations from format

No relation to format

No Format

Quiz (15)

Marks secured by student

MBA211 - MENTORING AND CURRENT AFFAIRS (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Mentoring enables a student to enforce the learning process thus enabling the student to achieve career goals and objectives.

It is a continuous, feedback driven process where the individual's development is monitored, assessed on a regular basis. 

Course Outcome

Knowledge:

Mentees develop a habit of keeping themselves updated on the latest happenings in the business world. They learn to interpret various economic indices on a regular basis.

Skill: Mentees develop presentation skills, communication skills, leadership skills and analytical skills.

Attitude: Mentees develop a positive attitude towards learning process apart from time management and Punctuality.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:30
Industrial Domain Knowledge
 

Developing various soft skills and analytical skills through analysis of current affairs on a continuous basis

Text Books And Reference Books:

Reading material provided by mentor

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Daily newspaper and periodicals

Evaluation Pattern

Mentees are evaluated upon the following assessment parameters on a continuous basis:

Formulation of SWOT analysis Preparation of regular updation of news, events etc

Individual contribution to mentoring sessions (Enthusiasm, Initiative, Sharing, Group Discussion, Quiz)

Individual presentations (Content, Skills, Communication)\ Book Review

Any other activity designed by mentor 

MBA231 - MARKETING MANAGEMENT (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:50
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course description:

This course is designed to offer the fundamental aspects, ideas, concepts and examples of how marketing is understood and practiced to the students of MBA during the first trimester. The course will focus on establishing a strong understanding of the role played by the customer in the larger idea of business and how a marketer could spearhead business decisions by providing customer insights to the top management or decision makers. The course will discuss at length the philosophy behind marketing as a business orientation in comparison with other orientations such as production, product and sales.

 

In addition to the mentioned aspects, the course will dwell into offering practical understanding of why and how markets are segmented. What are the pre-requisites to be considered while choosing a target market? And what positioning strategies could be developed to create the required impact in the chosen market.

 

This course provides conceptual and practicing knowledge of product/brand development; pricing mechanisms and various pricing options available for marketers; develop effective communication strategies and identify and evaluate distributing options for the designed customer value proposition.

 

The course is offered using class discussions, micro-projects, case study analysis as pedagogic tools. This course has two components of continuous internal assessments, one mid-trimester examination and an end-trimester examination.

Course Outcome

Knowledge

  • Define marketing and provide his/her own understanding (meaning) of marketing.
  • Have clarity on the philosophy of marketing and how it affects overall business environment
  • Know how segmentation, targeting and positioning strategies are formulated and implemented
  • Appreciate concepts related to marketing and how it aids decision making in business
  • Develop reasoned perspective on value creation to customers and how it related to value created for the organization.

Skills

  • Work in teams on micro-projects
  • Look for customer insights from various data sources presented to them
  • Make presentations and communicate his/her perspective and ideas clearly and confidently to the audience
  • Design a comprehensive marketing plan
  • Evaluate marketing practices followed by companies on its strategic and operational relevance.

 

 

Attitude:

·         Effectively realize the importance of customer orientation in business decisions

·         Place marketing decisions on its significance in the broad context of strategic business decisions in organizations.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:15
Marketing Mix
 

Product and Brand Strategy

Product Levels; Classifying products; Product Range, Line, Mix; Product Lifecycles; New Product Development, New Service Development; Stages of Product Development; Adoption Process; Branding

 

Pricing to Capture Value                                      

Pricing Environment; Consumer Psychology & Pricing; Pricing Philosophy; Setting Price; Price Adaptations; Initiating Price Changes; Responding to Competitors’ Price Changes

 

Developing Effective Distribution, Logistics and Retailing

Marketing channels and Value Networks; The role of Marketing channels; Channel Design Decisions; Channel Management Decisions; Channel Integration and Systems; Conflict; Cooperation and Competition; E-commerce, Retailing, Private Labels

 

Promoting Value

Marketing Communications; Communication Theory; Personal Influencers; Marketing Communications Mix; WOM, IMC, Cultural aspects of Marketing Communication; Advertising, Sales Promotion, Personal Selling, Direct Marketing; Public Relations; Account Management; Mix Selection; Media

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:15
Sustainable Marketing & Ethics
 

Corporate Social Responsibility & Sustainable Marketing; Ethics and Marketing; Ethical Decision Making Process; Ethics in Distribution Management, Promotion, Offering Products and Pricing; Universalism/Relativism in Marketing Ethics; Bribery

Cause-related Marketing; Social Marketing.

Text Books And Reference Books:
  1. Ramaswamy,V.S. & Namakumari. (2013); Marketing Management. 5th Ed, McGraw Hill, New Delhi
  2. Baines, P., Fill, C., Page, K., & Sinha, P. K. (2013); Marketing. Asian edition, Oxford University Press, New Delhi
Essential Reading / Recommended Reading
  1. Kotler, P., Keller, K. L., Koshy, A. & Jha, M. (2009); Marketing Management – A South Asian Perspective. 13th Ed, Pearson, New Delhi

 

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation will be continuous and conducted under three categories,

 a) Assignments.

b)MCQ

c) End Term Examinations.

CIA-1

Assignment 10 marks Weightage 10%

CIA-II

Assignment   15 Marks Weightage  25%

MCQ Test     10 Marks Weightage  25%

CIA-III

Assignment 30 Marks Weightage  30%

 

Attendance    5 Marks  Weightage  100%

 

End-term Question Paper Format: Marks 50–  Time - 2 hours Weightage 30%

Section A  - 10 marks  4 out  of  6 questions (4 x 10=40 marks)
Section B - 10 marks -case study                                       (1x10=10 marks)

Questions from self learning module would be included in the above mentioned pattern

 

 

MBA232 - INDIVIDUAL AND GROUP BEHAVIOUR IN ORGANIZATIONS (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This core course aids students to understand, predict and influence individual and group behaviour. The course is designed to introduce the field of organizational behavior, giving special attention to the major challenges and the paradigm shift facing individuals and groups in today's organizations;it covers individual understanding of personality, perception, learning, attitudes and values and their influence in  organizational context; it provides students with understanding of group processes and dynamics, motivation and job satisfaction; It will create opportunities to become aware of one’s own behaviour and understand others’ behaviour. The experiential learning method is adopted to understand self, others and groups.

Course Outcome

Learning Outcomes

At the end of the course, the student will be able to

 

 

 

Knowledge:

 

 

 

·         Integrate basic concepts of individual and group behaviour as a distinct field in management with practical application.

 

 

 

Skill

 

 

 

·         Develop ability to understand one’s own behaviour and its impact on others at the workplace

 

·         Plan interventions which involve ability to diagnose and effectively deal with human behaviour at the workplace.

 

·         Develop personal and interpersonal skillsfor influencing and managing individuals and groups

 

 

 

Attitude

 

 

 

·         Adopt a proactive and holistic approach toward dealing with peoplechallenges.

 

 

 

·          

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:4
Introduction to Organizational Behaviour
 

Historical Development, Behavioural sciences and Organizational behaviour, Meaning, Importance, Basic concepts, Methods and tools for understanding behaviour, Challenges and Opportunities, OB model, ethical issues in organizational Behaviour  (Self learning modules) *

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:7
Individual Behaviour- Personality, Perception and Learning
 

Personality:  Foundations of Individual behaviour, Personality, Meaning and Importance, Development of personality, Determinants of personality, Theories of personality, Relevance of personality to managers. (3 hrs)

Perception:  Nature, Importance and Definition of Perception, Factors involved in perception, The Perceptual Process, Perceptual Selectivity and Organization, Applications in Organizations. (2 hrs)

Learning: Definition and Importance, Theories of learning, Principles of learning, Shaping as managerial tool (2 hrs)

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:5
Attitudes, Values & Job Satisfaction
 

Attitudes: Sources and Types of attitudes, Attitude formation and change, Cognitive Dissonance Theory. Effects of employee attitude, Job related attitudes (2 hrs)

Values: meaning, importance, source and types, and applications in organizations. (2 hrs)

Job satisfaction: Measuring Job Satisfaction, Causes of Job Satisfaction, Impact of satisfied and dissatisfied employees on the workplace (2 hrs)

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:5
Motivation
 

Meaning, process and significance of motivation, Early Theories of motivation: Hierarchy of Needs, Theory X Theory Y, Two Factor theory, McClelland Theory of Needs, Contemporary Theories of Motivation: Goal Setting theory, Self Efficacy theory, Equity theory/Organizational justice, Expectancy theories, Motivation theories applied in organizations: Job design, employee involvement, rewards and global implications

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:5
Groups & Teams
 

Groups – Meaning, classification and nature of groups, Stages of group development, An Alternative model for Temporary Groups with Punctuated Equilibrium Model, Group properties: Roles, Norms, Status, Size and Cohesiveness, Group decision making (3 hrs)

Teams -Meaning of teams, Types of teams, Creating Effective teams, what makes individuals into effective team players, Team development, Team decision making. (3 hrs)

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:4
Contemporary Issues
 

Organizational behaviour (OB) in global context, Boundary less organizations, Cross-Cultural Management, Managing multicultural teams, Communicating across cultures OB in the digital age (Self learning modules) *        

Text Books And Reference Books:

.       Robbins, S P., Judge, T A and Vohra, N (2013).  Organizational Behavior. 15th Edition, Prentice Hall of India.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.      Adler, N. J & Gundersen, A.(2008). International Organizational Behavior ,5th Edition, Cengagge Learning India Private Limited.

  Anastasi A & Urbina ( 1997) Psychological Testing , Pearson Education.

Baron RA & Byrne D (2000) Social Psychology , Pearson Education12. 

2.       Helriegel, D., Slocum, J. N., & Woodman, R. W. (2010). Organizational behavior. Macgraw-Hill.

3.       Hodegetts, R.  M.  (2011). Organizational behavior.   Macmillan.

4.       Greenberg, J., & Baron, R. A. (2009). Behavior in organizations.   Prentice hall of India.

5.       Nelson, D.I & Quick, J.C (2013).  Organizational Behavior, Thomson South Western

6.       Pareek.U (2013). Understanding Organizational Behavior. Oxford University Press

7.       Kreitner, R & Kinicki, A (2012). Organizational behavior.  McGraw hill.

8.       Goleman D (2006) Social Intelligence, Hutchinson, London

9.       Hogan K (2006) The Science of Influence , Wiley and Sons India (P) Ltd

10.    Thaler RH & Sunstein C (2008) Nudge – Inproving decisions about health, wealth, and happiness, Penguin.

11.    

 

Evaluation Pattern

CIA = 20 marks (MCQ/Group/individual Presentations/ written assignments/ micro projects/

Learning journals)

Mid semester = 50 marks

CIA II = 20 marks (MCQ/Group/individual Presentations/ written assignments/ micro projects/ Learning journals)

End semester = 100 marks

 

Mid-Term Pattern

Sec A: situational question

Section A – Situational based questions : 10 marks

Section B – 5 questions out of 7, 6 marks each (30 Marks)

Section C –  Case study : 10 marks

Total : 50 marks


 

End-Term Evaluation Pattern

Sec A: 5/8 (8 marks = 40 marks)

Sec B: 4/6 (12 marks = 48)

Sec C: Case Study (12 marks)

MBA233 - MANAGEMENT SCIENCE (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

To become aware of various optimisation models that are of business importatance. Management science ncessarily amins at teaching students mathematial models that are  more frequently used for business decision making. Optimum portfolio selction, sequencing, transportation, assignment models are taught to facilitate studnets to understand model building process.

Course Outcome

At the end of the course, the student should be able to:

 Knowledge

·        Create mathematical models and apply them in business

·        Solve a variety of mathematical models and make inferences from the solutions.

Skills

·        Advise functional decision makers using results from mathematical models

·        Use advanced options in Excel solver.

·        Apply algorithms used to derive the optimal solution for standard LPP, Transportation and Assignment, Project Scheduling, and Sequencing.

Attitude

Be open to the idea that complex business information can be converted into clear and parsimonious mathematical models, that when solved will help to optimize resources.

 Level of Knowledge -Conceptual, analytical, problem solving 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:6
Introduction to Operations Research and LPP
 

Introduction: Evolution - importance - scope and impact on business - Models - by function; by structure; by environment - limitations of OR techniques

Introduction to LPP- formulation, Graphical method, Sensitivity analysis and Duality theory.

Overview of Simplex method.

Formulating and developing a spreadsheet model for LPP and use of Excel solver. Solution and Sensitivity Analysis using Excel.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:6
Transportation Problems
 

Nature and scope - Optimal solution - North West Corner rule - Matrix minima method - VOGEL’s Approximation Method (VAM) - Test for optimality - Modified Distribution Method (MODI) - Unbalanced transportation problems

Spreadsheet models for Transportation problems.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:3
Assignment Problems
 

Hungarian method - Unbalanced assignment - Maximization in assignment - Travelling salesman problem - Transshipment problem.Flight assignment problems.

Spreadsheet models for Assignment problems.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:4
Game Theory
 

Introduction to Game theory- Definition - Payoff - Types of games - 2-person zero sum game –maximin/minimaxprinciple. Applications of Saddle point theorem.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:4
Sequencing and Simulation
 

Sequencing:Processing n jobs through 2 and 3 machines.

Simulation:Introduction - random number generation - Monte Carlo Technique - application.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:4
Applications of Markov Chains
 

Applications of Transitions Matrices of Markov Chains - Brand Switching Analysis, Attrition Analysis, Spreadsheet models.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:3
Queuing Theory
 

Queuing Theory: Features of the Waiting Line system - Kendall’s Notation - Queuing models - Single Channel/Infinite capacity.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Anderson, D.R., Sweeney, D.J., Williams, T.A., Camm, J.D., Cochran J.J., Fry, M.J., Ohlmann, J.W. (2016). Quantitative Methods for Business, 13th Edition.Boston: Cengage Learning.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Hillier, F. S. & Hillier, M.S. (2014).Introduction to Management Science: A Modeling and Case Studies Approach with Spreadsheets, 5/e. New Delhi: McGraw-Hill Education.

Hillier, F.S.& Lieberman, G.J. (2015).Introduction to Operations Research, 10/e. New Delhi: McGraw Hill Education.

 

Taha, H.A. (2017).  Operations Research: An Introduction (10th Edition). Noida: Pearson India Education Services Pvt. Ltd.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA I                                                                                                                               10 Marks

CIA II                                                                                                                             25 Marks

CIA III                                                                                                                           30 Marks

 

Attendance                                                                                                                  5 Marks

End Trimester                                                                                                              30 Marks

CIA- 1 consists of assignment, CIA 2 consists of 1 assignment and 1 MCQ, CIA 3 consists of 1 assignment and 1 MCQ.

The final examination will be of 50 marks, converted to 30 marks.

MBA234 - FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

In this course, the focus shifts from recording and analyzing the financial books to using the accounting information efficiently for managerial effectiveness. While financial accounting provides information for external users, financial management forms a useful tool for internal users namely the managers.  Students learn concepts of financial management such as time value of money, cost of capital, capital structure, dividend policy and sources of finance and further learn to use these concepts for decision making.

Course Outcome

  1. Students are able to apply the important elements of finance concepts for running a business.
  2. Students are able to evaluate decision facilitating roles of accounting information.
  3. Students are able to solve business problems of the real world pertaining to basic elements of financial management
  4. Students are able to appreciate the ethical and social dimensions of managing finance in business.

 

Level of Knowledge: Basic, Applied / Working

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:0
Overview of Corporate Finance (Self Learning Module)
 

Scope of finance, Finance functions, financial manager’s role, financial goal

Profit maximization vs. wealth maximization, Organization of finance function.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:4
Time Value of Money
 

Time preference for money; Future value of a single cash flow & annuity, Present value of a single cash flow of a single cash flow and annuity, Simple interest & compound interest, Capital recovery & loan amortization, Stated vs. effective rate of interest

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:4
Cost of Capital
 

Concept of opportunity cost of capital, Method of calculating cost of capital- cost of debt, preference & equity capital, CAPM model, Determination of weighted average cost of capital (WACC), Weighted marginal cost of capital.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:7
Investment Decision
 

Objectives: Nature of investment decision, Type of investment decision, Investment evaluation criteria, Compare & contrast NPV & IRR. Determining cash flows for investment analysis: Cash flows v/s profit Incremental cash flows, components of cash flows.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:4
Working Capital Management
 

Needs for investing in current assets, Concept of working capital management. Approaches in working capital, Factors affecting working capital management Estimation of working capital requirement, Receivable management, Working capital finance decision.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:6
Capital Structure and Dividend Policy
 

Introduction, planning the capital structure, capital structure theory (in brief), Factors in determining capital structure decisions. EPS / EBIT analysis and EPS/ ROE analysis.

Dividend theories (Walter, Gordon, M&M), Dividend policies in practice, Bonus shares.

 

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:5
Sources of Finance
 

Sources of Long-term Finance:Shares, Debentures and term loans; Raising long-term finance- IPO, Right issue, Private placement etc. International sources of finance – ECB, FCCB, ADR, GDR etc (only the product and not the process of raising money).

Text Books And Reference Books:

1. Brigham & Houston, 14th Ed.,  Fundamental of Financial Management,  CENGAGE Learing

2.  Chandra, P. (2010). Fundamentals of Financial Management. Tata McGraw-Hill Education.

3.  Khan, M. Y., & Jain, P. K. (2010). Financial Management. Tata Mac Graw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd.

        4.  Pandey,I M(2010).Financial Management.(10e)Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

 

 

1. Banerji, A.S.K. (2002). Financial Management and Policy. S.Chand & Co.

2. Brealey, R. A. (2007). Principles of Corporate Finance. Tata McGraw-Hill Education.

3. Madhu, V. (2002). Multinational Financial Management. Excell Books Publications.

4. Pandey, I.M. (2010). Financial Management (10th ed.).Vikas Publication House.

5. Shah, P. P. (2005). Financial Management+ with CD Indian text edition. Dreamtech Press.

6. Van, Horne James, C. (2002). Financial Management & policy (12th ed.). Pearson Education India.

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation Pattern:

 a. CIA 1 - 10% Marks (One Assignment, group or individual)

b. CIA 2 - 25% Marks (Written Exam for 2 Hrs)
c. CIA 3 - 30% Marks (15% One Assignment, 15% Quiz)
 
d. Attendance - 5%
e.End term exam - 30% (2 hours exam)

 

 

MBA235 - MICROSOFT EXCEL (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:15
No of Lecture Hours/Week:2
Max Marks:50
Credits:2

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Microsoft Excel is a proprietary spreadsheet application developed by Microsoft. Its significant features include calculations, functions, graphing tools, pivot tables among others. Microsoft Excel has varied uses for managers in the business like planning, estimating, budgeting, forecasting, tracking, reporting, creating dashboards, analyzing varied business scenario and financial modeling. 

 This course attempts to build the skills of MBA students to effectively use Excel as a tool while handling data. Current MBA students are future young managers who would don multiple roles in the functional areas of Production, Planning, Personnel Management, Marketing, Payroll and Accounting.

Course Outcome

Knowledge

·         Be familiar with Advanced Excel features & functions that are frequently used to solve business problems.

Skills

·         Identify business problems through practice exercises

·         Acquire hands-on skills in Excel

·         Find solutions with appropriate features & functions using Microsoft Excel

·         Interpret the solution for a given problem situation

Attitude

·         Focus on the problem identification

·         Choice of right tools to handle/analyze data

  Draw meaningful insights from a given scenario

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:15
Microsoft Excel
 

Spreadsheet programs are developed to automate tasks such as mathematical calculations, inferential statistics and data analysis among others. It is essential that every management student must acquire these skills as it enables a budding manager progress in his career. 

Text Books And Reference Books:

Class Exercises provided for hands-on practice

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

https://www.excel-easy.com/

Evaluation Pattern

Hands-on assignment in each unit

Quiz                                                    20 marks

Comprehensive test                          30 marks

 

Total                                                    50 marks

MBA236 - OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

This paper is offered as a Core mandatory course  in the Second Trimester. It develops an insight into the Strategy, Planning, Manufacturing (also known as Production) and Control aspects of Operations. It prepares students for careers in the area of Operations Management  (OM) encompassing both Manufacturing and Service organizations.

Course Objective

This course provide students, the insights related to the Strategy, Planning, Execution and Control aspects of Operations related to both manufacturing and service sectors. Various concepts such as Supply Chain Management (SCM), Project Management, Total Quality Management (TQM), Product & Process Design which are related to Operations for enhancing effectiveness are dealt with.

Course Outcome

Learning Outcomes

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Knowledge

·         Gain expertise on the concepts of Operations Management which include Inventory Management, Project Management, Supply Chain Management, Total Quality Management for effective utilization of resources and meeting customer expectations.

·         Develop Operations strategies to ensure manufacturing companies and service companies are competitive globally. 

Skills

·            Use Analytical Skills in solving problems related to Inventory management, Project Management, Supply Chain Management and Total Quality Management.

·            Use good  Reporting  Skills  to make reports  related to Operations Management.

Attitude

·         Developing understanding of other functional department goals and overall goals of organization and align operation department goals to suit organizational goals.

 

Level of Knowledge Conceptual and Basic understanding of the fundamentals of Operations Management.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:5
Introduction and Operations Strategy
 

                                                     

Introduction: The Field of Operations Management, Production Systems, OM in the Organizational Chart, Operations as Service, Historical Development of OM, Current Issues in Operations Management.

Operations Strategy: Operations Strategy, Operations Competitive Dimensions, Corporate Strategy Design Process, Fitting Operational Activities to Strategy, Productivity Measurement.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:4
Business Process Design
 

Process Selection, Manufacturing Process Flow Design, Measuring Product Development Performance, Planning the strategic use of resources: Plant location and Plant Layout, Line balancing with numerical, Takt time.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:4
Inventory Measurement
 

Inventory Management: Definition of Inventory, Purposes of Inventory, Inventory Costs, Economic Order Quantity (EOQ),Independent versus Dependent Demand, Inventory Systems, Inventory Classification: ABC,  FSN, VED and Vendor Managed Inventory (VMI)

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:4
Supply Chain Management
 

 

Introduction to Supply Chain Management (SCM), Bull-whip effect, Push and Pull Systems, Role of Technologies in SCM

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:5
Quality Management
 

Management of Quality – Introduction to Quality Management (QM) tools such as Seven Quality Control (7 QC) tools, Total Quality Management (TQM), Statistical Process Control (SPC), Six Sigma

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:4
Project Management
 

Introduction, Project Planning, Structuring Projects, Work Breakdown Structure.

 

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:4
Current trends in Operations Management
 

Ethical issues in Operations Management (OM). Lean Concepts, Sustainable Operations  

( Self  learning Module )                                                          

Text Books And Reference Books:

Recommended reading

1.       Chase,  R.  B. &  Nicholas, A. J., & et al. (2010). Operations management for competitive advantage. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill.

2.       Lee, K. J., & Larry, R. P. (2002). Operations management, processes and value chains. New Delhi: Pearson Education Publications.

3.        Gaither, N. F.(2002). Production & operations management. New Delhi: Thomson Learning Publications.

4.       Stevenson, W. J. (2007).Production and operations management, New Delhi: McGraw Hill.

5.       Jay, H., & Barry, R. (2011). Operations management. New Delhi: Pearson Education Publications.

6.       Buffa, E. S., & Sarin, R. K. (2008).Modern production/operations management. New Delhi: John Wiley & Sons Publications.

  1.  Russel, R. S., & Taylor, B. W. (2012). Operations management. New Delhi: John Wiley & Sons Publications.

8.       Chase, R. B., & Ravi Shankar, Et al. (2010). Operations and Supply Management. India: McGraw Hill.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Mahadevan, B. (2015). Operations Management. India: Pearson. 3rd Edition

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation Pattern

CIA I            10 marks  (Assignment 10 marks)

CIA  II         25 marks   (Mid-Term Exam, 50 marks paper with marks obtained converted to 25 marks)

CIA III         30 marks  (Assignment 15 marks, MCQ: 15 marks)

CIA = Continuous Internal Assessment. Some components of CIA will be group assignments.

 

Attendance                                    05 marks

End Term Exam                           30 marks

MBA237 - ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING AND E-BUSINESS (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 
The course offers a fundamental framework of Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) in an organization and makes students understand the scope and role of ERP. It identifies the various functional modules for vertical and horizontal workflow of business operations and enables students to understand how managers could take better decisions through integration of information. It also provides an understanding of conducting business-related processes through the internet.
 

Course Outcome

The course would enable students to understand the role of ERP in business transactions through various business processes. They would learn the application of ERP for effective and efficient functioning of organizations to bring improvement in business functions. Students would gain knowledge in the various aspects of E-Business such as E-Commerce and E-Security.

At the end of the course, students are expected to:

Knowledge

·         Understand the role of ERP in business transactions through various business processes

·         Apply ERP  concepts for effective and efficient functioning of organizations to bring improvement in business functions.

      Enable students to understand and implement digital technologies in business.

      Be able to appreciate the role of e-payments, e-security, e-marketing, e-services.

      Focus on Academic Excellence by understanding concepts and applications related to ERP and E-Business.

Skills

 ·         Gain expertise in selection of ERP software and the associated issues and challenges in implementation.

       Gain expertise in understanding of business processes that can be integrated in a seamless chain

 Obtain skills to evaluate various e-commerce revenue models

 Enhance critical thinking through Case Analysis

 Develop technical ability to design an e-commerce website

 Attitude

 ·         Value the significance of data integration across functional modules by managers

·           Appreciate sharing of data across various functional departments for better decision making

         Have an enhanced focus on ethical aspects in an e-business environment.

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:3
Concepts and Benefits of ERP
 

Definition of ERP, Benefits of ERP, ERP potential in Business transformation.

Roles of ERP, Need for ERP, Demand of ERP, Evolution of ERP

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:4
Building Business Cases for ERP
 

Gap analysis, Competitive Environment Analysis, Strategic Needs analysis, Feasibility Analysis.

ERP Project lifecycle, Cost elements, Modules of ERP

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:4
ERP enabled Business Process Reengineering
 

Is Re-engineering necessary? Introduction to BPR, Implementing BPR, BPR characteristics and steps, ERP and BPR, ERP modeling in BPR.

Business Case, Five stage AS-IS-TO-BE Analysis

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:4
ERP Implementation and Trends in ERP
 

Critical success factors for ERP implementation, ERP implementation approaches, Issues in ERP implementation projects, Change Management strategies**.

Integration with E-Business, Cloud-based ERP

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:3
Introduction to E-Business
 

Introduction to E-Commerce and E-Business, Unique features of E-Commerce, Partial Vs Pure E-Commerce, Benefits and Limitations of E-Commerce.

Various Business Models of E-Commerce: B2C, B2B, C2B, C2C, etc., Revenue models of E-Commerce

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:4
EDI and M-Commerce
 

EDI, Evolution Standards, VAN. How EDI works, EDI implementation.

Mobile Commerce, Drivers, Technologies, M-Commerce standards, CDMA, GSM.  M-Commerce: Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, Wi-Max

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:4
E-Payment and E-Security
 

Introduction to E-Payment, E-Payment Types, E-payment applications, B2B e-payments.

Security issues, Prevention of security breaches, Digital Signature, Digital Certificate.

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:4
Marketing on the Internet and E-Business Trends
 

Consumer-oriented E-Commerce, Search Engine Marketing. Advertising and marketing on the Web*, E-mail marketing, Service marketing on the Web.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Jaiswal, M., & Vanapalli, G. (2005). TextBook of Enterprise Resource Planning (5th Edition ed.). Chennai: MacMillan Publishers India Limited.
 
Turban, E., & King, D. (2012). Electronic Commerce 2012 Managerial and Social Networks Perspectives (7th ed.,). Pearson Education Inc.
Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Leon, A. (2008). Enterprise Resource Planning (2nd Edition). New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited.

Singla, A. R. (2008). Enterprise Resource Planning (3rd Edition). New Delhi: Cengage Learning India Pvt. Ltd.

Laudon K.C, Traver C.G. (2008),  E-Business- Business. Technology. Society, (4th Edition).India: Pearson Education.

Kalakota R.B., Whinston A.B., (2011). Frontiers of Electronic Commerce, USA: Addison Wesley Publications.

Evaluation Pattern

·         CIA Assignments                                                                                                    

CIA 1                                            -   10 marks 

CIA 2                                            -   25 marks

CJA 3                                            -   30 marks (MCQ 15 marks and Assignment 15 marks) 

 

·         Attendance                                    -    5 marks       

·          End Trimester Examination          -  30 marks (converted from 50 marks)

MBA239 - ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:15
No of Lecture Hours/Week:1
Max Marks:50
Credits:1

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course is a continuation of the course Financial Accounting For Managers which is

offered in the first trimester. This course deals with analysing the financial statements of a

company. As the students already know how to prepare financial statements, during this

course, they will learn how to analyse them. The three financial statements analysed in this

course are Profit and Loss account, Balance Sheet and Cash Flow Statement.

Course Objectives

This course attempts to familiarize students to derive conclusions on profitability, liquidity

and solvency of a firm from its financial statements. This course intends make students able

to analyse and interpret the financial health of an organization and use the same for fact

based decision making.

Course Outcome

By the end of the course, the students should be able to:

 

Knowledge

·          Appreciate decision facilitating roles of accounting information.

·          Read and understand contemporary developments in the area of accounting.

 

Skills

·         Understand and analyse information contained in Financial Statements.

 

Attitude

·         Appreciate the ethical dimensions in accounting and reporting and be able to adopt a socially responsible outlook while preparing accounting statements.

·         Bring about an integrative understanding of the entire business while reading and / or preparing financial statements.

·         Understand the importance of collaborative functioning in diverse teams to achieve the common organizational goal of value creation to all the stake holders. 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:8
Analyzing financial statements:
 

Profit and Loss Account and Balance sheet

Ratio Analysis, Vertical Analysis, Horizontal Analysis

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:7
Cash Flow statement
 

Cash flow from operating, investing and financing activities

Interpreting cash flow statement

Free cash flow

Text Books And Reference Books:

Naryanaswamy, R. Financial accounting – A management perspective, (4th ed.). PHI.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.       Anthony, Robert. (2009), Accounting text and cases. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill Publications.

2.       Bhattacharya, A.B. (2010). Financial accounting for business managers. (3rd Ed.). New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India.

3.       Gupta, Ambrish., Financial accounting for management. New Delhi: Pearson Publications.

4.       Lal, Jawahar., & Srivastava, Seema. Cost accounting. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Publications.

Maheshwari S.N., Advance accounting. New Delhi: Vikash Publishing House

Evaluation Pattern

The course will have two evaluation components - CIA 1 - 20 marks and CIA 2 - 25 marks and attendance - 5 marks

 

 

MBA3041L - QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS AND PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This paper is offered as a functional elective in the third trimester to LOS students. This paper is divided into two parts -- QMS and Product Design  & Development.

Quality Management Systems emphasizes the importance of Total Quality Management in all areas or segments of business and organizations. Students develop and specialize on various approaches to quality and problem solving methodology, using Quality tools. Product Design & Development emphasizes the importance of product design in a business. Students develop and specialize in design thinking and on several concepts involved in product design decisions.

 

Course Outcome

At the end of the course, students should be able to:

Knowledge:

·         Apply concepts in TQM and Product Design & Development

·         Learn current practices in the field of QMS

·         Understand concepts of Product Design for efficiently introducing new products

Skills:

·         Take effective decisions by using contemporary Management / Quality tools

·         Develop skills in Design Thinking through a practical exercise

Attitude:

·         Realize that Quality is imperative in all areas or segments of business

·         Understand the importance of Customer focus for Product realization

Level of Knowledge

Students must have undergone courses of fundamentals in Operations Management.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:4
Introduction to Quality
 

Importance of Quality – history - dimensions of quality – evolution of Total Quality principles. Quality Philosophies: Deming 14 Points to transform business; Juran Trilogy; Crosby Zero Defects; Ishikawa quality circles, customer supplier relationship; Taguchi Loss function. Kaizen as a function of Quality.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:3
Cost of Quality
 

Cost of Quality - Discretionary Cost: - Prevention – Appraisal - Consequential Cost: Internal Failure - External Failure.  Quality and differentiation strategies, quality - strategic planning. COPQ- Cost of Poor Quality, Warranty Claims/ Field Returns and Management.

 

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:5
Quality Tools, Systems and Awards
 

Management tools for quality, tools for Quality planning. Process Design & Control. Quality Circles, ISO 9000, ISO 14000, ISO TS 16949 and Six Sigma. Malcolm Baldridge Award – criteria for performance excellence, International quality awards. Comparing Baldridge, ISO 9000 and Six Sigma. TQM in Education.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:3
Quality Teamwork and Leadership
 

Importance of teams in Total Quality Management - types of teams - effective teamwork. Importance of empowerment & motivation - principles of empowerment - role of a quality leader. Ethical values in Quality. Implementing TQM - culture change required. Establishment of (EQC) Effective Quality Communication system. To enhance internal (department) and external (customer and supplier) communication management. Manpower Training and Management of Quality systems. “Genchi Gembutsu”concept – Go and See actual to understand Quality.

 

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:4
Introduction to Product Design and Development
 

Characteristics of successful product development, Duration and cost of product development, Challenges of product development, Development processes and organizations: A generic development process, concept development, product development process flow. Concept of Process Design from Material to Dispatch, incl. man( how many), machines (type), equipment ( conveyors, work tables, lights etc).

 

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:4
Product Development Process
 

Product Planning – Product planning process, identifying customer needs, Product specifications. Product Development process – Concept generation, concept selection – concept screening, scoring, caveats, Concept Testing – methods and measures. Product Family Design: Mass customization, product portfolios architecture. Implication of architecture, establishing architecture, delayed differentiation, platform planning. Product Evaluation and Material Evaluation, Suppliers Product and Quality Development. Built in Quality (BIQ) at each process.

 

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:4
Product Life Cycle Design
 

Design for manufacture and assembly– types of processes, process flow structures, process analysis, Manufacturing and associated costs, Prototyping, Robust design, Industrial automation, Design for services – product process matrix for services, Design for environment. Ethical values in Product Design.

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:3
Latest trends in Quality Management and Product Design
 

 

Student self-learning module. Industry expert inputs. Mini project on Quality or systems improvement at industries (implemented through Quality Circles competition).

 

 

Text Books And Reference Books:

1.       Besterfield, D. H, & Besterfield, M.C., & et al. (2011). Total Quality Management. Revised 3rd Edition New Delhi: Pearson Publications.   

2.     K.T. Ulrich et al., (2016).  Product Design and Development, 5th edition, McGraw Hill.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1. Bedi, K. (2010). Quality Management. New Delhi: Oxford Press Publications.

2. Bhatt, S. (2010). Total Quality Management. New Delhi: Himalaya Publications.

3. Evans, J. R. (2012). Quality & Performance Excellence - management, organization and strategy. New Delhi: Cengage Learning 6th Edition

 

Evaluation Pattern

CIA I                             10 marks (Research Article review assignment)

CIA II                            25 marks (Mid term Exam)

CIA III                          30 marks (MCQ 15, Group Presentation 15)

Attendance                      5 marks

End term Examination     30 marks

MBA3042F - MANAGEMENT OF BANKS (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

This course is offered as a finance specialization mandatory course for the MBA program. It prepares students for careers in Banking and Finance industry. Students opting for this specialization understand the various aspects related to management of banks from a macro perspective mainly.

 

Course Objective

This course attempts to make students understand the broad functioning of a bank both at the macro and at micro levels and measure the performance of banks.

Course Outcome

By the end of the course, the students should be able to:

 

Knowledge

·       Understand the broad functioning of a bank both at the macro and at micro levels.

·       Gain foundation in the key issues confronting bank managers today.

·       Recognize the trade-offs involved in making financial decisions and to develop the logical thought processes needed to reach reasonable conclusions in a banking business.

Skill

·       Measure a bank performance using key metrics which are different from other entities business models.

·       Develop a critical analytical thinking in credit proposal processing and disbursing loans.

Attitude

·        Appreciate the ethical, social and governance dimensions concerning banking industry.

·        Develop an integrative thinking of the functioning of the banking industry with the rest of the economy.

·       Understand the importance of collaborative functioning in diverse teams to achieve the common organizational goal of value creation to all the stake holders. 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:2
Functions of Banks and Financial Institutions
 

Role of commercial banks in the economy- Intermediation between savers and users of money in the economy. Payment and Custodial services as functions. Universal Banking License Vs Differentiated Banking License.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:2
Overview of the Banking Industry & Regulation
 

Structure of banks in India. Perspectives of Indian banking sector. Banking policy environment. (Reference:  RBI circulars)

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:0
Banking Products and Services (Self Study)
 

Deposit products: Deposit Accounts, Current Accounts and Savings Accounts -Credit products – Term loans, Working capital loans – Cash Credit and Overdraft Accounts. Payment services and Custodial services, as products.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:4
Evaluating Bank Performance
 

Operation and performance of commercial banks (Reference: RBI circular).Understanding Bank financial statements. DuPont model for evaluating bank performance. Basic risk and return features of commercial banks.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:8
Managing Cost of Funds and Liquidity in banks
 

Overall liquidity analysis. Estimating marginal cost of funds for pricing assets and taking investment decisions.  How do banks meet legal reserve requirements and manage cash assets? A model to estimate liquidity needs and plan for temporary cash deficiencies and longer-term liquidity needs.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:4
Credit and NPA Management
 

Basic credit analysis principles and the characteristics of different types of loans. Procedure for estimating a business borrower’s cash flow from operations. Basic credit scoring models applied to individual borrowers. Interpreting financial statements and generating cash flow estimates to determine repayment prospects.  Customer profitability analysis the basic framework used to assess whether a bank is profiting from a customer’s total relationship.NPA regulations governing banks and NPA management.    

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:8
Risks in Banking
 

Trade-offs involved in balancing credit risk, liquidity risk, interest rate risk, market risk, operational risk etc. How do banks measure and manage interest rate risk? Pricing of securities, total return analysis to investors and the determinants of interest rates. GAP analysis and the use of sensitivity analysis to assess the potential impact of interest rate and balance sheet changes on net interest income. Regulatory capital requirements under Basel III norms.

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:2
Contemporary Topics
 

Relevance of socially responsible banking and financial inclusion. Technology in banking, off-the-shelf products versus in-house developed, in-sourcing versus outsourcing key technology functions. Recent trends in International banking.

Text Books And Reference Books:

RBI circulars; Banks Annual reports, Business news paper articles to follow the trends in banking.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.     MacDonald Scott S., Koch Timothy W, Management of Banking. 6th Edition, Indian:  Cengage learning.

2.     R M Shrivastava., Dr Divya Nigam, (2009). Management of Indian Financial Institutions.    8th edition,  Publisher: Himalaya Publications.

3.     Gup Bentone., Kolari James W, Commercial Banking - The Management of Risk. 3rd Edition,  Wiley India edition.

4.     Hull John C., Risk Management and Financial Institutions.   Pearson.

5.     Dun Bradstreet., Financial Risk Management.   Tata McGraw Hill.

6.     Genneral Management Bank Management.  IIBF Books for CAIIB Exam, Macmillan Publications.

7.     Risk Management.   IIBF Books for CAIIB Exam, Macmillan Publications.

8.     Vivek.,Asthana P.N, Financial Risk Management.  Himalaya Publishing House.

9.     Bhattacharya Hrishikesh., Banking Strategy- Credit Appraisal and Lending Strategies - A Risk-Return Framework.   Oxford University Publications.

10.   Mukherjee D.D., Credit Appraisal, Risk Analysis and Decision Making. 4th enlarged and revised edition, Snow White Publications.

11.   Tannan M.L., Tannan’s Banking Law and Practice in India.  Jain Book Agency.

Evaluation Pattern
A  

#

Component

% of Marks

Details

1

CIA 1

10%

 Marks

(One Assignment, group or individual)

2

CIA 2

25%

Marks

(Written Exam for 2 Hrs)

3

CIA 3

30%

Marks

(15% One Assignment, 15% Quiz)

4

End Term Examination

30%

Marks

(Written Exam for 2 Hrs)

5

Attendance

5%

Marks

(Based on Attendance)

 

Total

100%

Marks

 

MBA3043L - LEAN OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT (2019 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course is offered as a specialization paper for Lean Operations & Systems students in the third trimester. It develops an insight into the current trends and latest concepts that are being applied in the areas of lean management in both manufacturing and service sector. This course prepares the students to achieve excellence in their work area through the application of lean tools and techniques that are contemporary and facilitates organizations to attain greater efficiency and effectiveness through optimal use of resources.

Course Outcome

At the end of the course students should be able to:

 

Knowledge:

·         Learn the latest concepts of lean operations and its applications in both manufacturing and service sectors.

·         Assimilate lean concepts through practical workshop.

·         Analyze and apply  lean concepts to the various scenarios across industries.

 

Skill

·         Use TIMWOOD as a frame work for identifying and managing Operations Waste

·         Use VSM as a tool for  value addition to business and customer

·         Use 5S as a tool  for value addition to business and customer

 

Attitude

·         Visualize business processes through lean philosophy

·         Achieve excellence in all the operational activities

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:4
Overview of Classical Manufacturing Systems
 

Overview of Manufacturing System and its evolution through Craft Production System. Scientific Management - Division of Labour & Standardisation of Fredrick W. Taylor and Time and motion study of Frank & Lillian Gilbreth. Mass Production System pioneered by Henry Ford. Advantages and Disadvantages of Classical Production System in terms of productivity and efficiency. Introduction to Modern Production System. 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:4
Toyota Production System (TPS)
 

History of Toyota Production System; 4Ps of Toyota Toyota's -  14 Management Principles. Toyota Way - Respect for People and Continuous Improvement. Introduction to Lean Management - James Womack.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:4
Lean - Concept of Waste and Value
 

Concepts of waste and value in operations, 3 Ms - Muda, Mura & Muri 8 Forms of waste - T. TIMWOOD Waste Walk & Gemba, Genchi Gembutsu. Waste identification through simulation exercise

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:4
Lean Management Principles
 

Definition of Value Definition of Value added time, Process Time, Cycle Time, Throughput Time, Takt time, Inventory buffers, Little's Law. Establishing Value Stream and Value Stream Map.Definition of Flow through Value Stream. Establishing Pull. Pursue Perfection. Simulation example of preparing a current and improved value stream. 

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:4
House of Toyota / House of Lean
 

House of Lean / House of Toyota definition.Foundation of House of Lean : Stability and Standardized Work. 1st. Pillars of House of Lean : JIT 2nd. Pillar of House of Lean : Jidoka Employee Involvement and engagement as part of Lean Management.Customer Focus - Highest Quality, shortest lead time and lowest cost 

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:6
Lean Tools : 5S & Visual Management
 

What is 5 S ? Importance of 5 S in the context of Lean implementation Details steps of  5S implementation : Sort, Set-up, Shine, Standardize and Sustain Work Cell / Cell Design or Cellular Layout Cell Design Principles : 9 Steps for Work Cell Design What is Visual Management ?  Visual Display and Visual Control tools Benefits of 5 S and Visual Management 

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:4
Continuous Improvement through Kaizen Event
 

What is Kaizen or Continuous Improvement?  What is a Kaizen Event ?Different stages of a Kaizen Event DMAIC process for Kaizen Event Benefits of a Kaizen Event. Step by step approach to conduct a KAIZEN Event

Text Books And Reference Books:

1.       Toyota Production System - An integrated approach to Just-in-time : Yasuhiro Monden

2.       Toyota Way – Jefrey Liker


Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

   1. The machine that changed the world : James Womack, Roos and Jones

   2.   Lean Thinking – James Womack and Roos

Evaluation Pattern

1.   CIA I                                                    (10 marks)

2.   CIA III                                                 (30 marks)

3.   Attendance                                          (5 marks)

4.   CIA II (Written Exam)                           (25 marks)

5.   End Trimester Examination                  (30 marks)

MBA5041B - BIG DATA ANALYTICS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This is a course offered to the Business Analytics students in their 5 th trimester. The course encompasses fundaments of Big Data, Big Data architecture and Big Data ecosystem. By the end of the course, students will be able to independently work on Big Data platforms spanning different domains.The objective of this course is to equip students with the fundamentals of Big Data and Big Data analytics with specific focus on Big Data ecosystem comprising of Hadoop Distributed File System (HDFS), Hive and Spark.

Course Outcome

At the end of the course, the student should be able to:

 

Knowledge

·        Understand theoretical concepts behind Big Data and Big Data analytics

·        Decide on Big Data models relevant to business needs

·        Understand and Appreciate algorithms behind predictive models used in Big Data Analytics

 

Skills

·        Develop, test and deploy Big Data models

·        Interpret the results of Big Data analytics and present through well-structured reports.

 

Attitude

·        Appreciate the importance of various predictive and classification models and the underlying assumptions governing them

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:3
Introduction to Big Data
 

Introduction to Big Data, different types of data, introduction to cloud computing, cloud computing concepts, cloud computing applications, cloud systems and infrastructure, Big Data applications in cloud, cloud networking

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:4
Understanding the Big Data Ecosystem
 

The components of a Big Data architecture.  Extract-transform-load (ETL) layer.  File system – HDFS.  NoSQL DB.  Hive.  Hadoop.  Kerberos.  Pig.  Cassandra.  Other competing products.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:4
Working with HDFS and Hive
 

HDFS overview, installation, API.  Hive architecture and installation.  Comparison with traditional databases.  HiveQL – querying data, sorting and aggregating

 

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:4
Working with Map Reduce and HBase
 

Introduction to Map Reduce.  Map Reduce scripts, joins and sub queries.  HBase concepts, schema design, indexing.  Pig.  Zookeeper.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:4
Data Analysis with Spark
 

Introduction to Spark.  Downloading, installing and getting started with Spark.  Programming with Resilient distributed datasets.  Machine learning with MLib.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:3
Working with NoSQL
 

Introduction to NoSQL.  Types of NoSQL databases.  Advantages and uses.  SQL vs NoSQL.  Using NoSQL to develop reports.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:8
Big Data Project and Case Studies
 

End-to-end case study on a business problem.  Challenges and problems in handling Big Data.  Big Data case studies from Healthcare, Banking.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Seema Acharya and Subhashini Chellappa.  Big Data and Analytics.  1st Edition. Wiley (2015)

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

TBD

Evaluation Pattern

Department Level

CIAI: 10 marks

CIAII:25 marks- Midterm

CIAIII:30 marks

               15 marks:MCQ

               15 marks:Assignemnt

              

End Term: 30 marks

Attendance:5 marks

MBA5041F - MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:2
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description                                                                                     

In this course, the focus shifts to using the cost information of an enterprise for analysis and decision making. While the Financial accounting system provides information, this course helps in developing the analytical ability of the student by using various Managerial accounting methods and techniques. In addition, the student gets to learn about the various Management control aspects that would be required for a manager, in terms of designing, Using and planning control systems to achieve firm’s objectives. 

Course Objective

 

This course attempts to provide the students with the knowledge of fundamentals of Cost analysis and Management Control systems required for all the managers.

 

Course Outcome

By the end of the course, the students should be able to:

 Knowledge:

 

  • Demonstrate a Strong fundamental knowledge of cost behavior, cost objects and cost classifications.
  • Explain how cost allocations are used to ascertain the cost of cost object and its applicability in both Manufacturing and Services industry.
  • Show clarity about how cost –volume profit relationship works and explain its uses in business.
  • Show thorough understanding the usefulness of cost sheets, budgets and responsibility centers to business.
  • Show good understanding of how Transfer pricing mechanism works.
  • Understand how firms use Balance Score Card to manage their business.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Skill

 

  • Apply and analyse cost information for decision making.
  • Prepare budgets and monitor them in a multi-product or service business context.

 

 

 Attitude

  • Appreciate and practice the ethical and social dimensions relevant to cost management in business.
  • Understand the importance of collaborative functioning in diverse teams to achieve the common organizational goal of value creation to all the stakeholders.

Level of Knowledge: Basic, Applied / Working    

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:2
Introduction to Cost concepts and classifications
 

Cost, Cost centers, Cost Unit, Method of costing, Techniques of costing, Classification of cost- fixed and variable, Allocation, Apportionment & Absorption, Apportionment of costs to service cost centers, Pre-determined overhead rates

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:4
Job and Process Costing Methods
 

Job costing, Process Costing, WIP (Equivalent Production), Normal & abnormal losses, Internal process profits, Joints & by-product costing.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:8
Cost Volume Profit Analysis & Variable Costing
 

Common cost behavior patterns- cost estimation method – Breakeven analysis– contribution margin and what if analysis-  multi product analysis -Assumptions in CVP analysis- Variable costing and Full costing- benefits of variable costing for internal reporting purpose- Incremental analysis- make or buy decisions-dropping a product line- qualitative considerations in decision making including ethical dimensions. [ 8 hours here includes additional 3 hours to focus on additional numerical exercise]

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:4
Cost Allocation and Activity Based Costing:
 

Process of cost allocation- traditional product costing systems - problems with cost allocation- activity based costing- Activity based management as a tool to improve efficiency. 

 

  

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:4
Management Control systems
 

Performance evaluation- Revenue Centers, Cost centers, Profit center and investment center – Transfer Pricing.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:6
Budgetary Planning and Performance analysis
 

Uses of budgets in planning and control (Self Learning area) - developing the budget- The master budget- budgeted balance sheet- static and flexible budgets -  standard costs and budgets- development of standard costs- variance analysis  

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:2
Special Topics
 

Balanced score card and performance evaluation including Governance adherence - Target costing- Life cycle costing- Total cost of ownership

Text Books And Reference Books:

Text book

 

1.  Cost Accounting - A Managerial Emphasis, Horngren, Datar, Rajan 15th ed. Pearson

 

 

 

Reference Books

 

1.  Managerial Accounting - Creating Value in a Global Business Environment,  Hilton & Platt, 9th ed. McGraw Hill

2.  Accounting - Text and Cases, Anthony, Hawkings, Merchant 13th ed. McGraw Hill

3. Managerial Accounting - James Jiambalvo 5th ed. Wiley

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.Drury, Colin (2014), Cost and Management Accounting (8th Edition), Cengage Publicaitons

2. Arora, M.N. ( 2010).Cost and management accounting  (9th ed.). Vikash Publications.                             

3. Khan., & Jain. (2010). Management accounting  (5th ed.). Tata McGraw Hills    Publications    

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation Pattern                                                   

CIA I                                    10                                                                  

CIA III                                  30 

Mid term exam                      25                                                             

Attendance                            5                           

End Term Exam                     30

MBA5041H - ORGANIZATIONAL CHANGE AND DEVELOPMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

 

The course is offered as a human resource elective in the second year. This course introduces students to the social science techniques and change interventions used to improve organizational effectiveness and enhance the personal development of individuals. It focuses on the philosophy, history, and evolving approaches associated with organizational change and development, with special focus on initiating and managing change. Introduces methods used to identify organizational problems, understand the underlying causes for these problems, and collect information and data about the causes or problems, and present diagnostic results.

 

 

 

Course Objective

 

This course attempts to introduce the students to the social science techniques and change interventions used to improve organizational effectiveness and enhance the personal development of individuals.

 

 

 

Course Outcome

 

Learning Outcomes

 

By the end of the course, the student should be able to:

 

 

 

Knowledge:

 

·         Appreciate organizational change processes from multiple role perspectives.

 

·         Plan the steps involved to effectively manage organizational change in a variety of contexts and settings.

 

·         Identify the type and significance of various drivers of organizational change and identify the nature and significance of various impediments to organizational change.

 

 

 

Skills

 

·         Plan approaches and strategies for managing organizational change.

 

·         Implement organizational diagnosis and OD interventions design.

 

·         Evaluate the effectiveness of OD interventions.

 

 

 

Attitude:

 

·         Explore and clarify assumptions, beliefs, and values about organizations and the nature of the change process.

 

Level of Knowledge: Basic to moderate knowledge, understanding and application

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:4
Introduction to organizational change and development
 

Definition, history, and evolution of Organizational change and OD. Theories of planned change-Theory O and Theory E, types of planned change, critique of planned change, who is the OD practitioner? Professional OD, values and ethics, strategic focus      

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:3
Attitude towards change
 

Theory of psychological reactance, Overcoming resistance to change, Commitment to change –Creating readiness for organizational change

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:4
Diagnostic techniques and feedback in OD
 

 

Diagnosing organizations, open-systems model, Force field analysis, Weisbord six box model, Congruence model, Grid OD, Tichy’s TPC framework, Stream analysis, Kilmann Model, Mckinsey 7s framework, Extended 7S framework, Burke-Litwin model, Appreciative inquiry, Survey feedback

 

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
Human process interventions
 

 

Interpersonal and group process approaches – T-groups, process consultation, third party interventions and team building.

 

Organization process approaches – organization confrontation meeting, inter group relations interventions, large group interventions, and grid OD

 

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:5
V Techno Structural Interventions
 

 

Restructuring organizations – structural design, group’s process structure, downsizing, and reengineering

 

Employee involvement – What is it? Employee involvement practices, parallel structures, high – involvement organizations, high involvement, and TQM

 

Work design – the engineering approach, the motivational approach, the socio technical approach and designing work for technical and personal needs

 

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:6
Human Resources Management and strategic Interventions
 

 

Developing and assisting members – career planning and development interventions, resources planning and strategy, workforce diversity interventions, and employee wellness interventions

 

Integrated strategic change, trans organizational development and mergers and acquisitions

 

Organizational transformation – characteristics of transformational change, culture change, self-designing organization organizational learning and knowledge management

 

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:2
Evaluation and Future of OD intervention
 

 

Sustaining change after intervention evaluation – Ending an engagement

 

Global issues in OD, OD in International business, and future of OD

 

Text Books And Reference Books:

 

Cummings, T G and Worley C G( 2013). Organization Development and Change, South-Western College Publishing.

 

 

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

 

1.       French, W L and Bell C H (2007). Organization Development: Behavioural science interventions for organizational improvement, Pearson Education.

 

2.       French W L., Bell, C H and Vohra, V, (2009). Organization Development: Behavioural science interventions for organizational improvement. Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd.

 

3.       Harvey D and Brown D R ( 2004). An Experiential approach to Organization Development. 7/e, Pearson Education.

 

4.       Kotter, J P (1996). Leading Change. Boston: Harvard Business School Press. ISBN # 0-87584-747-1.

 

5.       Nilakant, V and Ramnarayan S (2006). Change Management: Altering mindsets in a global context. Response Books.

 

6.       Singh, K (2006). Organization Change and Development. Excel Books

 

7.       Ramanarayn, S. and Rao T V (2011). Organization Development: Accelerating Learning and Transformation. SAGE Publications.

 

8.      Sharma,R.(2012). Organizational Change and Transformation. Tata McGraw Hill.

 

Evaluation Pattern

 

CIA 1=20 marks (MCQ/Group Presentations/ case analysis and presentation/ micro projects/written assignments)

 

Mid semester= 50 marks

 

CIA II= 20 marks (MCQ/Group Presentations/ case analysis and presentation/ micro projects/written assignments)

 

End semester=100marks

 

MBA5041M - MARKETING METRICS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Marketing Metrics is a marketing specialization course designed to develop students to use numbers in assessing marketing strategy. The course reviews the different measures used by marketers and other decision makers in corporations. It covers metrics for understanding value of brands, customer loyalty, profitability of customers and to measure the performance of marketing activities.

This course examines the importance of managing marketing data in effective marketing decision making. It presents the role of marketing metrics within the organisation and establishes how an understanding of a range of measurement techniques can enable organisations to achieve marketing objectives through strategic decision making.

Course Outcome

On completion of the course, participants will be able to: 

1.      Knowledge:

a.      Understand the role of marketing metrics

b.      Understand the significance of different measurement techniques across a range of market contexts 

2.       Skills:

a.      Apply marketing metrics to establish the effectiveness of marketing activities

b.      Utilise various analytics tools and techniques for marketing insight and strategic decision making 

 

3.      Attitude:

a.      Develop expertise in using numerical information to justify and evaluate marketing strategies 

b.      Be able to correctly select, calculate, and interpret specific marketing metrics for marketing decisions and articulate returns on marketing investment

c.       Understand the connections across various marketing metrics

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:3
INTRODUCTION
 

The alignment of business objectives, strategies and metrics; the potential gap between metrics and business outcomes, people, planet and profit, the importance of marketing metrics, measuring market effectiveness.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:5
SHARE METRICS
 

Market share, relative market share, market concentration, market penetration, brand penetration, penetration share, share of requirements, heavy usage index, market share decomposition, brand development index and category development index.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:6
MARGINS and PROFITS
 

Variable and fixed costs, margins, markups, average price per unit, contribution per unit, contribution margin, breakeven sales level, target profit, rate of return on sales and breakeven on incremental investment.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:8
PRICING, PRODUCT and PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT
 

Price premium, maximum reserve price and maximum willingness to buy, price elasticity, optimal price, percentage breakeven price change, price discrimination, competitor reaction elasticity and cross and residual price elasticity. Trial volume and trial rate, repeat volume and repeat rate, adjusted trial rate, cannibalization rate, weighted contribution margin and breakeven with cannibalization.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:8
SALES FORCE MANAGEMENT and PROMOTION PROFITABILITY
 

Sales funnel, sales pipeline, lead, closure rate, sales forecasting, workload, sales force effectiveness. Baseline sales, incremental sales, promotional lift, return on marketing investment, coupon redemption, pass-through, gross rating points, impression, cost per thousand impressions, reach, frequency, share of voice, page views, visitors, click-through rates, cost per click, cost per order, cost per customer acquired, bounce rate, abandonment rate. Customer lifetime value, retention rate, attrition rate& churn rate.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Winston, W.L. (2014). Marketing Analytics: Data-driven Techniques with Microsoft Excel (First Edition). Indianapolis, Indiana: John Wiley & Sons.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Bendle, N.T., Farris, P.W., Pfeifer, P.E., and Reibstein, D.J. (2006) Marketing Metrics: The Manager’s Guide to Measuring Marketing Performance (Third Edition). Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Pearson.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA I:

Max Marks: 10 Marks; Weights Assigned: 10 Marks.

CIA II:

Max Marks: 50 Marks; Weights Assigned: 25 Marks.

CIA III:

Max Mars: 30 Marks; Weights Assigned: 30 Marks.

ETE: Max Marks: 50 Marks; Weights Assigned: 30 Marks.

Attendance: Max Marks: 10 Marks; Weights Assigned: 5 Marks

Total = 100 Marks

 

MBA5042B - PREDICTIVE ANALYTICS II (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description:

This is course is offered to the students of Business Analytics specialization in their 5th trimester and is a continuation of the Predictive Analytics I in the 4th trimester. The course encompasses fundamental concepts behind clustering and association mining techniques predominantly segmentation and profiling models. By the end of the course, the students would be able to independently work on these models to address varied business problems.

 Course Objective:

The objective of this course is to equip students with various clustering and association mining techniques so that they become well conversant with the models and use them in solving real business problems and decision making. 

Course Outcome

Learning Outcomes:

At the end of the course, the student should be able to:

 

Knowledge:

  • Understand underlying concepts and algorithms governing clustering and association mining techniques models
  • Decide on models relevant to business needs

 

Skills:

  • Understand and Appreciate algorithms behind clustering and association mining
  • Develop, test and deploy models
  • Model tweaking skills to achieve desired business requirements

 

Attitude:

  • Appreciate the importance of various clustering and association mining techniques

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:4
Unit I: Introduction to Clustering
 

Introduction to cluster analysis, cluster analysis process- attributes selection, data scaling, outlier detection, distance calculation, selecting clustering algorithm, determining number of clusters, identifying final number of clusters, visualizing cluster results, cluster interpretation, validation of cluster results, different types of distances and calculations, distance calculation for continuous data,  distance calculations in mixed data types.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:4
Unit II: Types of Clustering ? Hierarchical methods
 

Introduction to hierarchical and partitioning clustering, process of hierarchical and partitioning clustering, different types of hierarchical clustering methods-single linkage, complete linkage, average linkage, centroid and Ward, interpretation of dendrogram.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:4
Unit III: Types of Clustering ? Non-hierarchical methods
 

Partitioning methods in cluster analysis- K-means clustering and its process, partitioning around medoids, interpretation of scree plot and cluster plot, dealing with R –packages to perform hierarchical and partitioning cluster analysis, case study

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:3
Unit IV: Association mining techniques
 

Introduction to association mining techniques, product recommendation in retail market,

introduction to Market Basket Analysis (MBA), creating and exploring dataset, Item frequency plot, support, lift and confidence measures and their interpretations.

 

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:3
Unit V: Association mining ? Business insights
 

Extracting association rules, extracting top five rules, inspecting rules, implementing product recommendations, visualization of product association, dealing with R-packages to perform market basket analysis, case study.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:6
Unit VI: Time-series Analysis
 

Introduction – Time Series, Time Series vs Regression, Components – Predictable, Unpredictable, Local, Global – Trend, Seasonality, Additive & Multiplicative models, Cyclicity, Seasonality

Stationarity, Noise, Autocorrelation function, AR model, MA model, ARMA model, Modelling in R.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:6
Unit VII: Latest trends and Cases from Industry
 

Students to present latest trends and cases from the industry.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Essential Reading

Shmueli, G., Patel, N. R., & Bruce, P. C. (2008).Data Mining for Business Intelligence:

Concepts,Techniques, and Applications in Microsoft Office Excel with XLMiner (2nd ed., p. 428).Wileys

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Recommended Reading

1.       Applied Multivariate Statistical Analysis by Richard A. Johnson, Dean W. Wichern, PHI Learning

2.       Data analysis and graphics with R by Robert Kabacoff

3.       Practical Data Science with R by Nina Zumel and John Mount

4.       Multivariate Data Analysis by Hair| Black| Babin |Anderson| Tatham, Pearson publication

Evaluation Pattern

 

Department Level

CIAI: 10 marks

CIAII:25 marks Midterm

CIAIII:30 marks

               15 marks: MCQ

               15 marks: Assignment

End Term: 30

Attendance:5

MBA5042H - LABOUR LAW -II (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course is offered as a human resource elective in the second year. This paper helps the students to understand the legal aspect of the Human resources in the organization. The paper develops awareness about the various acts and legal compliances required for smooth functioning of an organization.

Course Outcome

 To make the students aware of

·         The employers obligations under the statutes

·         The employee/workers rights under the Acts

·         Consequences of non compliance of the statutes

·         The powers of the government/authorities under the Act

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:8
The Employee State Insurance Act, 1948 (Self learning Module)
 

Objectives, Definitions [Benefit period, confinement, Contribution period, dependant, employment injury, Employee, Exempted Employee, Immediate employment, Disablement (partial and permanent, wages, exclusion of wages], Applicability of the act, Contribution and Contribution calculation, Registration of establishments, Benefits, Restrictions, Protection, Penalties.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:8
The Employee Provident Funds and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952 (Self Learning Module)
 

Definitions [ Authorized officer, Basic Wages, Contribution, Controlled industry, Employer, Employee, Exempted Employee, Recovery officer], Employee Provident Fund Schemes, Contributions, Statutory rate of contribution, retaining allowance, calculation], Employees Pension Scheme: Establishment of Employees Pension Fund, Grant By central Government, Employees Deposit Linked Insurance Scheme, Framing and its functioning, circumstances under which employers contribution can be recovered, Attachment of properties, Penalties: Offences by companies.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:6
The Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972
 

Scope of the act, Applicability of the act, Definitions[ Completed years of service, Employee, Wages, Retirement, Controlling authority, employer, employee, Superannuation, Family], Payment of gratuity on termination, forfeiture of gratuity, compulsory insurance and payment of gratuity, nomination, determination and recovery of gratuity, Penalties.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:6
The Employee's Compensation Act, 1923
 

Scope of the act, Definitions [Dependant, Employer, Disablement, Wages, Workman and Contract of Employment], Rules regarding employment [Personal injury by accident, Theory of notional extension], Occupational Diseases, Amount of compensation, Calculation of Compensation for [death, permanent total disablement, permanent partial disablement, temporary disablement], Compensation when due, distribution of compensation.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:8
The Industrial Employment Standing Orders Act, 1946
 

Objects, Definitions [ Employer, Industrial Establishment, Standing Orders], Scope of the Act, Establishments to which this act doesn?t apply, Procedure for submission of draft standing orders, Procedure for certification of standing orders, Conditions for certification of standing orders, Payment of subsistence allowance, Penalties.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:8
The Trade Unions Act, 1926.
 

Scope of the act, Definitions [ Trade Dispute, Trade Union], Agreements not affected by the act, Procedure for registration of Trade Unions, Cancellation of registration of trade union, Duties and Liabilities of a Trade Union, Amalgamation and Dissolution of a Trade Union, Penalties.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
The Maternity Benefit Act, 1961
 

Scope of the act, Definitions [Child, Delivery, Employer, Establishment, Miscarriage, Wages], Prohibition of Employment, Right to Maternity Benefit, Payment of maternity benefit in certain cases, Dismissal during absence of pregnancy, Leave and nursing breaks, Penalties. Domestic Inquiry: Definition, Preliminary investigation, Rules of natural justice, procedure.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
The Industrial Disputes Act, 1947
 

Scope and Extent of the act, Definitions [ Industry, Industrial dispute, Individual and collective dispute, Average Pay, Employer, Independent person, Lay ? off, Lock Out, Retrenchment, Strike, Unfair Labor Practices, Wage and Workmen], Procedure for settlement of industrial dispute, Prohibition of strikes and lockouts, Matters under the purview of Labor Court and Industrial Tribunal, Notice of change in conditions of service, Voluntary reference of disputes to arbitration, Award Settlement.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:2
The Sexual harassment of Women at workplace (Prevention, Prohibition and Redressal) Act, 2013
 

Definitions, Constitution of Internal Complaints Committee, Constitution of Local Complaints Committee, Complaint, Inquiry and complaint, Duties of Employer, Duties and powers of District Officer, Penalties and Provisions.

Text Books And Reference Books:

 

1.      Kapoor N.D. (2012). Elements of industrial law (11th ed.). New Delhi: Sultan Chand & Sons.

2. Kumar, H.L. (2013). Labor Laws Everybody should know (9th ed.). New Delhi: Universal Law Publishing Co. Pvt Ltd.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Sarma A.M., (2013). Industrial Relations and Labour Laws (2nd ed.). Mumbai: Himalaya Publishing House.

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1=20 marks (MCQ/Group Presentations/ Seminars/ micro projects on any industry in secondary sector).

Mid Trimester= 50 marks

CIA II= 20 marks
(MCQ/Group Presentations/ Seminars/ micro projects on any industry in secondary sector).

End Trimester=100marks

 

MBA5042M - STRATEGIC MARKETING MANAGEMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course description:

Strategic marketing management is a marketing specialization course that is designed to develop students' holistic understanding and knowledge in strategic marketing. A marketing manager, as a planner-coordinator-controller of marketing activities, must be analytical and skilled in decision-making. Therefore, emphasis is placed on the analytical and decision-making functions of managers in the planning and implementation of marketing strategies at all levels of an organisation.

The course is comprehensive and covers the following sections in depth: (a) External and internal analyses (b) Application of popular strategic models and concepts, and (c) Planning for market-orientation and strategy implementation. The course requires students to refer to multiple books and authors as directed by the reading references provided in the session plan. In addition to book chapters, articles and case studies would be distributed to the students for discussion in class. The unit is heavily case-oriented, and expects students to be well versed in the case method. 

Course Outcome

Learning Outcomes:

On completion of the course, participants will be able to: 

1.      Knowledge:

a.       Appreciate marketing as an idea that has strategic relevance and not just as an operational function.

b.      Identify pressing issues in the area of marketing and be able to get to the source of the problem and offer logical and relevant recommendations.

c.       Have insightful perspective on customer centric value creation, value capturing and delivery

2.      Skills:

a.       Identify, appreciate, apply, critique and evaluate strategic marketing initiatives prevalent in businesses

b.      Create strategic marketing plan/blue print that can be readily implemented in the given context.

c.       Design business ready solutions for contemporary marketing issues.

3.      Attitude:

a.       Operate from a problem solving mindset

b.      Perceive cross functional relevance of strategizing marketing activity

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:8
Fundamentals of strategic marketing
 

 

Introduction to Strategic Marketing Management

Understanding marketing as strategy. Ubiquity of marketing functions. Marketing organization. Consultative marketing. Strategic implications of marketing decisions

Strategic segmentation, target and positioning

Valued customer, value proposition and value network. Understanding strategic relevance of market segmentation, positioning maps, value curve.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:16
Strategic implications of marketing mix elements
 

 

Marketing of solutions

 

 

 

Consultative marketing, solutions selling, creating customer value through solutions, manage customer risk, designing products for service, product agnosticism, transformational leadership for solutions marketing

Strategic channel management

Channel migration strategies, replacement and complementary effects, core capabilities and core rigidities, channel migration process

Strategic management of retailing

Challenge from global retailers, globally integrated retailers, relationship mind-set, power game and trust game in distribution relationship, efficient consumer response (ECR) initiatives, customer-centric global account management, strategic transformation, SKU rationalization, transparent pricing

Strategic rationalization of brands

Brand proliferation and extension, management complexity, brand rationalization process, brand portfolio audit, determining optimal brand portfolio, top-down and bottoms-up segmentation approach

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:8
Contemporary strategic marketing issues
 

 

Strategic marketing innovation

The market driving firm, four orientations to market place, competitive advantage, barriers to market driving in incumbent firms, market driving transformation process

Corporate marketing

The role of corporate center, search for marketing synergies, leverage product platforms, emerging markets as growth platforms, customer focused strategy map

Text Books And Reference Books:

Prescribed text book/s:

1. Kumar, N. (2004). Marketing as Strategy. Massachusetts: Harvard Business School Publishing

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Description of books and additional reading materials

Prescribed text book/s:

1. Kumar, N. (2004). Marketing as Strategy. Massachusetts: Harvard Business School Publishing

Additional reference books:

1.       Ferrell, O.C and Hartline, M. D. (2005), Marketing Strategy 3rd Ed, South-Western: Thomson Learning

2.       Anderson, C. H. and Vincze, J. W. (2004), Strategic Marketing Management 2nd Ed, Boston: Houghton Mifflin

3.      Baker, M. J. (2000), Marketing Strategy and Management, Palgrave McMillan

Articles:

1.      HBR’s 10 Must Reads on Strategic Marketing

Case Studies:

1.      NASCAR: Leading a Marketing Transformation in a Time of Crisis

2.      Brannigan Foods: Strategic Marketing Planning

3.      Outotec (A): Project Capture

4.      Netflix in 2011

5.      Clique Pens: The Writing Implements Division of U.S. Home

6.      Reckitt Benckiser: Fast and Focused Innovation

7.      Amazon in 2015

8.      Healthymagination at GE Healthcare Systems

Evaluation Pattern

End trimester examination

Approach to question paper

The questions will be both theoretical and practical in nature. Students will have to demonstrate their learning through answering comprehensive answers in which they present their reflections on the topic and also practical application of those concepts in business.

Reading the prescribed text book and articles for preparation will be necessary. However, it will not be adequate. Owing to the nature of the subject being highly dynamic, questions about current happenings and latest updates will often be asked in the paper and students are expected to keep themselves equipped to handle these challenges.

Topics to be covered:

All the topics covered in class discussions. Students should be prepared to answer questions that can broadly be contextualized under strategic marketing and must not expect the question paper to ask straight jacketed questions straight from the text book. The questions will come from contemporary issues in business and the case studies that are discussed in class.

Question paper pattern:

1.      Section A – Answer any four questions out of six, each carrying twenty marks (4*20=80)

2.      Section B – Compulsory case study carries 20 marks (1*20=20)

Total = 100 Marks

Note:

1.      The duration of the examination will be 3 hours

2.      The examinations will be held between 15th December and 22nd December 2016

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Marks break-up:

Test/Exam

Marks

Final Award

CIA I

20 Marks

10 Marks

Mid-trimester Exam

50 Marks

25 Marks

CIA III

20 Marks

10 Marks

Attendance

10 Marks

5 Marks

End-trimester Exam

100 Marks

50 Marks

Total

200 Marks

100 Marks

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

MBA5043B - TEXT AND SOCIAL MEDIA ANALYTICS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This is a two-credit course mandatory course offered to the students of MBA in Business Analytics.  The course introduces the students to the basic and intermediate levels of text and social media analytics.  The coverage includes (a) basics of language processing, use of machine learning to analyze text and social media data, sentiment analysis, and, (b) the use of common software tools to carryout text, social media, and social network analysis.

Course Outcome

At the end of the course the students should be able to do the following:

 

Knowledge

(a)   Understand the sources and limitations of text and social media data.

(b)   Develop a text/social media analytics research project to obtain managerial insights.

(c)    Able to understand the structural, syntactical, semantic elements of textual data.

(d)   Able to understand the structural and social aspects of social media networks.

(e)    Become familiar with core practice communities, publications, and organizations focusing on text and social media analytics and the research questions they are engaged in.

Skill

(a)   Be able to use common text mining and social media analytics tools to gather managerial insights.

(b)   Be able to develop and present network visualization for social media data.

 

Attitude

Understand the nature and importance of ethical concerns that pertain to text and social media analytics.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:3
Natural Language Basics
 

Natural language.  Language, syntax and structure.  Language semantics.  Natural language processing.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:4
Understanding Text and Processing
 

Text tokenization.  Text normalization.  Cleaning text.  Understanding structure and syntax.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:6
Text Similarity and Clustering
 

Information retrieval.  Text similarity and similarity measures.  Common distance measures: Hamming distance, Manhattan distance, Euclidian distance, Levenshtein Edit Distance.  Document clustering.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:4
Introduction to Sentiment Analysis
 

Defining the sentiment analysis problem – objective and tasks.  Understanding affect, emotion, mood, and opinion.  Preparing data for analysis.  Supervised and unsupervised learning.  Classification using lexicon-based approach.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:3
Introduction to Social Media Analytics
 

Introduction.  Social media and social media networks.  Social media data – structured and unstructured data.  Applications.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:6
Social Media Data Analysis and Visualization
 

Collecting and extracting social media data.  Statistical analysis of data.  Extracting useful patterns.  Network analysis.  Creating network graphs.  Node importance – key influencers.  Modeling network dynamics and growth.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:4
Case Studies
 

Text analytics case study –analyzing corporate financial reports.  Social media network analysis using Facebook data.

Sentiment analysis case study of Twitter data with a specific reference to the ethics of using social media data.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Dipanjan Sarkar: Text Analytics with Python: A Practical Real-World Approach to Gaining ActionableInsights from Your Data.1st edition.  Apress (2016).

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

 1.   1. Steven Struhl: Practical Text Analytics: Interpreting Text and Unstructured Data for Business Intelligence. 1st edition.  Kogun Page (2015).

2.    2. Bing Liu: Sentiment Analysis: Mining Opinions, Sentiments, and Emotions.  1st edition.  Cambridge University Press (2015).

3.    3. Marco Bonzanini:  Mastering Social Media Mining with Python.  1st edition. Packt Publishing (2016).

Evaluation Pattern

CIA I (Assignment): 10 marks

CIA II (Mini Project): 25 marks

CIA III (MCQ of 15 marks + Assignment of 15 marks): 30 marks

End-term (Project): 30 marks

MBA5043H - COMPENSATION MANAGEMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

 

The course is offered to second year MBA students specializing in HR.

 

Compensation Management is a specialization in the field of Human Resources that addresses how organizations use financial and other forms of pay to attract, retain and reward employees.  In most organizations, compensation costs are the single largest line item expense on a balance sheet.  As a result, HR practitioners responsible for managing wage, salary and benefit administration are required to have interdisciplinary training.  Course content introduces important concepts from various fields including labor law and economics, individual, group and organizational psychology, financial management and actuarial science.  The administrative systems used to manage compensation are surveyed in the context of underlying theory and major regulatory, competitive and ethical constraints on pay practices.

Course Outcome

The goal of this course is to provide students with an orientation to compensation practices – globally in general and with specific reference to India. Beginning with common organizational procedures such as job analysis and job evaluation, the administrative mechanics of pricing jobs for internal equity and external labor market competitiveness is described.  Different models and approached to compensation management and pay administration is discussed in the context of the theories upon which they are based. Upon completion of the course, the student will be able to:

 

·       Use of compensation and benefits management as a strategic HR tool and techniques to leverage compensation to gain competitive advantage

 

·       Understand and critically assess the contextual influences on compensation as it relates to improving societal and organizational efficiency through improved productivity and social good.

 

·       Compensation models to that support decision choices about base pay, merit, skill and seniority pay and the link between compensation models and competitive strategy

 

·       Design of incentive pay including individual and group incentives

 

·       Creating internal consistent compensation plans thorough job analysis and evaluation techniques

 

·       Design market-competitive compensation systems through market definition and salary surveys and way to integrate internal job structures and external pay market rates

 

·       Understand, evaluate and implement legally required and discretionary benefit programs

 

·       Understand options and their use for employee reward and retention

 

·       Understand executive pay and the regulatory framework which applies when fixing executive pay

 

Knowledge

 

·       Appreciate the concept, scope, process and significance of Compensation and Benefits in an organizational context.

 

·       Understand the different approaches adopted in the concept.

 

1.     Gain insights in to the different forms and newer trends in C& B.

 

·       Link compensation and benefits programmes and organizational strategy.

 

·       Set and implement C&B Programmes in selected industry sectors.

 

·       Design, implement and evaluate a reward strategy.

 

 

 

Attitude

 

·       Inculcate fairness and equity mind set in designing and administering C&B Programmes.

 

·       Develop concerns regarding professional hazards involved in various jobs while prioritizing C&B Programmes.

 

Skills

·       Design a pay structure

·       Match internal grades with market benchmark positions

·       Conduct and participate in a salary survey

·       Determine competitive pay level based on pay policy

·       Design and Administer compensation program for organization

Attitude

·       Inculcate fairness and equity mind set in designing and administering C&B Programmes.

·       Develop concerns regarding professional hazards involved in various jobs while prioritizing C&B Programmes.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:6
Introduction to Compensation Management
 

Compensation definition, Perspectives on Compensation, Forms of Pay – Base Pay, Merit Pay, Cost of Living, Long term and Short term incentives, Benefits – Income Protection, Tax Protection, Allowances, Work life balance; Total Earnings Opportunities, Relational Returns from work; Total Rewards Models – The Pay Model, Towers Perrin Total Rewards Model

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:6
Compensation Strategy
 

Compensation strategies – contextual similarities and differences; Strategic choices in compensation that support business Strategy and HR strategy; Developing a total compensation strategy; Test for competitive advantage through compensation; Best Practice vs Best Fit; Virtuous and Vicious Circles

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:3
Alignment; Job Analysis and Job Evaluation
 

 

Internal Alignment – Internal and External factors that shapes Internal structure; Strategic choices in designing internal structures, Theories that guide internal structures – Equity Theory, Tournament Theory, Institutional Model; Consequences of internal structures

 

Job analysis methods; Describing jobs through a Job Description; Judging job analysis; Job Evaluation Methods – Ranking; Classification, Point Method (with specific focus on Hay Point Method)

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:3
Competitiveness
 

Defining competitiveness; Factors that shape external competitiveness – Labor market factors, Product market factors and organizational factors, Labour demand and supply – Marginal product, marginal revenue, marginal cost; Theories that explain modification of labour demand and supply - Compensating Differential, Efficiency Wage, Signaling, Reservation Wage, Human Capital Theory; Defining relevant markets; globalization and relevant markets, offshoring and outsourcing; Competitive Pay Policy Alternatives – Lead, Lag, Match; Different policies for different employee groups; Consequences of pay decisions, pay levels and pay mix; Defining a competitive pay policy; Purpose of salary survey; Selecting relevant market competitors; Design of salary survey; Interpreting results of salary survey and constructing a market line; Combine Internal Structure and External Market; The  Pay-Policy Line; Salary grades and ranges; Broad Banding; Balancing Internal and External Pressures; Adjusting the Pay Structure.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:3
Employee Contributions; Employee Benefits
 

 

Pay for performance plans; Short term and Long term performance pay plans; Options: Employee Stock Ownership Plans (ESOPs), Broad-Based Option Plans (BBOPs), Stock Grant; Gain sharing and profit sharing plans.

 

The Value of Employee Benefits; Key Issues in Benefit Planning, Design, and Administration; Administering the Benefit Program; Legally Required Benefits; Retirement and Savings Plans; Life Insurance; Medical and Medically Related Payments; Miscellaneous Benefits; Benefits for Contingent Workers.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:3
Compensation for special groups and; Unions and Salary and Wages Administration
 

 

Special Groups – Supervisors, Corporate Directors, Scientists and Engineers in High-Technology Industries, Sales Forces.

The Impact of Unions in Wage Determination; Government and legal issues in compensation; Wages – Minimum wage, Living wage, Fair wage

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:3
Development of the pay structure and payroll administration in Indian Context; Overview of compensation related US laws
 

 

Understanding of Basic, House Rent Allowance , Dearness allowance, Deductions: ESI, PF, PT,TDS Contributions (PF ESI) Calculation of Gross salary and Net salary, Calculations  of CTC, Preparation of Break up salary Retirement Plans including VRS/Golden Handshake Schemes. 

Global Perspective: Overview of US labour laws - FLSA, COBRA, HIPPA, ERISA, IRA, FMLA

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:3
Making it all work
 

 

Managing, Controlling, Reducing Labor Costs; Structuring the Compensation Function – Centralization vs Decentralization; Reengineering and Outsourcing.

Ethics in Compensation Decisions, Wage Discrimination, Equal Pay

Text Books And Reference Books:

Milkovich, G.T.,Newman, J.M., & VenkataRatnam,C.S.(2009).Compensation New Delhi : Tata McGraw Hill.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

 

  1. Berger, L. A., Berger, D. R., & Berger, L. A. The compensation handbook. 6e, 2016. New York: McGraw-Hill.
  2. Singh, B.D. (2012).Compensation & reward management. (2e). New Delhi: Excel.

 

 

 

Additional Readings (Articles, handouts, videos, tools):

 

1.     Implementing Total Rewards Strategies

 

2.     Employee Benefits in a Total Rewards Framework

 

3.     Compensation Professional Development Framework

 

4.     Videos:

 

a.     Job Analysis

 

b.     Job Evaluation

 

c.     Pay Policy

 

d.     Market Analysis

 

e.     Base Pay Structure

 

f.      Pay for performance

 

g.     Rewards communication plan

 

5.     Income Tax for salaried employees (handout)

 

6.     Income tax return tool (downloadable xml tool)

 

7.     Tax treatment of salary (Theory & practical) - handout

 

8.     Stock Options: SEBI Act – Share Based Employee Benefits Regulations, 2014

 

9.     Compensation & The Board: Appointment and Remuneration of Key Personnel, Companies Act 2013

 

Evaluation Pattern
  • CIA 1 - 10% Marks
  • CIA 2 - 25% Marks
  • CIA 3 - 30% Marks (15% One Assignment, 15% Quiz)
  • End Trimester Exam (30% Marks)

 

MBA531A - ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND STARTUP (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This cross functional Elective course will help students to learn about the Lean Start-up framework which will allow them to successfully initiate/improve business idea. Concepts like starting and operating a business, developing a feasibility plan, obtaining financing, marketing strategies will be covered in-depth. Different dimensions like effectuation, accelerators or incubators will be discussed to broaden the understanding of entrepreneurship. This course will also focus on the development of a business plan, designed to either start a new venture or take an existing venture into new markets. The course will develop required competencies needed to become an innovative, opportunity-driven, market-ready and entrepreneurial manager.

This course will cover key elements like customer and market assessments, analysis of customer development, and business model development. Through lectures, case studies, external inputs, videos, group presentations, students will be exposed to the skills and knowledge necessary to evaluate the commercial viability of new start-up.

 

1. Understand entrepreneurship as a method, and how expert entrepreneurs think about creating new value. 

2. Learn to anticipate common early stage problems, and proactively manage risk. 

3. Understand how opportunities and entrepreneurs fit together.

4. Connect the entrepreneurial principles for creating new value to non-profit and government organizations, not just for profit entities.

5. To advocate the importance of innovation and technology in entrepreneurship

Course Outcome

Learning Outcomes

 

By the end of the course, the students should be able to:

Knowledge:  CLO1,CLO2,

 

ü  Identify potential market opportunities for an early stage venture

ü  Utilize screening and feasibility tools to effectively conduct a feasibility analysis to determine the worthiness of a potential new business idea

ü  Business Plan Creation

ü  Prepare an analysis for an early stage enterprise through a lean model framework.

Attitude: CLO21

                       

ü  Improve risk taking ability while minimizing the risks in a start-up

 

Level of knowledge: CLO12

ü  To generate ideas for executable business.

 

ü  To prepare and build to various facet of business development of the lean startup. 

 

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:3
Introduction to Lean Startup
 

Nature of Lean Startup, Changes created by Lean Startup, Limitations of the Lean Startup method, Customer Development Model Nature and importance of Entrepreneurs, Role of entrepreneurship in economic development.

Intrapreneurship - Corporate versus Intrapreneurial culture, Climate for Intrapreneurship, Establishment of Intrapreneurship in organizations

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:3
Entrepreneurial Thinking
 

Principles of effectuation, reasoning, effectuation process.

Opportunity Identification- Generating business idea, sources of new ideas, environmental scanning, competitor and industry analysis.

 

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:6
Accelerators to Startup
 

Accelerators, Incubation, Business Canvas Model, Feasibility study- market feasibility, technical/operational feasibility, financial feasibility. Legal requirements of the venture

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
Growth and Exit of Venture
 

Preparing for the new venture launch, management decisions at early stage, managing early growth of the new venture. New venture expansion- strategies and issues. Private capital, Private equity and venture capital,

Going public – attractions to going public. Exiting strategies- IPO and mergers and acquisition.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:3
Challenges faced by entrepreneurs
 

Challenges faced from individuals, from family, from groups, from community, from society. Women Entrepreneurs*, Entrepreneurial ethical dilemmas

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:3
Social Entrepreneurship and International Perspective
 

Social Entrepreneurship in the Developing World, Ideas, Opportunities, and Innovations in Social Entrepreneurship.

 

International Entrepreneurship - International versus Domestic Entrepreneurship, Entrepreneurial entry into International Business, Barriers to enter international trade, Entrepreneurial partnering

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:6
Sustainable Entrepreneurship &Indian Perspective
 

Linking business to society, Innovation and Entrepreneurship, Challenges for the Future.

MSME, Startup India Action Plan, Eligibility & Scheme Details, Entrepreneurial development in India, Licensing systems, GST, etc.

Text Books And Reference Books:

1.       Hisrich, Robert D, Manimala, J. Mathew, Peters, Michael P. and Shepherd, Dean A, (2015). Entrepreneurship.  New Delhi: Tata-McGraw-Hill.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Recommended Reading:

  1. Technology Entrepreneurship: Taking Innovation to the Marketplace by Thomas N. Duening, Robert A. Hisrich, Michael A. Lechter,
  2. Ries, E. (2011). The Lean Startup: How Today's Entrepreneurs Use Continuous Innovation to Create Radical Changes
  3. Create Radically Successful Businesses. Random House Digital, Inc.
  4. Osterwalder, A & Pigneur, Y. (2010) Business Model Generation: A Handbook for Visionaries,
  5. Effectuation: Elements of Entrepreneurial Expertise,Saras D Sarasvathy, Edward Elgar Publishing Ltd (1 March 2009)
  6. Understanding Social Enterprise, Mike BullRory Ridley-Duff, Sage Publishing,2015

 

 

 

 

 

Evaluation Pattern

CIA I - 10 marks

 

CIA II - 25 marks 

 

CIA - III 30 marks 

 

Attendance - 05 marks 

MBA531B - INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

This course is offered as a cross-fucntional elective in the fifth trimester to students across all specializations. In this course students learn various aspects of International Business in terms of concepts, operations, opportunities and challenges.

 

Course Objective

This course attempts to enable students to apply relevant theories and concepts to various aspects of doing business abroad and to deal with foreign firms and competition in domestic market.

Course Outcome

On having completed this course student should be able to:

 

Knowledge:

·           Apply relevant theories and concepts to various aspects of doing business abroad or /and dealing with foreign firms and competition in domestic market.(CLO2, CLO23)

·           Develop a holistic/fundamental framework for industries or firms to address issues connected to internationalization and managing the same in a globalized environment.(CLO11, CLO13)

 

Skill:

  • ‘Connect the dots’ through analytical deliberations, so as to incorporate appropriate decision making frameworks.(CLO11, CLO13, CLO16)

 

Attitude:

  • Confidently apply the different dimensions of International Business in analyzing the globalized economy.(CLO11, CLO13)

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:5
Introduction
 

Globalization and the need for International business, Nature of international business, drivers of cross-border business, routes of global business and active players in multinational business. Concept of Internationalization.

International business environment – Political, Economic, Legal, Technological and Cultural factors.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:2
International Institutions in International Business ? Self Learning Module
 

International Institutions in International Business: WTO and Regional Economic Integration (European Trade Union, Asian Trade Agreements Like APEC, ASEAN, African Trade Agreements, Western hemisphere trade agreements like NAFTA, CAFTA,

MERCOSUR, Andean Community)

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:4
International Trade Theories
 

Theories of Global Trade and Investment- Mercantilism, Theory of Absolute Advantage, Theory of Comparative Advantage, Factor Endowment Theory, Product Life Cycle Theory, Strategic Trade Theory, Porter’s National Competitive Advantage.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
International Trade Policy
 

Introduction to Trade Policy, Tools for trade policy – Tariffs, Non-Tariff trade Barriers, Quotas, Purpose of protectionism, EXIM Policy, Free Trade Agreements- Trade Diversion Vs Trade Creation.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:7
International Business Strategies
 

International Business strategy – Industry Analysis, Mode of Entry, Foreign Direct Investment, Intra-Industry Trade Porter’s five forces model, Three Generic Strategies: Cost leadership, Differentiation, Strategic Alliance and Networks.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:6
Managing Business Functions
 

Marketing – benefits of international markets, major activities in international marketing

Operations management – strategic issues in operations management, International financial management – financing foreign trade.

International human resource management, 

Social responsibility and ethical issues in international business – national differences in ethics and social responsibility, codes of conduct for MNC’s, International Business and Sustainability, profits: with special focus on south Asian.

Text Books And Reference Books:

1.       Peng M W and Srivastava D K (2012). 2nd Edition, Global Business, CENGAGE Learning Publications

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.       Hill, Charles W.L. and Jain, Arun K, (2010).  International Business.  New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill,.

2.       Czinkota M.R., Ronkanen, I.A. & Moffett M.H. (2012). International Business. New Delhi:  Pearson. 

3.       Daniels, John D., Radebaugh, Lee H. and Sullivan, Daniel P. (2007). International Business. New Delhi: Pearson.

4.       Aswathappa K., (2010).  International Business.  New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill

 

Evaluation Pattern

Centralised

CIA-I: 10 marks

CIA-II: 25 marks

CIA-III: 30 marks

Attendance: 5 marks

ESE Exam: 30 marks

MBA531C - BLUE OCEAN STRATEGY (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

The main objective of the course is to provide students with the necessary theoretical and conceptual tools used in Blue Ocean Strategy formulation and implementation. By guiding students working for companies (even nations) to pursue both differentiation and low cost, blue ocean strategy seeks to break the value-cost trade-off, thereby helping them create new demand and achieve strong profitable growth.

Course Outcome

By the end of the course, the students should be able to:

Knowledge

·       As prospective managers, gain knowledge how to apply Blue Ocean Strategy concepts and tools in a real life scenario

·       Understand how Blue Ocean Strategy can be applied in diverse industries

·       Apply the framework to address existing as well as new markets and industries

Skill

·       Provide students with specialized tools and techniques to obtain unique perspectives of markets and competition

 Attitude

·       Appreciate the complex environment in which Venture Capitalists operate

·       As entrepreneurs, be confident in strategy formulation and implementation.

Employability

·       Will be useful for students choosing careers in Marketing and Consulting.

 Entrepreneurship

·       Helpful for students with entrepreneurial intentions, as the course offers a unique perspective on competition and the creation of markets.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:9
Blue Ocean Strategy Basics
 

Red Ocean Strategy vs. Blue Ocean Strategy, Blue Ocean Strategy: Aligning Value, Profit and People in Pursuit of Differentiation and Low Cost, Noncustomer Analysis – the Three Tiers

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:9
Analytical Tools and Frameworks
 

Six Paths to Creating Blue Oceans, Getting the Strategic Sequence Right, Executing Blue Ocean Strategy, Analytical Tools and Frameworks – Value Innovation, Strategy Canvas, Value Curve, Four Actions Framework, ERRC Grid

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:6
Evolution of Blue Ocean Strategies
 

Making Blue Ocean Strategic Moves – A Historical Pattern, Red Ocean Traps and How to avoid them

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
Blue Ocean Shift
 

Humanness, Overview of the Blue Ocean Shift Process, Pioneer-Migrator-Settler Map, Buyer Utility Map, Blue Ocean Fair, A National Blue Ocean Shift in Action

Text Books And Reference Books:

Kim, WC., Mauborgne, R. (2015) Blue Ocean Strategy: How to Create New Market Space and Make the Competition Irrelevant (Expanded ed.). Boston: Harvard Business School Press.

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Kim, WC., Mauborgne, R. (2017) Blue Ocean Shift Beyond Competing:  Proven Steps to Inspire Confidence and Seize New Growth. New York: Hachette Books.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA I                                                                                                   10 Marks

CIA III                                                                                                10 Marks

Attendance                                                                                         5 Marks

Mid Trimester Examination                                                               25 Marks

End Term Examination                                                                      50 Marks

Please Note: 
 
1. The decentralised evaluation policy will continue next AY for both Senior and Junior Batches (Trimester 1 and 4). This means 70% for internal assessments and 30 % for End Trimester Exams. The 70% internal assessment includes 5% for attendance. Therefore, the CIA components will be for 65%.
 
2. The Internal Assessment will be done as under:
a. CIA 1 - 10% Marks (One Assignment, group or individual)
b. CIA 2 - 25% Marks (Written Exam for 2 Hrs)
c. CIA 3 - 30% Marks (15% One Assignment, 15% Quiz)
d. Attendance - 5%
 
3. End Trimester Exam (ETE) (30% Marks) will be for 2 Hrs / 50 Marks 
 
4. Passing criteria for a subject is overall 50% with a minimum of 40% for ETE.

 

MBA532A - PROJECT MANAGEMENT - CONCEPTS AND APPLICATION (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This paper is offered as a cross-functional elective from Lean Operations and Systems in the fifth Trimester. It develops a project management mindset and prepares students for careers in the area of project management. Students studying this course understand the various aspects of project management; – defining scope, project estimation of cost and time, project quality management, project network management and risk management.

 

After completing this course students can enroll for CAPM/PMI certifications conducted by PMI.

Course Outcome

Learning Outcomes

At the end of the course, students should be able to

Knowledge

Students to

  • ·         Understand project management as a process
  • ·         Understand and apply techniques of project planning and project control
  • ·         Understand and apply techniques of project risk management
  • ·         Understand project team dynamics
  • ·         Achieve academic excellence with a knowledge on project methods

 

Skills

Students to

  • Develop project scope statement and work breakdown structure
  • Conduct stakeholder analysis
  • Develop critical thinking and innovative ideas while doing HBS PM simulation game and bring in the element of creativity
  • Get technological exposure through a workshop on  MS Project where students use this software to generate project

        schedule

Attitude

Students develop an attitude to

  • Complete any task in project management mode
  • Interact as a professional with all the stakeholders and team members of a project in a global setting

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:3
Project Management Framework
 

Definition of project, Need for project management, Project life cycle, Project stake holders

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:4
Project Management Scope
 

Defining project scope, Establishing project priorities, Work break down structure, Process breakdown structure, Responsibility matrices

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:6
Estimating Project Time, Cost and Selection
 

Factors influencing the quality of estimates, Estimating guidelines for times, costs and resources, Macro and micro estimating, Methods for estimating, Level of detail, Developing budgets, Types of costs, Refining estimates and contingency fund, Selection of project

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:4
Project Teams
 

Five stage team development model, Situational factors affecting team, Building high performance project teams, Managing virtual project teams, Project Management Maturity Model (PMMO).

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:4
Project Expediting
 

Gantt chart, Crashing of projects, Cost analysis for project crashing, Project procurement

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:5
Project Risk management
 

Risk concept, Risk identification, Risk assessment, Risk response development, Contingency planning, Contingency funding and time buffers, Risk response control, and Change control management

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:4
Project Control Process
 

Project progress & performance measurement and evaluation-Structure of a project monitoring information system, Project control process, Monitoring time performance, Need for an integrated information system, Progress monitoring indexes, Environment, Health and Safety(EHS) in Projects, Ethical issues in Project Management.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Gray, C. F. & Larson, E. W. & Desai, G.V (2014). Project Management –The Managerial Process (6th ed,).  New Delhi : Tata Mc Graw Hill.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.   Meredith, J.R. & Mantel,  S. J. (2010).  Project Management- A Managerial Approach. New Delhi.  John Wiley.

2.   Nicholas,  J. M. & Steyn. H. (2010).  Project Management for Business, Engineering and Technology. New Delhi.    PHI.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA I                                         10 marks

CIA II(Midterm)                          25 marks

CIA III                                       30 marks

Attendance                                 5 marks

End Term Exam                         30 marks

MBA532B - ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE FOR MANAGERS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

The origins of Artificial Intelligence (AI) can be traced to the seminal work done by Alan Turing during the World War time. Advances in computing power have made application of brute force to AI feasible e.g., machine learning.

 

This Core Optional course in the fifth trimester provides an insight into Artificial Intelligence, Machine Learning, and Robotic Process Automation (RPA). 

 

Course Objective

The main objective of the course is to provide students an overview of AI and its applications in various fields of Management.

Course Outcome

By the end of the course, the students should be able to:

 

Knowledge

·       Be aware of AI, Machine Learning, and Robotic Process Automation (RPA) concepts

·       Gain an appreciation for managerial applications of AI

 

Skill

·       As an MBA, gain a strategic perspective of application of AI for competitive advantage

 

Attitude

·       Appreciate the trends and applications of AI in the real world.

 

Employability

·       Will be useful for students choosing careers with the IT and ITeS sector.

 

Entrepreneurship

·       Intentionally left blank.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:4
Introduction to AI
 

Introduction to AI, History and evolution of AI

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:4
Foundations of AI
 

Intelligent agents, uninformed search, Heuristic search, adversarial search, game playing    

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:4
Machine Learning ? Supervised Learning
 

Basic concepts, Classification, Artificial Neural Network, IBM Watson

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:4
Machine Learning ? Unsupervised Learning
 

Association, Clustering

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:5
Robotic Process Automation
 

Robotic Process Automation & Cognitive AI

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:5
Deep Learning
 

Deep Learning Concepts, Applications of Deep Learning

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:4
Future of AI
 

Future of Work, Future of AI

Text Books And Reference Books:

Please see next section.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Essential Reading

 

Russell, S., Norvig, P. (2010) Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach (3rd ed.). Prentice Hall.

 

Khemani, D. (2013) A First Course in Artificial Intelligence. McGraw-Hill.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA I   - Assignment                                                                       10 Marks

CIA-II- Mid Trimester Examination                                             25 Marks

CIA III - MCQ+ Group Assignment                                              30 Marks

End Term Examination                                                 30 Marks

Attendance                                                                                         5 Marks

MBA542AF - MERGERS, ACQUISITIONS AND RESTRUCTURING (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course is offered as a finance elective. This course aims to facilitate the understanding of corporate strategies from the perspective of mergers and acquisitions. Different issues concerning valuation during M&A as well as the legal and regulatory issues (being so important to M&A) also form a part of the course learning.

Course Outcome

 

Learning Outcomes

 

By the end of the course, the students should be able to:

 

Knowledge

 

·         Understand the importance of Mergers, Acquisitions and Corporate restructuring in the business world.

 

·         Understand the glossary of terms (language) used in M&A, the issues, and processes involved in an M&A.

 

·         Understand the regulatory guidelines of RBI / SEBI, legal and the financial aspects relevant to M&A.

 

·         Analyze an M&A transaction critically, understand the design of an M&A deal and learn to present a proposal for an M&A transaction.

 

·         Understand the various options available for merger financing.

 

Skill

 

  • Follow and interpret the day-to-day developments in the world of mergers and acquisitions.
  • Develop understanding of  appraisal techniques used in mergers and acquisitions.

 

Attitude

 

·         Understand the HR and Strategic issues in an integrative manner and the interplay of global and cross-cultural factors in the context of mergers, acquisitions and restructuring.

 

·         Understand the ethical issues relating to M&A and Restructuring.

 

·         Understand the importance of collaborative functioning in diverse teams to achieve the common organizational goal of value creation to all the stake holders. 

 

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:3
Overview of Corporate Restructuring
 

Introduction. History of Merger Movements. Forms of Corporate Restructuring: Expansions, Mergers and Acquisitions, Tender Offers, Joint Ventures, Sell Offs, Spinoffs, Split offs, Split ups, Divestitures, Employees Stock Option Plans (ESOPs), Equity Carve Outs, Master Limited Partnership (MLP). Corporate Control Premium, Buybacks, Standstill Agreements, Leveraged Buyouts.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:4
Overview of Mergers and Acquisition
 

Merger Process: Five-stage model. Economic rationale for M&A. Major types of Mergers- Horizontal mergers - Vertical mergers - Conglomerate mergers - Concentric Mergers. Framework for analysis of mergers. Organization learning and organization capital. The Role of industry life cycle, Product life cycle in M&A.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:4
Cost and Benefit of Merger
 

Cost and benefit analysis of merger (mergers as a capital budgeting decision) - Share exchange ratio - Problems of calculating pre and post merger performances.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:3
Theories of Mergers
 

Theories of merger : Efficiency theories - Differential efficiency - Inefficient management - Operating synergy - Pure diversification - Financial synergy - Strategic realignment to changing environments. Undervaluation - Information and signaling - Agency problems and managerialism - Hubris hypothesis.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:10
Valuation
 

Multiples - various kinds of multiples and how to view this from the perspective of M&A. What are the factors which impact the multiple and how to find the right multiple to value the company. Risk free rate of return - Key things to remember while doing cross border M&A. Beta- What factors impact beta. Levered and unlevered beta. Valuation during special situation of M&A- growth companies, distress companies, stable growth companies, listed and unlisted companies, volume and liquidity discount, companies with negative cash flows, cash risk companies, IRR expectations, control premium. Valuation for cash Vs stock deals. Common mistakes / biases at the time of valuation. Negotiation for valuation in M&A deals, convert structure, warrant structure and other ways of structuring options. Special situation in valuation - SEBI valuation rules, takeover code valuation rules, FDI valuation rules.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:3
Legal and Cultural Aspects in Merger
 

Organizational and human aspects - managerial challenges of M & A - Legal and regulatory frame work of M & A - provisions of company?s act 1956 - Indian Income Tax act 1961 - SEBI takeover code

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:3
Take Over Defenses
 

Financial defensive measures - Coercive offers and defense - anti-takeover amendments - poison pill defense.

Text Books And Reference Books:

1        Donald., M. DePamphilis, (2014). Mergers Acquisitios, and Other Restructuring Activities. Elsevier.

2        Weston., Fred,( 2001). Mergers & Acquisitions. McGraw Hill.

3        Galpin., Timothy J, Herndon, Mark. JosseyBass,( 2007). The Complete Guide to Mergers and Acquisitions: Process Tools to Support M&A Integration at Every Level. 2nd edition.

4        Feldman, Mark L / Spratt, Michael Frederick., (1999 ). Five Frogs on A Log: A CEO's Field Guide to Accelerating the Transition in Mergers, Acquisitions, and Gut Wrenching Change. 1st edition,  New York: Harper Business.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.      Harvard business review on mergers and acquisitions.(2001).Boston: Harvard Business School Press.

2.      Burrough., Bryan, Helyar, John,( 1990). Barbarians at The Gate: The Fall of RJR Nabisco. 1 st e, New York: Harper & Row;. xvi, 528 p., 32 p of plates ISBN: 0060161728. Collins Business 2008.

3.      Gaughan., Patrick A, (2010 ). Mergers-What Can Go Wrong and How to Prevent it. 1st edition, Wiley Finance.

4.      Damodaran., Ashwath,( 2009), Damodaran on Valuation. 2e, John Wiley.

5.      Gaughan., Patrick A,( 2009). M&A and Corporate Restructuring. Wiley.

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation Pattern                                                       

CIA I                                                                                                                            10%

CIA III                                                                                                                          30%

Attendance                                                                                                                  5%

Mid Trimester                                                                                                             25%

End Trimester                                                                                                             30%     

 

MBA542BF - FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

 

Course Description

This course is offered to provide the students an understanding of the emerging areas of Risk Management.   This course equips the students with the tools and techniques to manage the financial risk efficiently.    It also enables them to learn corporate governance and risk strategies to control both financial and non financial risks.

Course Objective

This course attempts to equip the students with the tools and techniques to manage the financial risk efficiently.

Course Outcome

By the end of the course, the students should be able to:

Knowledge

·        Understand the importance of risk management to an organization.

·        Understand the regulatory frame works, which mandate risk management.

·        Understanding the best practices, accounting and legal issues relating to Enterprise Risk Management with specific focus on banking industry.

Skills

·       Use basic risk measurement models prescribed in Basel accords.

·       Measure risk using VaR.

·       Relate concepts and practice of risk management through case studies from organizations that failed due to inadequate risk management practices and learn the relevant governance issues.

Attitude

·       Develop an ethically and socially responsible outlook in the context of risk management in the financial sector space with specific reference to banking.

·       Understand the importance of risk management in a world filled with uncertainty and ambiguity and take decisions under these situations using the tools taught during the classroom sessions.

·       Understand the interplay of various factors that makes risk management process important and to develop a global and cross cultural awareness in this context.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:2
Introduction to Risks- I
 

Risk in General Management and financial risk in specific, Nature of risk, Need for risk management and benefits, Classification of risks, Systematic and Non-Systematic risk, Approaches to Risk management. Imperatives in Regulations.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:5
Introduction to Risks- II
 

Risk Vs Return dynamics, Identifying risk exposure, Recap of how to define returns and measure it,  Recap of how to measure risks – Standard Deviation, Covariance and Probability, Enterprise risk management, Risk based supervision.

Financial risks management through Options, futures and derivative securities. Assessment of financial asset risks, interest rate & debt securities, value at risk. Capital adequacy risk, Operational risks in banks, Basel II committee recommendations.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:3
Regulations, Basel II & III
 

Overview of Basel norms –Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS), Basel norms - A move towards Enterprise Risk Management & Integrated supervision, Basel II norms - 3 Pillar approach, BCBS guidelines, Identifying the sources of Credit, Market & Operational risks and determining respective capital as part of Minimum required capital, Approaches to Capital measurement. Basel III - A perspective.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:13
Detailed Study of Risks
 

Principles of credit risk management (3 Hrs): Forms of credit risk – Settlement risk, Counter party risk & Sovereign risk, Common sources of credit risk management, measuring credit risk – Probability of default, Loss given default, Exposure at default, Expected & Unexpected loss, and use of derivatives to manage credit risk.

Liquidity risk & Interest rate risk (3 Hrs): Recap of how liquidity risk is managed in banks, Recap of how Interest rate risk is managed in banks, Recap of how ALM tool is used to manage liquidity and interest rate risk, Optimization of NIM, Use of derivatives for interest risk management.

Scenario analysis & Stress testing (2 hrs):  Generating the scenarios, reverse stress testing and its uses.  Principles of "Sound stress testing practices and supervision,” BCBS consultative document.                                                                                

Operational Risk (4 hrs): Operational risks in banks, Measuring and managing operational risks  

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:7
Contemporary Topics
 

Economic capital and RAROC (2 hrs):Understanding the concepts - RAROC, Economic capital, How to measure businesses using RAROC, Forecasting and RAROC, Introduction to simulation using Monte Carlo method.

Convergence: IFRS & Basel norms - Investments, Loan loss provisioning, derivatives.

Need for measuring risk correctly in order to fairly price products and services, protect stakeholders from unwarranted risk taking, sound corporate governance the key to risk debacles and frauds.

Risk Management - Mistakes to avoid:Learning from Case Studies- Bank Herstatt, Lehman Bros., Long Term Capital Management (LTCM), Barings Bank etc.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Vivek., & Asthana, P.N. (2012). Financial risk management. (2nd ed.). Himalaya Publishing House.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.        RBI’s Master Circulars on Risk Management

2.        BCBS Consultative Document

3.        Hull, J. C. (2010). Risk Management and financial institutions. (3rd ed.). Toronto: Wiley India.

4.        Dun., & Bradstreet. (2006). Financial risk management. (1st ed.). Tata McGraw Hill.

5.        Crouhy, M., Galai, D., & Mark, R., (2006). The essentials of risk management. The McGraw Hill Companies.

6.        Williams, A. C., Young, P., & Smith, M.L. (1998). Risk management & insurance. The McGraw Hill Companies.

7.        Risk Management materials from GAARP and FRM.

Evaluation Pattern

1. CIA I MCQ                                                            

2. CIA II and III Project                                                      

3. Attendance/Participation                                                      

4. End Semester Examination                                   

MBA542BL - SUPPLY CHAIN DESIGN AND MODELLING (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

This course is offered as a specialization optional paper in the fifth trimester for LOS Students. The focus of this course is introducing quantitative techniques for taking supply chain decisions and designing of the Supply Chain. The approach is to consider Supply Chains as a system with number of entities that interact in a complex manner. To facilitate decision making in such systems, the course presents mathematical models and optimization techniques that form the tool kit for Supply Chain Design and decision making.

 

Course Objective

Supply Chain Engineering emphasizes on use of mathematical models and methods to determine the optimal strategies for managing the supply chain. This course help the students to look at supply chains a systems perspective in a dynamic environment and enable them to use optimization techniques in supply chain related decision making.

Course Outcome

Learning outcomes expected from the course are given below:

Knowledge 

  • Apply the concepts of supply chain management and look at supply chain in a systems perspectiv
  • Analysis, planning and design of supply chain networks.
  • Plan sourcing, distribution and transport in a supply chain context
  • Develop mathematical models that facilitates supply chain decisions.

Skill

  • Able to use tools and techniques of supply chain management such as modelling of supply chain networks, supply chain network                analysis etc.
  • Able to practice techniques of inventory management, transportation decision, network  decisions and sourcing.
  • Use spreadsheets (MS Excel) for network modelling and solving supply chain problems.

Attitude

  • Appreciate the role of quantitative techniques in taking business decisions specifically in supply chain context.
  • Have a comprehensive, life cycle and systems view of issues while taking a business-related decision.
  • Be drivers of supply chain approach to business management in their respective organizations.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:3
Introduction to Supply Chain Engineering(SCE)
 

Meaning of Supply Chain Engineering. Introduction to mathematical modelling of physical systems. Supply chain decisions. Supply Chain Performance (efficiency, responsiveness, risk).

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:4
Network Design in Supply Chain ? 1
 

The role of network design in Supply Chain. Factors influencing supply chain network design decisions. Framework for Network Design Decisions. Models for Facility location, Transportation model - Mathematical modelling and solving using MS Excel.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:5
Network Design in Supply Chain ? 2 (Optimization for facility location and capacity allocation)
 

Capacitated Plant Location Model, Gravity Location Models, Allocating demand to production facilities,Locating Plants and Warehouses Simultaneously. Quantitative  modelling and solving using MS Excel for the above conditions.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:4
Managing Uncertainty in Supply Chains
 

The role of safety inventory. Determining the level of safety inventory. Impact of supply uncertainty and aggregation on inventory. Managing uncertainty through postponement. Impact of replenishment policies.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:4
Determining the Optimal Level of Product Availability
 

The importance of level of product availability.

Cost of overstocking and cost of understocking. Evaluating optimal cycle service level for seasonal items. Evaluating expected overstock and understock. The newsvendor problem. Solutions using MS Excel.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:4
Supplier Selection Models and Methods
 

Supplier selection problem, supplier selection process. Sourcing strategy-Criteria for selection. Multi-criteria ranking methods for supplier selection, Ranking of Suppliers – Analytic Hierarchy Process (AHP).

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:6
Supply Chain Modeling and Simulation using Rockwell Arena
 

Introduction to Rockwell Arena Software. Simulation Modeling and concepts.continuous and discrete simulation.Steps involved carrying out the simulation study.Components of a simulation model (Entities, Resources, Control Logic, Statistics). Modeling and simulation of a simple manufacturing system. Modeling and simulation of material flow in a supply chain. Analyzing simulation results. 

Text Books And Reference Books:

Text Books

1. Chopra, S., Meindl, P. and Karla, D. V. (2016). Supply chain management: strategy, planning and operation (6thed). Pearson Education, New Delhi.

2. Ravindran, R. A., and Warsing, D. P. (2013). Supply Chain Engineering, Models and Applications. CRC Press, Taylor and Francis Group.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Recommended Reading1.       Simchi-Levi, D., Kaminsky, P,  Simchi-Levi, E., and Shankar, R. (2008). Designing and managing the supply chain: Concepts, strategies, and cases (3e). McGraw-Hill Education India, New Delhi.

2.       Coyle J.J., Langley Jr. C.J., Novack R.A. and Gibson B.J.(2013). Managing supply chains-A logistics approach ( 9thed). Cengage Learning.

3.       Kelton, W.D., Sadowski, R. P., and Zupick, N. B. (2015) Simulation with Arena, 6/e, McGraw-Hill.

Evaluation Pattern

CIAs and Assessment Pattern

CIA I -           10 Marks

CIA II -          25 Marks

CIA III-           Component 1: Quiz – 15 Marks

                        Component 2: 15 Marks

ETE (Project) -  30 Marks

Attendance -    5 Marks

 

Total Marks – 100 (3 Credits)

 

MBA542CL - AGILE MANAGEMENT OF SOFTWARE PROJECTS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

The course offers a fundamental framework for managing software projects from an agile perspective. The course approaches the management of software projects and with a focus on transforming stakeholder needs and objectives into a holistic, life-cycle balanced system solution which satisfies stakeholder requirements and enhances solution effectiveness.  The course is intended to equip students to pursue a career in the Information Technology industry. This is offered as a choice-based three-credit course for students of LOS specialization.  

This course attempts to make students understand the processes involved in the development, evaluation, support, and agile management of software-intensive projects which integrates best practices from the fields of Software Quality and Software Project Management. 

Course Outcome

At the end of the course, students should be able to:

Knowledge:

  •  Understand the processes involved in the development, evaluation, support, and management of software-intensive systems.
  • Enhance knowledge which integrates best practices from the fields of Software Quality and Software Project Management.
  • Understand the relevance of agile management in software projects.

Skill:

  • Acquire skills on key aspects of managing software projects with an agile approach through  conceptual learning, case studies, and research-based assignments.
  • Acquire skills in the preparation of a project charter.
  • Acquire preliminary skills in the area of software estimation to enable assess the size and effort of a software project.

Attitude:

  • Enhance  in effectively working in a team through group assignments / group-based presentations.
  • Understand the right attitude needed by a project manager for managing resources to achieve success in a software project. 
  • Have the right attitude required for effective stakeholder management.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:6
Introduction
 

Definition of a Software Project, Software projects  Vs projects in other domains, Project types – Development, Maintenance, and Support projects. Phases in a software development project.

Project Execution Models - Onsite, Offshore, Near-shore models, Project execution in an ODC (Offshore Development Centre).

Software Development Approaches and SDLC -Waterfall Vs Iterative approaches, Agile methodologies, SCRUM and other approaches. Pricing models - Fixed price / Fixed bid, Time & Material, Outcome-based pricing.

Risks in Software projects and Risk Management Strategies.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:6
Software Project Estimation
 

Effort estimation in Software projects, Problems with over-estimation and under-estimation, Estimation techniques, Overview of Function Point Analysis. Agile estimation techniques - Planning Poker, T-shirt sizing, Affinity Grouping, Bucket System, Dot voting, Ordering method.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:4
Software Project Planning and Scheduling
 

Software Project planning, Resource Requirements planning, Selection of the project management approach, Preparation of Project Charter and Software Project Management Plan, Agile planning practices.

Scheduling a Project, Examples of Software tools for Project Scheduling, Project scheduling in an Agile environment. 

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:3
Software Configuration Management
 

Importance of Configuration Management in software delivery, Software Configuration items, establishing a Software Configuration baseline, Software Configuration Plan, Examples of Software Configuration Management tools, Integration with development tools, Agile Configuration Management practices.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:3
Software Quality Management
 

Defect Prevention Planning and establishing a Software Quality Management Plan for the project. 

Types of Software testing - White Box testing, Black Box testing, Approaches for testing of software deliverables - Unit Testing, Integration testing, System testing, Performance testing, Acceptance testing - Software testing tools, Agile Testing - Concepts, Techqniques and Tools.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:6
Communication Management and Project Progress Reporting / Review
 

Need for effective communication in a software project, Communication Management Plan, Managing Communication with stakeholders and within the project team. Agile project communication.

Tracking the progress of a project - Overview of Earned Value Analysis.

Project status reporting and Dashboards,  Project reviews - External / Internal reviews, Post-impementation review. Sharing of lessons learnt and good practices, Project sign-off.

 

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:2
Trends in Software Project Management
 

Future of Agile Software Development, Trends in the managment of Software projects.

 

Text Books And Reference Books:

1.       Hughes, B., Mall, R., & Cotterell, M. (2011). Software project management (5th ed.). Tata McGraw Hill.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.     Jalote. P. (2002). Software project management in practice. Addison Wesley. 

2.     Schwalbe, K. (2009). Project management in IT (1st ed.). 

3.     Nicholas, J.M., & Steyn,H. (2010).  Project management for business, engineering, and technology, Principles and practice (3rd ed.). Elsevier.

4.    Marc, J.S, Ashlyn, M.S., & Dara, G.S. (2006). Outsourcing and Insourcing in International Context (1st ed.), Prentice Hall.

5.      Brown, D. & Wilson. S. (2007). The Black Books of Outsourcing: How to Manage the Changes, Challenges, And Opportunities (1st ed.), Wiley India

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation Pattern

CIA I     - 10 marks

CIA II    - 25 marks

CIA III   - 30 marks

End-term exam - 30 marks

Attendance - 5 marks

MBA543AL - WORLD CLASS MANUFACTURING (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

a.      Course Description

This course as a core specialisation course intends to bring forth the philosophy and principles behind world class manufacturing. The students will understand the technologies of world class manufacturing and their application through case-driven pedagogy.

a.      Course Objective

To drive home to students the principles, concepts, technologies and applications of world class manufacturing.

Course Outcome

Knowledge

  • Acquire an understanding of opportunities created by WCM Practices
  • Understand the current industry practices in WCM

 

Skill

  • Skills in applying WCM philosophy to manufacturing context
  • Skill to identify the need and implement Flexible Manufacturing
  • Skill to identify the need and implement Agile Manufacturing
  • Skill to identify bottlenecks and manage them

 

Attitude

  • Be drivers of WCM practices for Operations Effectiveness and Efficiency

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:4
Introduction
 

 

Evolution of WCM; Ohno’s View on WCM: Principles and Practice.

Planning Methodology and Issues in Strategic Planning of WCM, Hall’s Framework, Schonberger Framework of WCM; Gunns’s Model, Maskell’s Model.

Manufacturing Performance Measurement Systems: PO-P, TOPP and Ambite

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:3
The Theory of Constraints
 

 

Book Review Based Class Discussion on Bottleneck, Drum, Rope and Buffer concepts and ways to  operations-excellence through bottleneck management.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:3
HR Dimensions of WCM
 

 

Morale and Team work; High Employee Involvement: Cross Functional Teams: Work Study Methods: Human Integration Management.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:5
Computer Integrated Manufacturing
 

 

Hardware and Software of CIM, Concurrent Engineering, Computer Numerical Control, Direct Numerical Control and Adaptive Numerical Control-Case Driven

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:4
Flexible Manufacturing
 

 

The need for Flexible Manufacturing, Requirements for Flexible Manufacturing, Challenges and Applications Scope of Flexible Manufacturing- Case Driven

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:5
Agile Manufacturing/Method
 

 

Agile Manufacturing Vs Flexible Manufacturing, Internal agility Vs External Agility, Agile Project Management in manufacturing as well as Software Industries- Case Driven

 

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:6
Trending Manufacturing Technologies
 

 

E- Manufacturing, Rapid Prototyping, 3D printing, Artificial Intelligence and Nanotechnology -Case Driven

Text Books And Reference Books:

No Single Text

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1. World Class Manufacturing: A Strategic Perspective. BS Sahay, KBS Saxena and Ashish Saxena. Macmillan.

2. Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage. VK Narayanan. Prentice Hall

3. Making Common Sense Common Practice: Models for Manufacturing Excellence. Ron Moore. Butterworth Heinemann Publication.

4. The Goal. Eliyahu M Goldratt and Jeff Cox. Kindle Edition

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1    10 marks

CIA2     25  marks -   Written Exam

CIA3     30  marks

Attendance 5 marks

End Trimester Exam 30 marks

MBA543AM - ADVERTISING AND PUBLIC RELATIONS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This paper is offered as a marketing elective in the fifth trimester. It gives an insight into advertising and prepares students for decisions in advertising and media in their respective roles in marketing. Students opting for this elective gain an insight on the role and significance of public relations for brand building and crisis management.

Course Outcome

 

After completing the course, the students will be able to:

 

Knowledge

 

  • Understand theoretical and practical aspects of advertising and public relations
  • Understand the relevance and scope of various media in communicating value
  • Understand the significance of the synergy of integrated media in communication

 

Skills

 

  • Design and validate advertising campaigns using relevant tools

Attitude

  • Appreciate the positive role of advertising and public relations in the society at large

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:6
Introduction to Advertising & Ethics and Regulation
 

Advertising, Advertising campaigns, IMC; Roles and functions Advertising, Types of advertising, Key Players in the Advertising Process. Brief History of Indian Advertising; Trends affecting advertising-Digital Age & Challenge of Sustainability; Agency Compensation methods

Advertising Regulation- Social Role of Advertising; Advertising to Vulnerable sections of Society; Self-Regulation (ASCI) & Legal Regulation; Ethics in Advertising

Trends in Advertising and Agency-Client Relationships – Self-learning (CCD Video)

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:6
Research and Planning in Advertising
 

Customer Insight and use of Research; Strategic Planning and Planning Process; Brand Communication Plan; Target Audiences; Ad Objectives-Advertising as a Communication Model; Ad Exposure Model; Setting Advertising Objectives; Account Planning; Creative Brief.

 

Understanding Segmentation, Positioning, Consumers and Branding for better advertising insights – Self-learning (CCD Video)

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:7
Creating Effective Advertising
 

Creative Advertising and the Process; Informational and Transformational Appeals; Copywriting; Ad Copy Testing; Ad Production

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:4
Effective Advertising Media
 

Media planning, Media Terms; Media Plan & Media Buying; Effectiveness of Media and ROI.

Trends in Media & Media Choices – Self-learning (CCD Video)

Sales promotion, Point of Purchase, Support media, Event Sponsorship, Product Placements, Branded Entertainment, Direct marketing, Personal Selling – Self-learning

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:7
Public Relations
 

Purpose of PR; Stakeholders for PR – Employees, Investors, Community, Customers, Media; Public Issue Campaigns, Debates and Crisis Management; PR Ethics, Standards and Values

Text Books And Reference Books:

 

Center, A. H. (2007). Public Relations Practices: Managerial Case Studies & Problems (6th ed.). New Delhi:

PHI Learning.

W.D. Wells, S. M. (2007). Advertising: Principles and Practice (7th ed.). New Delhi: Pearson Education

India.

 

 

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Essential Reading

Center, A. H. (2007). Public Relations Practices: Managerial Case Studies & Problems (6th ed.). New Delhi:

PHI Learning.

W.D. Wells, S. M. (2007). Advertising: Principles and Practice (7th ed.). New Delhi: Pearson Education

India.

 

Recommended Reading

Aaker, A. D., Batra, R. & Myers, J. G. (2013). Advertising Management, 5th Edition. Pearson Education India.

          Belch, G. E., Belch, M. A. &Purani, K .(2009). Advertising and promotion. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Education.

       Clow, K. E. &Baack, D. (2007). Integrated advertising, promotion and marketing communication. New Delhi: Pearson Education India.

           Jethwaney, J. & Jain, S. (2012). Advertising management. New Delhi: Oxford University Press.

         Terence, S. (2007). Advertising and promotion-An IMC approach, Canada Thomson South-Western

      Thomas, D. (2005).  Principles of advertising and IMC. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Education.

Evaluation Pattern

Test/Exam

Marks

Final Award

CIA I

20 Marks

10 Marks

Mid-trimester Exam

50 Marks

25 Marks

CIA III

30 Marks

30 Marks

Attendance

 

5 Marks

End-trimester Exam

50 Marks

30 Marks

Total

200 Marks

100 Marks

MBA543BF - ANALYTICS FOR FINANCE (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

This course deals with the application aspects related to analytics in the area of finance, covering credit risk, fraud management and retail banking. It is fairly clear that, these days, there is a growing need for using the huge amount of data that gets generated and captured using technology, for making decisions. The management students are expected to have adequate knowledge in this field and accordingly the course has been structured. This is an introductory course and students who would like to take up career in this area are expected to pursue further studies.

 

Course Objective

This course attempts to understand the process and techniques of data mining for fact based decision making using SPSS (PASW) software for descriptive and predictive modeling in finance domain.    

Course Outcome

By the end of the course, the students should be able to:

 

Knowledge

  • Understand the process and techniques of data mining for decision making using descriptive and predictive modeling in finance domain.
  • Understand the common application of analytics for the financial service industry.
  • Skills
  • Develop proficiency in software used for business analytics including SPSS.
  • Develop unbiased data observational and result interpretation skills.

Attitude

  • Develop an attitude that allows out of box thinking.
  • Develop an unbiased interpretation of outcomes and results.
  • Appreciate the ethical and social dimensions of decision making using analytics in the realm of finance and its related areas.    

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:6
Introduction to Analytics for Finance
 

Level of knowledge: Conceptual

Analytics for a New Decade – Post Crisis Analytics: The Imperatives; Productizing Analytic Innovation: The Quest for Quality, Standardization and Technology Governance.

Structuring the Unstructured Data: The Convergence of Structured and Unstructured Analytics.    

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:8
Analytics in Credit Risk Management
 

Level of knowledge: Conceptual

Fusing Economic Forecasts with Credit Risk Analysis; Unstructured Data Analytics for Enterprise Resilience;  Transaction Analytics for Real-Time Risk Decisions.

Questions to Ask of the Optimization Solutions; Practical Challenges of Portfolio Optimization.    

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:8
Analytics in Retail Banking
 

Level of knowledge: Conceptual

Analytics in Cross Selling – A Retail Banking Perspective; Analytics as a Solution for Attrition; Customer Spend Analysis: Unlocking the True Value of a Transaction; A Dynamic 360 Degree Dashboard: A Solution for Comprehensive Customer Understanding. Analytics in Retail Banking: Why and How? ; Business Analytics in the Wealth Management Space.    

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:8
Analytics in Fraud Management
 

Level of knowledge: Conceptual

Developing a Smarter Solution for Card Fraud Protection; Using Adaptive Analytics to Combat New Fraud Schemes; To Fight Fraud, Connecting Decisions is a Must.    

Text Books And Reference Books:

FIN sights – Technology Insights for the Financial Services Industry – Analytics in Financial Services – Special Edition in collaboration with FICO by Infosys.    

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading
  1. Market Overview: The Business Intelligence Software Market, Forrester Research, Inc,23/10/09, p7.
  2. Keeney, R. and H. Raifa, “Decisions with Multiple Objectives”, Cambridge University Press,
  3. Cambridge UK, 1993.
  1. Clemen, R., “Making Hard Decisions”, Duxbury Press, Belmont, California, 1990.
  2. Mulvey, J.M., R.J.Vanderbei, and S.A.Zenios, “Robust Optimization of Large Scale Systems”, Operations Research, 43 (1995), 264-281.
  3. TowerGroup Survey of Credit Card Issuers and Consumer Lenders: Connected Decision Making for Collections, Risk and Fraud Management in Turbulent Times, Theodore Iacobuzio, April 2008, page 17.
  4. Knapik, Jaroslaw “Using Technology to Combat Financial Crime in Retail Banking (Strategic Focus)”, Datamonitor, Dec 2008.
  5. Loshin , David. “Customer Centricity, Master Data and the “360 Degree View”. A Datalux white paper.    
Evaluation Pattern

CIA Details
CIA 1
 
 
 Component 
 
 
 
MCQs, application oriented having a weightage of 100%, to be carried out through Moodle.
 
   
CIA 2
Component 
 
Live Case analysis, with changing data in two intervals, using defined data source, statistical tool , after defining problem statement Alternate way of addressing the same problem statement, data source and stat-tools will remain unchanged
 
 
Weightage of 100%

MBA543BL - IT SERVICE MANAGEMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

 Course Description

 

This course is offered as a choice-based three-credit course for students of LOS specialization.The course describes an approach to management of IT Services. It brings together in a Lifecycle based process approach, all the various activities that need to be performed by the IT Function of an organization for effective and efficient provisioning of IT Services to its users and customers.

 

The course also explores frameworks for sustainability in IT Service Management domain through Green IT and Lean IT concepts.

A case that builds up as the course progresses will be used to link the course topics.

 

Course Objective

This course attempts to make students understand how IT Services are strategized, designed, delivered, transitioned and operated by IT functions in corporates. The course provides an awareness of IT Service Lifecycle and its key elements, the overall linkages between the stages in the Lifecycle, the processes used and their contribution to IT Service Management Practices. The course is intended to equip students to pursue a career in the Information Technologyindustry, either as IT Managers of IT Departments or as consultants on IT Service Management.

 

After completing the course, the students will be equipped to appear for ITIL Foundation Certification exam, if they so desire.

 

Course Outcome

At the end of the course, students should be able to:

 

Knowledge

  •  Understand the Lifecycle of a  IT Service and its stages
  • Identify the various Roles and their levels of involvement in relation to IT Services during various stages of the IT Service Lifecycle
  • Learn the concepts and processes of Strategy for IT Services
  • Know the approaches and processes in the Design of IT Services
  • Understand the frameworks and processes involved in Transition of IT Services to operational mode
  • Know about the Processes, Concepts, Methodologies for Operations of IT Services
  • Appreciate the need for continual improvement of IT Services
  • Know the Standards, Tools & Techniques used for IT Service Management
  • Appreciate Lean IT and Green IT concepts

 

Skill

  • Chart IT activities into process flows
  • Assess maturity level of IT services
  • Develop or improve 33 skills as per SFIA (Skills Framework for Information Age) V6, under the following sub-categories.
    • Information Strategy
    • Business Strategy and Planning
    • Technical Strategy and Planning
    • Business Change Management
    • Service Design
    • Service Transition
    • Service Operation
    • Quality and Conformance
    • Stakeholder Management

 

Attitude

  • View implementation of technology solutions as provision of services
  • Have the drive to continually improve from current performance levels
  • Seek potential problems and proactively take remedial action
  • Resort to best practices guidance in profession

 

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:2
Introduction
 

Concept of IT Service. Service Management as a practice for IT Services.

Various frameworks and standards, especially ISO 20000 and ITIL Framework.

4 Ps for IT Service Management. IT Process Model.

Service Lifecycle, Capability & Resources, Portfolio, Pipeline, Catalogue, Governance

 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:3
Service Strategy
 

Overview, Purpose and Scope of Service Strategy.

Understanding value creation through IT Services.

Defining and developing an IT Services Strategy.

 

Service Strategy Processes – Portfolio, Demand, Financial and Business Relationship Management.

 

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:6
Service Design
 

Overview, Purpose and Scope of Service Design.

Service Design Package, Service Design Aspects.

 

Service Design Processes - Service Design Coordination, Management of Service Catalogue, Service Level, Availability, Capacity, Information Security, Supplier, IT Service Continuity.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
Service Transition
 

Overview, Purpose and Scope of Service Transition.

Transition Planning and Support.

Service Transition Processes - Change Management, Change Evaluation, Service Validation and Testing, Service Asset and Configuration Management, Release and Deployment Management, Knowledge Management.

 

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:6
Service Operation
 

Overview, Purpose and Scope of Service Operation.

Communication in Service Operations, Balancing of Service Operation variables.

 

Service Operation Processes – Request Fulfilment, Event, Incident, Problem and Access Management.

 

Service Operation Functions - Service Desk, Technical Management, Application Management, IT Operations Management.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:1
Continual Service Improvement
 

Overview, Purpose and Scope of CSI.

CSI Models, Service Management Baseline, Metrics and Measurement.

Value to Business.

Seven Step Process of Continual Service Improvement.

ITIL Maturity Model.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:6
Tools, Technology & Trends
 

IT Service Automation, Tools in various Lifecycle stages.

Latest trends and developments in IT Service Management.

Ethics issues in IT Service Management

Lean IT Service Management.

Role of IT Service Management in Green IT.

IT Service Management for DevOps.

Case Studies bringing it all together.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Text Book

1.       Orand, B., Villareal, J. (2013). Foundations of IT Service Management with ITIL 2011 (2nd ed.). ITILyaBrady.

 

Reference Book

1.      AXELOS, (2011). ITIL Service Strategy. TSO.

2.       AXELOS, (2011). ITIL Service Design. TSO.

3.       AXELOS, (2011). ITIL Service Transition. TSO.

4.       AXELOS, (2011). ITIL Service Operation. TSO.

5.       AXELOS, (2011). ITIL Continual Service Improvement. TSO.

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Essential Reading

1.    Brewster, E., Griffiths, R., Lawes, A., Sansbury, J., (2011). IT Service Management. British Informatics Society Limited. 
2.    Salvage, I., Ferris, K., (2011). Greening Service Management - The Relationship between Environmental Sustainability and IT Service Management. TSO.
3.    Steinberg, R., (2016). High Velocity ITSM: Agile IT Service Management for Rapid Change in a World of Devops, Lean IT and Cloud Computing. Trafford Publishing.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA-1: 10 marks

CIA-2: 25 marks

CIA-3: 30 marks

End Term: 30 marks

Attendance: 5 marks

MBA543BM - RETAILING MANAGEMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

To give a complete insight and knowledge of retailing and prepare students for careers in the area of organized retailing. To understand the various aspects of retailing: multichannel retailing, retailing strategy, customer relationship management, information systems and supply chain management, managing merchandise and store management.

Course Outcome

After completion of the course the students will be able to:

 Knowledge: (Domain Expertise CLO1 and Knowledge Application CLO2)

  • Understand concepts of retailing, retail formats, consumer buying behavior.
  • Understand the difference between e-tailing and conventional retailing
  • Understand the retail market strategy, retail location importance, HRM, information systems and supply chain management, customer relationship management.

 Skills: (Problem Solving - CLO11, Research Skill - CLO12, Analytical Skill - CLO13, Creativity - CLO14, Practical Skill - CLO15, Presentation Skill - CLO16)

  • Manage a retail store effectively.
  • Plan Merchandise planning and assortment, pricing, retail communication mix,

store management, store layout design and visual merchandising.

  • Develop acumen to undertake catchment analysis to develop an optimum retail storelocation.

 Attitude: (Team work - CLO21, Global Perspective - CLO23, Social Responsibility - CLO24, Ethical Outlook - CLO25)

  • Apply retail concepts as a professional does for effective marketing
  • Develop the attitude of achieving excellence in all activities of retailing.

 

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:5
The World of Retailing
 

Introduction to world of Retailing: its economic significance and opportunities. Types of retailers: trends in retailing, retailer characteristics, food and General Management merchandise retailers, non store retail formats, services retailing and types of ownership. Multichannel retailing: retail channels and shopping in future.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:5
Retailing Strategy
 

Retail market strategy: Planning and development, target market and retail formats, building sustainable competitive advantage, strategic retail planning process, business operations and financial developments: the structure of business, investment decisions, financial evaluation, strategic profit model.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:4
Retail Location and SCM
 

Retail locations and site selection: Trade Area Analysis - Huff Garvity Model, Catchment Analysis. Shopping centers, city or town location, free standing sites. Information systems and distribution: supply chain management, physical distribution, inventory and warehouse management.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:7
Merchandise Management
 

Merchandise planning: category management, sales forecasting, assortment planning process. Buying merchandise: branding strategies, sourcing decision, vendor development and management. Pricing strategies: objectives, pricing calculations and approaches, price adjustments. Retail communication mix: develop brand loyalty and image, selecting promotional mix, planning retail communication process.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:5
Store Management
 

Managing the store: recruiting and selecting store employees, socializing and training, motivation and evaluating employees, gaining competitive advantage, compensation and reward system, controlling cost by building employee commitment, trends in human resource. Store layout, design and visual merchandising: objectives of good store design, space planning, merchandise presentation techniques, importance of atmospherics.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:4
E-tailing and International retailing
 

E-Tailing: Importance of e-tail, E-Business Models, Product Placement in e-tail.

Internationalization of retailing: shopping at world stores, internationalization process, culture, business and international management.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Levy, M., Weitz, B., Pandit, A. (2012). Retailing Management. Tata McGraw-Hill. reprint in 2013.

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Berman, B., Evans, J. R.( 2008). Retail Management-A Strategic approach. Prentice Hall India.

Newman, A. J. & Cullen, P., Retailing: Environment and Operations. Ed-Indian edition, New Delhi, Thompson.

Bajaj, C. Bajaj, T. R. & Nidhi, V. S.,  Retail Management.Oxford University Press, India.

Gilbert David, Retail Marketing Management.Pearson Education, India.

 

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation will be continuous and conducted under three categories,

 a) Assignments.

 b) MCQ tests .

 c) End Term Examinations.

CIA-1

Assignment 20 marks Weightage 10%

CIA-II

Assignment 40 Marks Weightage  25%

MCQ Test     10 Marks Weightage  25%

CIA-III

Assignment 60 Marks Weightage  30%

MCQ Test     10 Marks Weightage  30%

Attendance    5 Marks  Weightage  100%

Total Marks  145 Marks Weightage 70%

End-term Question Paper Format: Marks 50–  Time - 2 hours Weightage 30%

Section A  - 10 marks  4 out  of  6 questions (4 x 10=40 marks)
Section B - 10 marks                                         (1x10=10 marks)

If the case study has questions, students are expected to answer all those questions and if the case study has no questions then students are expected to follow logical method of problem identification, alternative generation and recommendations to solve the case study.

Questions from self learning module would be included in the above mentioned pattern.

MBA543CF - FINANCIAL PLANNING AND WEALTH MANAGEMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

With financial planning emerging as a prospective career opportunity, this course introduces the students to the nuances of various investment avenues, life cycle of investors, their objectives and asset allocation. This course brings in the application of various concepts which has been learnt in other courses.

Course Objective

This course attempts to introduce the students to the nuances of various investment avenues, life cycle of investors, their objectives and asset allocation.

Course Outcome

By the end of the course, the students should be able to:

 Knowledge

·       Develop a conceptual and analytical understanding of the framework of financial

            planning process.

·       Understand different financial instruments that are available as savings instruments and the risk associated with each of those instruments.

 Skill

·       Develop key asset allocation strategies commonly adopted by wealth managers and

undertake value investing techniques.

·       Calculate and quantify risk and return while managing funds or while evaluating various options for investing.

 Attitude

·     Develop an attitude of integrative thinking with emotive intelligence that is required to develop a discipline that is needed for understanding investment strategies and managing risk.

·       Understand the importance of spreading the knowledge of financial discipline in the context of investing.

·       Develop an ethically and socially responsible outlook towards being an investor as well as being an investment advisor in the realm of financial planning.

·       Understand the importance of collaborative functioning in diverse teams to achieve the common organizational goal of value creation for all the stakeholders. 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:5
Overview on Financial Planning and Wealth Management
 

Introduction to wealth management, Concepts of being rich, concept of asset classes, Risk and return trade-off and risk profiles. Introduction to financial planning, Life cycle analysis, Financial planning process, Why plan for the future?  Indian perspective of critical issues in wealth management,. Financial Planning and Wealth Management Industry. Role of banks in Financial planning, client profiling and client management.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:3
Role of Insurance
 

Why buy insurance? Role of insurance as a risk mitigant, Introduction to various types of risks, Concept of insurable risks from an investor’s perspective, Various insurance products available – Life and Non Life, Concept of Human Life Value (HLV) and methods of computing HLVs.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:4
Mutual Funds as an Asset Class
 

What are Mutual Funds? Structure of a Mutual Fund, Mutual Fund structure in India, Type of Mutual Funds available for investment – Income, Liquidity, Debt, Equity, Sectoral, Index and ETFs.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:7
Equities as an Asset Class
 

Investing philosophies for Equities, Value Investing the long term strategy, Equity investing is not the same as Equity trading, How to identify industry or sector and a specific Equity for investment, Timing of investment, Alternate Equity based investment avenues like PMS, Margin Financing, IPO Financing and LAS.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:6
Alternate Asset Classes
 

Gold as an asset class and how to invest in Gold in India? Real Estate as an asset class, Challenges in investing in Real Estate, Urban Vs Rural, Residential Vs Commercial, Land Vs Build Properties, REIT, Private Equity, Venture Capital, Structured Notes, Quant Funds and Offshore Opportunities.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:3
Asset Allocation and Strategies
 

Asset allocation decision from an Investor’s perspective, Active Vs passive strategies, Asset allocation strategies – Strategic Asset Allocation, Constant Weighting Asset Allocation, Tactical Asset Allocation, Dynamic Asset Allocation, Insured Asset Allocation, Integrated Asset Allocation.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:2
Evaluation and Investment Philosophies
 

Holistic approach to wealth management advisory, Integrity and Ethics the bedrock of long term advisory roles, Inclusive Mass Affluent services Vs Niche HNI services, Thematics and SRI in Wealth Management, Ethical investment options and dos and donts from wealth industry stalwarts.

Benjamin Graham, Warren Buffet and Peter Lynch, Investment Philosophy.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Dunn & Bradstreet., (2010), Wealth Management, Finance Essentials Series. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Publications.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.     Ashiya Manish., Wealth Management. ICFAI Press.

2.     Facrber Esme., All about Investing. Tata McGraw – Hill Publications.

3.     Introduction to financial planning by Indian Institute of Banking & Finance. Taxmann Publications P Ltd.

4.     Kapoor Jack R., Dlabay L R, Huges R J,(2008). Personal Finance, New Delhi: Tata Mc-Graw Hills Publications.

Evaluation Pattern

This is a non-exam course and will be evaluated through projects submissions

MBA544AH - HUMAN RELATIONS SKILLS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

The course is offered as a human resource elective in the second year. The course offers 19 skill areas under five major domains – intrapersonal effectiveness, interpersonal effectiveness, understanding and working in teams, and leading individuals and groups. It offers students a balance between theory and application. It provides tips and techniques as well as conceptual grounding to motivate participants to learn and apply a particular skill. This course is important because organizations are looking for employees with outstanding interpersonal skills to help them remain flexible and viable in today’s competitive workforce.

 

Course Objective

This course attempts to inculcate among students the skill sets under five major domains to help them remain flexible and viable in today’s competitive workforce.

Course Outcome

Knowledge

·         Appreciate the key issues that people work with, and how to communicate effectively with them.

 

Skills

·         Explore their own skills and to develop others as an effective manager.

·         Apply HR skills in tasks related to HR development and management.

·         Influence & manage individuals and groups, thereby enhancing human relations skills for improved performance at the workplace.

·         Assess level of effectiveness and enhance one’s own capability in each of the skills.

 

Attitude

·         Engage in receiving feedback from others and encourage self-feedback for each skill.

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:4
Self Awareness, Self disclosure and trust ? Personal & Interpersonal skills
 

Journey into Self awareness, Self disclosure and trust,Establishing Gals consisyent woth your values and ethics  , self management

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:3
Goal Setting and self management
 

implement goal setting to acheive personal and professional goals, clarify what is impoprtant to me : my values and needs , write effective goals , evaluate options concerning ethical dilemmas 

Manage my time to acheive more amd be more efficient , identify stressors in my life and find ways to reduce or change my response to them, recognise and overscome barriers to self improvenment 

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:3
Understand and working with diverse others and listening
 

Understand the biases which we have towards others who are different from me, acept other's approaches and prespectives when they are completely different from my own learn to work effectively with others of defferent races ages seek out opportunities to increase the diversity and the benefits it brings to me personally and as a member of an organization

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:3
Conveying and persuading others
 

Communication-Assertive communication-Sending messages effectively-Theories of persuasion-Making effective presentations.

 

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:3
Negotiation and managing conflicts (3 hrs)
 

Negotiation skills-Stages and strategies of negotiating- Integrity and ethics in negotiation- Current trends in negotiations-Conflict management strategies

 

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:3
Building teams, work groups and facilitating team success
 

Type of teams-Team developmental stages-High performance teams- Belbin’s team roles – Key facilitative interventions

 

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:2
Effective meetings, making decisions and solving problems
 

Strategies for effective meetings-Decision making process-Problem solving techniques-Creativity in problem solving.

 

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:3
Power, politicking, networking and mentoring
 

Types of power-Politicking strategies-Ethical issues in politicking-Building effective networks in organizations-Social network analysis- Types and stages of mentoring relationships

Unit-9
Teaching Hours:3
Coaching, providing feedback and project management
 

Effective coaching behaviors-Counseling-Effective feedback-Challenges in providing and receiving feedback-Benefits of project management -Steps in managing projects.

 

Unit-10
Teaching Hours:3
Leading and empowering self and others
 

Effective leadership- Leaders vs. Managers-Self-leadership-Implementing empowerment-Empowerment through delegation.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Essential Reading

  1. De Janasz, S. C., Dowd, K. O., and Schneider, B. Z. (2012).  Interpersonal skills in organizations. 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Edition.
  2. Robbins, S. P. and Hunsaker, P. L. (2012).  Training in interpersonal skills: Tips for Managing People at Work. 5th Edition. PHI Learning.

 


 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Recommended Reading

 

  1. Gallagher, K (2011). Skills development for Business and Management students. Oxford University Press.

 

2.       Hegar, K. W. (2012). Modern Human Relations at Work. (11th edition). Cengage Learning.

 

3.       Wallace, H. R. & Masters, A. (2012). Personal Development for Life and Work. Cengage Learning.

 

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation Pattern

1. 4 MCQ Tests - 50 marks

2. Practical Record – 15 marks

3. Individual Presentation - 10 marks

4. Group Presentation -15 marks

5. Written Assignment – 5 marks

6. Faculty assessment – 5 marks

MBA544AL - SERVICE OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

This paper is offered as a subject in the fifth trimester for Lean operation and systems specialization. It emphasizes on the importance of effective operations management in the service industry. Students can develop and specialize on the various approaches to the efficient working of the service industry. The course is delivered mainly through case discussions.

 Course Objective

This course attempts to help the students to specialize on the various concepts related to Service Operations management.

Course Outcome

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Knowledge

·         Understand and identify the scope of different services and its challenges in an economy

·         Understand how managers  determine the best approach to solve the problem through Lean Philosophy

 

Skills

·         Plan and implement system’s approach to solve problems of services.

·         Gain skills to develop strategies to handle present and future challenges in services

·         Use latest tools and techniques for effective decision making

 

Attitude

·            Value the interaction as a professional with all the stakeholders’ of a serviceOrganization

·            Appreciate relationship of all stakeholders in service supply chains

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:3
Introduction to Service Operations Management
 

Understanding of Services Economy, Nature of Services-service package and services classification, Increased role of services in Manufacturing and recent trends. Technology in Services – Technology in Service Encounter Emergence of self service, Automation in services, Internet services, Ethical dimensions of Services.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:4
Service Operations Strategies (IRCTC Next Generation E Ticketing System-Case Study)
 

Service Operations Strategies, Transformation and SSR and CRM. TQM, Lean and automation

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:5
Services Supply Chains and Sustainability -Akshaya Patra - Feeding India's School Children-HBR Case)
 

Supply Chain management and logistics in services delivery. Strategies for sustainability, Role of Governments and NGOs, Lean Philosophies, Transformation of society towards a better model, Expansion Plans.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:4
Services Quality (Starbucks Case:Transformation and Renewal: HBR Case)
 

Importance of Service quality, Role of TQM, ambience, and technology absorption.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:5
Services Management in Hotel and Tourism Industry (ITDCReport (Latest))
 

Hotel and Tourism Industry in India- Present Status. Strategies for development of Hotel Industry. Role of state and central governments in developing Hotel and Tourism Industry.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:5
Service Management in Retail (Branding in the age of Social Media-HBR Case)
 

Importance of SMAC and Impact of Social Media Analytics on Retail and other allied services.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:4
Current Trends, Growth and Globalization of Services
 

Domestic growth and expansion strategies- Focused service, focused network, clustered service diversified network, Franchising, Generic International Strategies and Global service strategies. Ethical issues in servicing contracts

Text Books And Reference Books:

Essential Reading

1.James A Fitzmmons, M. J. (Latest edition). Service Management -Operations, Strategy ,Information technology. New Delhi: Tata Mc Graw Hill.

 

Recommended Reading

1.  ITDC Report (Latest)

2. KPMG Report on Retailing (Latest)

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Essential Reading

1.James A Fitzmmons, M. J. (Latest edition). Service Management -Operations, Strategy ,Information technology. New Delhi: Tata Mc Graw Hill.

 

Recommended Reading

1.  ITDC Report (Latest)

2. KPMG Report on Retailing (Latest)

Evaluation Pattern

CIA I - 10 marks

CIA II - 25 marks (mid-term exam)

CIA III - 30 marks

Attendance - 5 marks

End-term exam - 30 marks

MBA544BH - ADVANCED ORGANIZATION BEHAVIOUR AND EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This core course aids students to develop an understanding of functioning and design of organizations as social collectivities. It seeks to understand the reciprocal relationship between organizational characteristics (for e.g.  Organizational structures and design, culture and change) and managerial behavior. It will develop theoretical and practical insight and problem solving capabilities for effectively managing the organizational processes.

 

A component of Emotional Intelligence has been included in the course as it is one of the strongest predictors of human performance. This course intends to increase students’ awareness of the usefulness of EI skills and equip them to apply the EI skills at the workplace. It will create opportunities to become aware of one’s own behaviour and understand others’ behaviour.

 

Course Content

The course provides an insight   into organizational processes, such as leadership, power and politics, organizational change, organizational culture and structures, how they can be fostered and enhanced. The students will gain awareness of the sources of emotions and learn how to deal with human emotions.

 

The goal of the course

The student will appreciate the HR /people systems and processes required for emergent organizational forms.

Course Outcome

Knowledge

·         The student will be able to integrate basic concepts of leadership, power, organization culture, organizational change and development and organization structure as a distinct field in management with practical application.

·         The students would have acquired a thorough knowledge regarding the basic concepts of EI and their significance at the work place.

 

Skill

·         The course develops the ability of students to understand one’s own behaviour and its impact on others at the workplace

·         The student will be able to plan interventions which involve ability to diagnose and effectively deal with human behaviour at the workplace.

·         The students would have acquired a thorough understanding of the various EI skills and their applications at the work place.

 

Attitude

·         The students will have a proactive and holistic approach toward dealing with people challenges.

·         The students would have acquired a thorough understanding of EI as a concept resulting in behaviour changes in their professional as well as their social interactions involving emotions.

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:7
Unit I Leadership, Power and Politics
 

Historical Development, Contemporary definitions of leadership, Theories of leadership, Applications of selected leadership theories in analyzing behavior (Self and others) Issues in leadership: Leadership in the Digital world, Ethical Issues, Servant leadership, Bases of Power, Power tactics, Political behavior in organisations                                      

 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:3
Organizational Change and Development
 

Concept, Focus of change, Resistance to change, Approaches to managing organizational culture, /creating a culture of change, Concept and characteristics of organizational development, OD values , OD interventions (individual / group /organizational level)

 

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:3
Understanding Organizational culture
 

Definition, Characteristics of organizational culture, Characteristics of a strong culture, Determinants of cultural identity Frameworks: Geart Hofstede Clyde Cluckhohn, TE Hall, Implications: Adjusting to a new culture, Competencies of a global manager.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:3
Organizational Structures
 

Definition of organization, Dimensions, Determinants: Strategies, Organizational Design, Technology, Environment, Power control, Choosing the right structural form   

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:7
Emotional Intelligence background and overview
 

Introduction, Significance of emotions, Historical development of the concept,  Physiology of emotions, The Marshmallow experiment and its significance.  Emotional Intelligence and Intelligence Quotient, The EI models of John Mayer, Peter Salovey and Daniel Goleman

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:7
Emotional Intelligence and the work place
 

Introduction. Emotions and the early childhood, EI and higher education. The significance of EI in today’s world. The business case for EI from various emotionally intense professions like insurance, training, sales/marketing and teaching. EQ and leadership effectiveness. Harnessing EI to create productive and happier workplaces. Building emotionally intelligent work teams. (Self  learning module)

Measuring EQ- MSCEIT (Mayer-Salovey-Caruso Emotional Intelligence Test ) The Emotional Quotient Inventory (EQ-i)

Text Books And Reference Books:

1.       Robbins, S P., Judge, T A and Vohra, N (2013).  Organizational Behavior. 15th Edition, Prentice Hall of India.

2.       Singh,D (2007). Emotional Intelligence at work- A Professional Guide Sage Publications, India

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.       Adler, N. J & Gundersen, A.(2008). International Organizational Behavior ,5th Edition, Cengagge Learning India Private Limited..

2.       Helriegel, D., Slocum, J. N., & Woodman, R. W. (2010). Organizational behavior. Macgraw-Hill.

3.       Hodegetts, R.  M.  (2011). Organizational behavior.   Macmillan..

4.       Greenberg, J., & Baron, R. A. (2009). Behavior in organizations.   Prentice Hall of India.

5.       Nelson, D.I & Quick, J.C (2013).  Organizational Behavior, Thomson South Western.

6.       Pareek.U (2013). Understanding Organizational Behavior. Oxford University Press.

7.       Kreitner, R & Kinicki, A (2012). Organizational behavior.  McGraw Hill.

8.       Goleman D (2006) Social Intelligence, Hutchinson, London

9.       Hogan K (2006) The Science of Influence , Wiley and Sons India (P) Ltd

10.    Thaler R.H Sunstein C & Nudge (2008) Improving decisions about health, wealth, and happiness, Penguin.

11.    Baron R.A & Byrne D (2000) Social Psychology , Pearson Education.

12.    Anastasi A & Urbina ( 1997) Psychological Testing , Pearson Education.

 

Evaluation Pattern

Practical Record: 65 marks

Individual Presentation 15 marks

Group role play: 15 marks

This is in form of continous internal assessment.

Attendance: 5 marks

Total : 100marks  

MBA544BL - MANAGING AUDIT OF INFORMATION SYSTEMS, RISKS AND CONTROLS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

This course is offered as a choice-based three-credit elective course for students of LOS specialization in the fifth trimester. The course is targeted at students who may want to get into Information Systems auditing or risk management as a career, as well as those students who wish to effectively address IT risks and face audits related to IS in their areas of work.

 

Course Objective

This course attempts to provide students an introduction to IS Audits, IT Risks and Controls domains. Not only does the course aim to make students aware of various frameworks, standards and guidelines, but also perform IS audits in different domains, including IT governance and management.

Modelled on the curriculum of Certified Information Systems Auditor (CISA) by ISACA, the professional Association for Information Systems Audits & Controls, the course aims to position the students for roles & domains that need a CISA expertise.

Course Outcome

At the end of the course, students should be able to:

Knowledge

  • Aware of various IS Audit and Assurance bodies, standards and guidelines like ISACA, ITAF, COBIT, ISO
  • Cognizant of various laws and regulations pertaining to IS Audits like COSO, SOX, HIPAA, PCI
  • Learn the concepts of IT Risks and Controls Assessments
  • Know the fundamentals of IS Audits, including planning and performing the same
  • Understand aspects of auditing IT Governance and Management domain
  • Acquire knowledge of auditing information systems and applications
  • Appreciate challenges of auditing protection of information assets
  • Gain knowledge on use of technology, including automation and artificial intelligence, for IS audits
  • Assimilate the code of professional ethics for an IS Auditor

 

Skill

  • Ability to follow a structured methodology for IS auditing
  • Identify sampling and testing approaches to a given audit scenario
  • Develop ways to gain insights beyond the projected realities
  • Comfortable in audit interactions with senior executives
  • Collecting and preserving audit evidences
  • Reporting and communicating audit findings to all stakeholders

 

Attitude

  • Structured, objective and investigative approach to issues
  • Detail and data orientation
  • Depending on evidence for validation
  • Professional and ethical handling of observed or revealed information

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:3
Introduction to IS Audit Function
 

  • Organization of the IS Audit Function, IS Audit Resource Management, Audit Planning.
  • Effects of Laws and Regulations on IS Audit Planning - COSO, SOX, HIPAA, PCI.
  • IS Audit and Assurance Standards and Guidelines - ISACA, ITAF, COBIT5, ISO.

 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:3
Risks and Controls Assessment
 

  • IT Risk Framework, Risk Assessments and Treatments.
  • Internal Controls - General Controls, IS Controls, IS Control Objectives, Control Self Assessment.

 

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:3
Performing IS Audits
 

  • Audit Objectives, Audit Classification, Audit Programs, Audit Methodology.
  • Compliance and Substantive Testing, Sampling, Evidence, Fraud Detection.
  • Interviewing and Observing Personnel.
  • Risk based Auditing, Audit Risk and Materiality.
  • Communicating Audit Results, Audit Documentation.

 

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
Auditing Governance and Management of IT
 

  • Governance of Enterprise IT, Information Systems Strategy, IT Policies and Procedures, Maturity and Process Improvement Models.
  • IT Investment and Allocation Practices.
  • Information Systems Management Practices - HR, Sourcing, Organizational Change Management, Financial Management, Quality Management, Performance Optimization.
  • Auditing IT Governance Structure and Responsibilities, Auditing Business Continuity.

 

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:6
Auditing Information Systems
 

  • Auditing Application Controls.
  • Auditing Systems Development, Acquisition and Maintenance. Auditing Blockchain, IoT and Artifical Intelligence applications.
  • Auditing Infrastructure and Operations, including Disaster Recovery Planning.

 

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:7
Auditing Protection of Information Assets
 

  • Auditing Information Security Management Framework.
  • Auditing Network Infrastructure Security. Auditing Cloud Services.
  • Auditing Environmental Controls.

 

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:2
Ethics & Current Trends
 

  • Code of Professional Ethics for Auditor.
  • Integrated Auditing, Continous Auditing.
  • Usage of Robotic Process Automation in Audits, Agile Auditing, Audit Analytics.
  • Auditing Digital Risks.

 

Text Books And Reference Books:

1.    Cannon, D.L., O’Hara, B.T., & Keele, A. (2016). CISA - Certified Information Systems Auditor Study Guide (4th ed). Sybex.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.    CISA Review Manual (25th ed, 2016). ISACA.

2.    ITAF – A Professional Practices Framework for IS Audit / Assurance (3rd ed)`. ISACA

Evaluation Pattern

CIA 1 - 10 marks

CIA 2 - 25 marks

CIA 3 - 30 marks

End Term - 30 marks

Attendance - 5 marks

MBA545A - CUSTOMER CENTRICITY (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:6
No of Lecture Hours/Week:30
Max Marks:3
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This is a course that is offered to engage participants in developing meaningful perspective on the significance of identifying customer as a stakeholder while taking business decisions. The course employs a cross-functional approach by exploring how principles and ideas of marketing could be effectively used in the conduct of varied functional decisions in business such as human resources, research and development, mobilizing capital from the investment markets.

The course adopts a participant centered learning approach where the content is largely driven through engaging discussions on case studies, concepts and observable applications of concepts in business situations. Participants are required to be prepared to read materials suggested by the course anchor and make subsequent presentations to the peer group.

The competence of participants is evaluation using diverse approaches- case study analysis and presentation, business simulation games and a term paper. This course offers 3 credits.

Course Outcome

On completion of the course, participants will be able to;

Knowledge;

1.      Appreciate cross-disciplinary nature of marketing decisions

2.      Demonstrate deeper understanding of application of marketing principles in a variety of business decisions

Skills;

3.      Chart out the various customer engagement initiatives to be taken by managers of various functions in business

4.      Create a customer centric decision plan for business at the strategic level

Attitude;

5.      Develop sensitization towards the significance of customers’ role in key business decisions

6.      Develop a multi-dimensional perspective on business with customer as the primary stakeholder

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:10
Serving the Customer
 

Solution selling for strategic segments, reducing customer risk & cost & increasing revenues through solution selling;

Pricing – issues & challenges for different strategic segments;

Emergence of retail power & the influence on pricing.

 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:5
Understanding the Customer
 

Brand as a strategic asset, meaning & importance of branding, brand extensions, parent & child brand strategies;

Valuing a brand, brand valuation methods – price-based, cost-based method; Brand Equity – CBBE Model.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:6
Practicum
 

Customer Centricity:

HBR/Non HBR - Non HBR - The Wharton School, University of Pennsylvania

Synopsis:Students act as Chief Marketing Officer of a 3D printing company tasked with building a customer-centric strategy to drive business growth. Equipped with a Customer Relationship Management dashboard, they gather and analyze customer behavior data over time and make strategic decisions to develop a profitable customer base. The simulation illustrates the differences between individual customers, market sectors, and customer segments while exploring the relationship between customer equity and market valuation.

 

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:9
Term Paper
 

Literature Review [30 research articles]on assigned topics on Customer Centricity

Text Books And Reference Books:

1.    A never before world by Rama Bijapurkar

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.      Marketing as strategy by Nirmalya Kumar

2. Case studies;All the case studies prescribed

 

 

Evaluation Pattern

Non Exam based

MBA545B - PERSONAL FINANCIAL PLANNING (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:15
No of Lecture Hours/Week:1
Max Marks:0
Credits:1

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course is focused on sharing the best practices in the area of saving and investing as practiced by high net-worth individuals in India and abroad.

This course attempts to help students to understand the conceptual and analytical framework of financial planning process.

 

 

Course Outcome

By the end of the course, the students should be able to:

 

Knowledge

·         Understand the conceptual and analytical framework of financial planning process.

·         Understand the conceptual and analytical framework of different financial / savings instruments, their risk and return profiles and using these financial / savings instruments in managing funds.

Skill

·         Use value investing techniques and key asset allocation strategies commonly adopted by wealth managers.

Attitude

·         Develop an attitude towards savings and the financial discipline to do the same.

·         Understand the importance of spreading the knowledge of financial discipline in the context of managing risk.

·         Understand and appreciate the ethical and social dimensions of Financial Planning.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:5
Overview on Financial Planning and Wealth Management
 

Introduction to wealth management, concept of being rich, concept of asset classes, risk and return trade-off and risk profiles. Introduction to financial planning, life cycle analysis, financial planning process. Answering, why plan for the future? 

 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:3
Role of Insurance
 

Why buy insurance? Role of insurance as a risk mitigate. Introduction to various types of risks, concept of insurable risks from an investor’s perspective. Various insurance products available – Life and Non Life, Concept of Human Life Value (HLV) and methods of computing HLV

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:4
Mutual Funds as an Asset Class
 

What are Mutual Funds? Structure of a Mutual Fund, Mutual Funds in India, Type of Mutual Funds available for investment – Income, Liquidity, Debt, Equity, Sectoral theme based schemes and ETFs.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
Equities as an Asset Class
 

Investing philosophies for equities. Value investing, the long term strategy.  Equity investing versus equity trading. How to identify industry or sector and a specific equity for investment? Importance of timing of investment. Alternate equity based investment avenues like PMS.A discussion on Behavioral finance in the context of investing in equities.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:5
Alternate Asset Classes
 

Gold as an asset class and how to invest in gold in India? Real Estate as an asset class. Challenges of investing in real Estate. Urban Vs Rural, Residential Vs Commercial, Land Vs Built Properties, REIT, Private Equity, Venture Capital, Structured Notes, Quant Funds and Off-shore opportunities

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:3
Asset Allocation Strategies
 

.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:2
Taxation and Financial Planning
 

Income under the head Capital gains, Income from House property and Income from other sources to the extent relevant to financial planning. TDS on various income concerning

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:2
Service offering models in WM industry
 

Holistic approach to wealth management advisory, Integrity and Ethics the bedrock of long term advisory roles, Investment philosophies of Benjamin Graham., Warren Buffet and Peter Lynch.

Unit-9
Teaching Hours:15
Project work
 

A team of two students will undertake a project related to ‘Personal Financial Planning’ and submit a written report. The Project work provides a platform for students to practice and experiment their learning. The student should identify a topic of interest in consultation with teaching faculty. As far as possible the most relevant and current problems of the industry related to personal financial planning must be addressed. Cross functional topics are allowed with the consent of teaching faculty.

 

Procedure:

 

a.         The project needs to be from Industry related to personal financial planning.

b.         Project identification. Project identification should be based on industry interaction carried out by the students during the first 20 days of the course.

c.         Problem definition. Problem definition for the project and project methodology needs to be submitted by every student within 30 days of starting of the course.

d.         Literature review. Students will carry out literature review and industry survey with the aim to understand the existing theoretical frameworks, empirical studies and methodologies and help the student develop critical review skills. 

d.         Project work. Project work will be completed within a period of 60 days from the start date of the course.

e.         Project report. A project report consisting of Problem Definition, Literature survey, project Methodology, Results and analysis, recommendations and references will be submitted in spiral bound form.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Essential Reading

National Institute of Securities Market – Financial advisor’s workbook

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Recommended Reading

 

  1.  Raja Sekharan S G, How to get rich and retire early,  Maple Press
  2. Ashiya Manish., Wealth Management. ICFAI Press.
  3. Facrber Esme., All about Investing. Tata McGraw – Hill Publications.
  4. Introduction to financial planning by Indian Institute of Banking & Finance. Taxmann Publications P Ltd.
  5. Kapoor Jack R., Dlabay L R, Huges R J,(2008). Personal Finance, New Delhi: Tata Mc-Graw Hills Publications.

 

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation is through a project work and written examinations and marks will be submitted at the end of sixth trimester

MBA545C - SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS MANAGEMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:15
No of Lecture Hours/Week:2
Max Marks:0
Credits:1

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course provide a comprehensive overview of the concepts, strategies and practices of sustainable business. Sustainable Business examines business strategies in response to environmental and social challenges. The course assists students to understand the costs, benefits and risks associated with driving toward sustainable businesses.

 Course Objective

Students undergoing this course are expected to become the facilitators and drivers of sustainability in their respective organizations.

 Course Content

The pedagogy is based on case discussions, review of research papers on sustainability, student assignment to evaluate sustainable initiatives of select businesses and class room discussions. Thirty hours is dedicated to class room based pedagogy and fifteen hours learning is based on project work.

 

 

Course Outcome

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Knowledge

·        Acquire an understanding of business risks and opportunities created by sustainability initiatives in businesses.

·        Understand the current industry practices and enforcement policies related to sustainability.

·        Appreciate the competitive advantage by practicing sustainability and thus effectively deal with the sustainability challenges that they may encounter.

Skill

·        Formulate and implement business responses and actions with regard to the triple bottom line, sustainable development and Govt policies and enforcement laws on environmental protection and sustainability.

·        Provide a platform for students to practice and experiment their learning by way of a seminar and project work.

Attitude

·        Be drivers of sustainability in their respective organizations by generating awareness of corporate social responsibility and good stewardship practices as business leaders.

·        Encourage innovation in business practices and entrepreneurial opportunities created by the “sustainability” movement by profiling business cases.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:3
Sustainable Development - Introduction
 

Concept and definition of sustainable development, guiding principles of sustainability, Social, Ecological and Economic indicators of sustainability, Global sustainability challenge. 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:5
Corporate Sustainability Strategies
 

Conventional vs. sustainable businesses, reasons for implementing sustainable businesses, enablers and barriers of sustainable businesses. Risks, opportunities and challenges of sustainable businesses. Innovation, Collaboration, Technology, Process improvement, Carbon Trading, Cap and trade, Carbon offset schemes.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:5
Sustainable Supply Chain Management
 

Conventional vs. sustainable operations, The Ecosystem Framework for Sustainable  Supply Chains, Forward-Backward Supply chains, Re-features in Supply Chain Design (Re-use, Recycle, Re-manufacture), Green Procurement, Logistics : Freight Consolidation and mode selection., Risks in sustainable Supply Chain Management; Cradle to Cradle Protocol

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:4
Sustainability Reporting and Performance Measurement
 

Life Cycle Analysis (LCA), ISO 14040, Reporting and disclosure, Carbon footprint. Direct and indirect emissions, Energy auditing, Performance measures for business sustainability.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:4
Industrial Waste Management Challenges
 

Types and classification of industrial wastes, Hierarchy of waste management, Challenges in Solid waste management, Hazardous waste management, e-Waste management, Nuclear waste management. Cost benefits of waste management.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:4
International standards for compliance to sustainability
 

Environmental Management System (EMS), ISO 14001, OHSAS, ISO 26000, Pollution control and regulatory agencies: State Level, National Level and International Level

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:5
Current Trends
 

Analysis of Annual Sustainability Reports of Indian as well as Multi National Businesses, Latest trends and research in sustainability, Ethical aspects of Sustainability and development, Corporate social responsibility practices, socially responsible businesses. Concept of good stewardship practices as business leaders. 

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:15
Project Work - Field work
 

Project Work                                                                                                                             (15 Hrs)

A team of two students will undertake a project related to business sustainability and submit a written report. The Project work provides a platform for students to practice and experiment their learning. The student should identify a topic of interest in consultation with teaching faculty. As far as possible the most relevant and current problems of the industry related to sustainability must be addressed. Cross functional topics are allowed with the consent of teaching faculty.

 

Procedure:

a.         The project needs to be from Industry/ NGOs /Govt.organization/ socio-economical issues related to sustainability.

b.         Project identification. Project identification should be based on industry interaction carried out by the students during the first 20 days of the course.

c.         Problem definition. Problem definition for the project and project methodology needs to be submitted by every student within 30 days of starting of the course.

d.         Literature review. Students will carry out literature review and industry survey with the aim to understand the existing theoretical frameworks, empirical studies and methodologies and help the student develop critical review skills. 

d.         Project work. Project work will be completed within a period of 60 days from the start date of the course.

e.         Project report. A project report consisting of Problem Definition, Literature survey, project Methodology, Results and analysis, recommendations and references will be submitted in spiral bound form.

Suggested topics for project work

(The list is indicative. Students should select appropriate topic based on industry visits and their interest)

1.         Assessing the environmental impacts of freight transport

2.         Carbon auditing of companies/ products / supply chains.

3.         Evaluating environmental costs of logistics/ product development/ production/ marketing

4.         Reducing energy consumption in production/ logistics/ administration of selected organization.

5.         Stakeholder identification and engagement in selected business enterprises

6.         Development of fair operating practices in selected areas of businesses.

7.         Sustainability performance measurement in supply chains/ organizations.

 

 

Text Books And Reference Books:

1.Daniel C. Esty and Andrew S. Winston (2009). Green to Gold:  How Smart Companies Use Environmental Strategy to Innovate, Create Value, and Build Competitive Advantage, John Wiley & Sons.

2.N. Viswanadham and S. Kameshwaran (2013). Ecosystem-Aware Global Supply Chain Management, World Scientific Publishing Co. Pte. Ltd.

3.Paul, T. W.(2013). Waste treatment and disposal. John Wiley and sons.

4.Petra Molthan-Hill, (2014). The Business Student's Guide to Sustainable Management: Principles and Practice, Greenleaf Publishing Ltd, UK.

 

5. H. M. Saxena, Environmental Ecology, Biodiversity and Climate Change: Towards Sustainable Development. Rawat Publications.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1. Beamon, B. M. (2005). Environmental and sustainability ethics in supply chain management. Science and Engineering Ethics, 11(2), 221-234.

2. Toffel, M. W., & Van Sice, S. (2011). Carbon Footprints: Methods and Calculations. Harvard Business School Technology & Operations Mgt. Unit Case, (611-075).

3. Bergmiller, G. G., & McCright, P. R. (2009, May). Parallel models for lean and green operations. In Proceedings of the 2009 Industrial Engineering Research Conference.

4. Sarkis, J. (2003). A strategic decision framework for green supply chain management. Journal of cleaner production, 11(4), 397-409.

5. Linton, J. D., Klassen, R., & Jayaraman, V. (2007). Sustainable supply chains: an introduction. Journal of Operations Management, 25(6), 1075-1082.

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation for this course will happen during 6th Trimester.

MBA545D - MANAGING PEOPLE AT WORK (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:150
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

A major challenge for today's supervisors and managers is the ability to motivate and manage people in an ever changing and increasingly complex workplace. In addition to managing resources effectively and efficiently while achieving quality results, supervisors and managers are also expected to be leaders with vision and have the ability to create a work environment where their employees can thrive and succeed. The objective of this course is to understand the key issues that people work with, and how to communicate effectively with them. It offers students a balance between theory and application. It provides tips and techniques as well as conceptual grounding to motivate participants to learn and apply a particular skill.

 

The pedagogy is based on lectures, seminars, class room discussions, experiments and role plays for experiential learning. Thirty hours will be dedicated to class room based pedagogy and fifteen hours learning will be based on experiments and project work.

Course Outcome

Knowledge:

·         Lead teams successfully

·         Enhance human relations skills for improved performance at the workplace

·         Increase self efficacy in tasks and duties relating to human resource development and management

·         Engage in receiving feedback from others and encourage self-feedback.

·         Mentor and coach subordinates and handle people issues at work.

 

Skill:  

·         Manage people at work effectively

·         Lead teams effectively

·         Deal with conflicts at work using effective interpersonal skills

 

Attitude:

·         Evolve in to a people sensitive manager with a collaborative mind set.

·         Receive feedback and use it constructively.

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:7
Managing Self
 

Self-awareness, Self-disclosure and trust – Personal & Interpersonal skills, Goal Setting and self-management

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:9
Managing Others
 

Understand and working with diverse others and listening. Conveying and persuading others. Negotiation and managing conflicts

 

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:5
Team building and Management
 

Building teams, work groups and facilitating team success. Effective meetings, making decisions and solving problems.

 

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
Leading Individuals and Groups
 

Power, politicking, networking and mentoring. Coaching, providing feedback and project management. Leading and empowering self and others

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:3
Current trends
 

Social network analysis, Virtual team management, Cross-cultural management, Diversity Management

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:15
Project
 

A team of two students will undertake a project related to HR skills for managing people at work and submit a written report. The Project work provides a platform for students to practice and experiment their learning. The research design of the project has to be experimental in nature. The student should identify a topic of interest in consultation with teaching faculty. As far as possible the most relevant and current problems of the industry related to managing people at work must be addressed.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Essential Reading                                                                                                                           

  1. De Janasz, S. C., Dowd, K. O., and Schneider, B. Z. (2012).  Interpersonal skills in organizations. 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Edition.
  2. Robbins, S. P. and Hunsaker, P. L. (2012).  Training in interpersonal skills: Tips for Managing People at Work. 5th Edition. PHI Learning.

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Recommended Reading                                             

  1. Gallagher, K (2011). Skills development for Business and Management students. Oxford University Press.

2.       Hegar, K. W. (2012). Modern Human Relations at Work. (11th edition). Cengage Learning.

3.       Wallace, H. R. & Masters, A. (2012). Personal Development for Life and Work. Cengage Learning.

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation Pattern                                                       

1. 4 MCQ Tests - 50 marks

2. Practical Record – 15 marks

3. Individual Presentation - 10 marks

4. Group Presentation -15 marks

5. Attendance– 10 marks

6. Project -50 marks

MBA545E - FAMILY BUSINESS MANAGEMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:10
No of Lecture Hours/Week:2
Max Marks:0
Credits:1

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

Family Businesses compose most of the businesses that operate in the country. The successes of these businesses contribute to the over-all economic health of the country. The course is designed for professionals who intend to manage their family business and for developing the business. This course promotes the continuity of successful family businesses and provides the knowledge necessary to support those family

es for whom continuity of family in business is a strategic objective. The best practices examined provide a road map to enable the family business to avoid the universal “shirt sleeves to shirt sleeves in three generations”. The issues and risks which lie at the intersection of ownership, control, and management of family businesses and the practices necessary to ensure effective optimization of business subsystems will be explored.

 

Course Objective

This course attempts to provide the participants an opportunity to understand their family business better and to prepare them for expansion/diversification through phases of transition so as to ensure the professionals growth.

Course Outcome

Learning Outcomes:

By the end of the course, the student should be able to:

 

Knowledge

·       To provide the participants an opportunity to understand their family business better,

·       To prepare them for expansion/diversification through phases of transition

·       To help the professionals grow in an environment of increased competition

Skill

·       To prepare students in areas like planning, objective setting and astute management of their family’s business.

·       To build long term values for the family, the business and its stakeholders

Attitude

·       To create an atmosphere of trust and values for the success of family business.

 

Level of Knowledge: Working and Applied

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:6
Unit I Introduction
 

Meaning of family; Family Relationships and Family Systems; Characteristics of Family Businesses; Successful Family Businesses. Family business system model, Five attributes of enduring family business, 4 dimensions of family business, Five formal organizational structures. Four stages of ownership.    

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:6
Unit II Next Generation
 

Renewing Entrepreneurship; Building Understanding and Trust; Estate Planning, Trusts and Other Devices; Theories of leadership coaching, new model of leadership development.    

Text Books And Reference Books:

Ernesto J. Poza., Family Business, 3rd Edition, South-Western Cengage Learning.2010    

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.     Jakhete, Jyoti.Family Business Management, Prashant Publications, New Delhi. 2008

2.     Carlock S, Randel. Ward L, John.Strategic Planning for the Family Business, Palgrave Macmillan, New York. 2006

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation criteria:

CIA - 1 will be conducted in 5th trimester. All other CIAs and end term examinations in 6th trimester only

Marks Break up

Tested for

50 % weightage

Attendance

Total

CIA-1

20

10

0

10

MID TERM

50

25

0

25

CIA-3

20

10

0

10

Project Work

100

50

0

50

END TERM

100

50

5

55

 

290

145

5

150

1. The decentralised evaluation policy will continue next AY for both Senior and Junior Batches (Trimester 1 and 4). This means 70% for internal assessments and 30 % for End Trimester Exams. The 70% internal assessment includes 5% for attendance. Therefore, the CIA components will be for 65%.
 
2. The Internal Assessment will be done as under:
a. CIA 1 - 10% Marks (One Assignment, group or individual)
b. CIA 2 - 25% Marks (Written Exam for 2 Hrs)
c. CIA 3 - 30% Marks (15% One Assignment, 15% Quiz)
d. Attendance - 5%
 
3. End Trimester Exam (ETE) (30% Marks) will be for 2 Hrs / 50 Marks 
 
4. Passing criteria for a subject is overall 50% with a minimum of 40% for ETE.

 

MBA551F - SMALL AND MEDIUM ENTERPRISES (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:10
No of Lecture Hours/Week:1
Max Marks:50
Credits:0

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

This course is offered as an add-on / optional to the students of MBA programme to provide a practical understanding of various issues concerning Small and Medium Enterprises including setting up of, financing and rehabilitation. Funding SME by banks is gaining importance in view of the important role that SMEs are playing in the overall growth of our Indian economy.

Course Objective

This course attempts to provide students a practical understanding of various issues concerning Small and Medium Enterprises including setting up of, financing and rehabilitation.

Course Outcome

By the end of the course, the students should be able to:

Knowledge

·        Understand the various issues while setting up a SME by an entrepreneur.

·        Gain knowledge of appraising a SME proposal from marketing and finance perspective and funding.

·        Learn the rehabilitation issues connected with SMEs.

Skill

·       Develop comprehensive business plans and also analyze from a banker’s perspective.

Attitude

·        Appreciate the ethical and social and governance dimensions in the management of small and medium enterprises.

·       Understand the importance of collaborative functioning in diverse teams to achieve the common organizational goal of value creation to all the stake holders. 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:1
SME Concepts
 

Nature and development of Entrepreneurship in SME business. Entrepreneurial decision process – Components of industrial activity and its characteristics – Role of SMEs – Concepts and definition of SME – The Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises Development Act, 2006. Institutional support for SMEs- Government Policy regarding SMEs in India. Growth and performance of SMEs.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:2
Financiers Appraisal Of SME Proposal From Marketing Perspective
 

Marketing concepts relevant to SMEs (Ring Toss Game) – Starting the business – Basic business idea and innovation – Opportunity recognition – Choice of product- Planning and development process -Market segmentation and its relevance to SME.  Product mobility and diversification. Nine successful brand strategies to build winning brands.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:1
Legal Issues For SME
 

Legal issues in setting up the organizations with respect to various forms of organizations.  Statutory registrations and clearances required for setting up a SME.  SARFASI Act. Equitable mortgage, pledge and hypothecation- the legal issues involved.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:3
Project Appraisal And Preparation
 

Techno economic feasibility studies. Man Machine Materials utilization. Assessment of plant capacity. Inventory control and materials management- Just in time production, planning and control. Make or Buy decision. Costing, Pricing and Productivity mix. Working Capital assessment- Balance Sheet preparation and analysis- Cash Flows relevant for loan sanctions- Application and relevant format. The aspects which a bank look for in a proposal before sanctioning. 

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:3
Financing A New Venture
 

Sources of capital – overview. Debt or Equity financing. Internal or external funds. Funding from banks and financial institutions. Various schemes and type of loans: Cash Credit Loans, Medium and Short term loans, Collateral Free Loans- Clean Cash Credit and Clean Term Loans, Composite Loans, Pre-shipment and Post-Shipment export packing credit, Non fund based loans - LC / Guarantees, SME Transport Operators financing schemes, Mortgage loans. Relevance of bank credit rating in appraisal and sanction. CRISIL and ICRA credit rating agencies, Government and Developmental agencies support.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:1
Rehabilitation of Sick SMEs
 

Stresses and strains of a SME entrepreneur (a game). Problems for SME- Sickness in SME- Criteria to identity sickness, causes, symptoms and remedial measures of sickness. Rehabilitation packages.   

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:9
Other Learning Methods
 

a. MANAGEMENT GAME:  Students (as a team) will create a venture model and run the same. The team that crosses all hurdles within the given time frame and makes the maximum profit (without incurring losses) is the winning team.

b. CASE STUDIES:  On Marketing, Finance and Sickness of SMEs.

c.  MINI PROJECT WORK which would develop a project report suitable to be submitted to banks for loan consideration. This involves field work to identify customer preferences and market potential.

 d. INTERFACE  with the Head of Credit Processing Cell of a leading bank like SBI.

Text Books And Reference Books:

There is no prescribed text for this course. Self made materials would be provided to the students by the resource person.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

http://msme.gov.in/

http://www.fisme.org.in/

http://www.wasmeinfo.org/

http://www.techsmall.com/index.htm

http://www.ficci.com/

Evaluation Pattern

The evaluation would be done by the resource person through project works, class participation and other assignments prescribed from time to time during the conduct of the course. Minimum pass percentage is 40. The course will appear in the fifth trimester transcript for the students who are qualified.

MBA552F - PROJECT APPRAISAL AND FINANCE (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:10
No of Lecture Hours/Week:1
Max Marks:50
Credits:1

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

This course is designed to provide exposure on how a project deal can be organized from Industrial, Legal and Financial standpoints and the alternatives for funding it.

 

Course Objective

This course attempts to provide exposure to students on how a project deal can be organized from Industrial, Legal and Financial standpoints and the alternatives for funding it

 

Course Outcome

Learning Outcomes

By the end of the course, the students should be able to:

 

Knowledge

·         Imbibe a comprehensive understanding related to the design, organization and funding options for complex long-term projects.

·          Become aware about the industrial, legal and financial issues of the projects.

 

Skills

·          Design and organize a socio-economically viable project.

·          Conduct viability and feasibility study of a project.

 

Attitude

·         Inculcate the habit of taking a 360 degree view of environment before decision making involving projects.

·          Develop an attitude that incubates and supports ethically and socially responsible projects.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:2
The market for project finance: Applications and sectors
 

Evolution of project finance and market segments; The global project finance market; The domestic project finance market.(Self learning unit) 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:3
Project Characteristics, Risk Analysis and Risk Management
 

Identifying project risks; Risk allocation with contracts stipulated by the SPV; Summary of the Risk management process.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:3
Valuing the Project and Financing the Deal
 

Analysis of operating cash flows and their behavior in different project life-cycle phases; Defining the optimal capital structure for the deal; Financial viability and the Cover ratios used to measure it; Sensitivity Analysis and Scenario Analysis.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:2
Legal and Ethical Aspects of Project Finance
 

Special characteristics of a project company; Contract structure of the deal. Ethical Projects, Ethical Ready Proposals, Ethical monitoring during project implementation, Preventing Project Frauds, Benefits of ethical behaviour.

 

Text Books And Reference Books:

Essential Reading                                                                                                                           

1.       Stefano, Gatti. (2008). Project finance in theory and practiceDesigning structuring and financing private and public projects.  Edition (Indian) Academic, Press - An imprint of Elsevier.

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Recommended Reading                                             

1.         Fabozzi, F., &Nevitt, P.K. (2006). Project financing (7th ed.). London: Euromoney.

2.         Yescombe, E.R. (2003).  Principles of project finance.  San Diego, CA: Academic Press.

3.         Scott, H. (2007).  The law and business of international project finance (3rd ed.). Cambridge Univ. Press.

4.         Sarda Govind Prakashan,D.P. Handbook on project appraisal and follow-up - A practical guide.

Prasanna, Chandra. Projects - planning, analysis, selection, financing, implementation and review – CFM -TMH Professional series in finance

Evaluation Pattern

            Marks  

CIA 1       10    Assignment

CIA 2       15    MCQ

CIA 3       20    Project

Attendance 5

Total          50

MBA583 - INDUSTRY PRACTICUM - LOS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:15
No of Lecture Hours/Week:1
Max Marks:0
Credits:1

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

The objective of this course is to provide industry exposure and environment for students to enable them to learn practically. Students undergoing this course are expected to take up a project in the industry and accomplish the set objectives. This will facilitates students to apply the knowledge they have acquired in their specialization area.

Course Content

The curriculum integrates applied learning through the Industry Practicum. It provides an avenue where the students can integrate concepts learnt, apply their learning, and gain new perspectives on business.  This is experiential learning and hands on, also known as “learning by doing”. The Practicum is offered as an alternative to the Dissertation and the Industry gets a lot of value in having bright people look at things in different ways. They feel it is great to tap into younger minds and get the new ideas and the insight on new trends. The pedagogy is based on practical work and the students have to identify a task with set objectives and need to complete it in the industry so chosen for this industry practicum.

Course Outcome

At the end of the course, students should be able to:

Knowledge:

·       Acquire an understanding of business processes, business working environment and identification of problems or issues faced by the industry.

·         Formulate and implement business solution for the problem identified and address the objectives set out for the Industry Practicum.

·         Familiarize innovation in business practices and learn the problem solving skills.

Skill:

·         Practice and experiment their learning by way of a project work.

·         Develop Written and verbal communication for the 21st Century. Students can prepare and present effective, well organized professional material in an effective manner, both orally and in writing (including presentation decks, graphical displays of numeric data, executive summaries, e-mails, etc.).

Attitude:

·         Solve large and complex technical challenges .Students are able to map large scale business challenges and questions into structured problems, and apply analytical techniques to solve them.

·         Nurture Collaboration and able to work in groups.Students can navigate corporate culture, and avoid potential obstacles to project success.

·         Reflect on professional learning. Students gain a deeper understanding of their personal strengths and weaknesses in the areas of technical skills, communication skills, and leadership.

Level of Knowledge

Students are expected to have prior basic understanding of business practices, specialization related concepts, application of such concepts in the area of operations and systems  management before they undertake this course. The course presents conceptual and application levels of knowledge in Industry Practicum.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:15
Course Content
 

Each student is allotted one faculty donning the role as Practicum Advisor. The Practicum Advisor need not necessarily be the student’s Faculty Mentor. Appropriate Practicum Advisor may be chosen by the student based on the area of expertise and the experience  that the faculty have in particular sector or domain that the student may want to work with.

Student opting for Industry Practicum instead of Dissertation should submit the proposal in the form of Practicum Charter.

This document is about 6-10 page document and it outline the work to be done, brief insight into the Literature review, a tentative engagement plan, and a timetable. On approval of the Practicum Charter by the Head of Specialization and the Practicum Advisor, the Industry Practicum could be taken up by the student and commence the work. 

The student are required to submit a 5-15 page Interim Report about half-way through the project indicating the activities completed thus far and highlighting any accomplishments completed.

The Final Report would be a document of  30 - 50 page. The final report is generated after completing the presentation about their findings and results to the corporate mentor and obtaining the certificate of completion. Students are required to give an oral presentation(Viva) to the Practicum Advisor or the panel  highlighting the  final results and accomplishments.

The student also need to provide weekly progress reports in moodle (just like  the Summer Internship Project) in a format agreed upon by the Practicum Advisor.

The student is expected to put in minimum  75-80 hours of work  (including Reports making and other related documentation preparation) on the Practicum. Two days per week will be freed up on in the Academic calendar in the sixth trimester  for this purpose. No Practicum related work will be taken up during exams (midterm and end term).

 

The Practicum Advisor may obtain feedback report from the Corporate Mentor before the awarding the marks for the Practicum.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Literaure Review in the area in which Industry Practicum project is undertaken.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Literature Review

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation done at end of Sixth Trimester for MBA 683

 

MBA584 - INDUSTRY PRACTICUM - MARKETING (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:15
No of Lecture Hours/Week:1
Max Marks:150
Credits:2

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

The objective of this course is to provide industry exposure and environment for students to enable them to learn practically. Students undergoing this course are expected to take up a project in the industry and accomplish the set objectives. This will facilitates students to apply the knowledge they have acquired in their specialization area.

Course Outcome

On completion of this course, the participants must be able to achieve the following learning outcomes.

 

Knowledge

·         Enable students to acquire an understanding of business processes, business working environment and identification of problems or issues faced by the industry.

·         Equip students to formulate and implement business solution for the problem identified and address the objectives set out for the practicum.

·         Familiarize students with innovation in business practices and learn the problem solving skills.

Skill

·         Provide a platform for students to practice and experiment their learning by way of a project work.

·         Written and verbal communication for the 21st Century. Students can prepare and present effective, well organized professional material in an effective manner, both orally and in writing (including presentation decks, graphical displays of numeric data, executive summaries, e-mails, etc.).

Attitude

·         Critical thinking to solve large and complex technical challenges .Students are able to map large scale business challenges and questions into structured problems, and apply analytical techniques to solve them.

·         Collaboration and work in groups .Students can navigate corporate culture, and avoid potential obstacles to project success.

·         Reflection on professional learning. Students gain a deeper understanding of their personal strengths and weaknesses in the areas of technical skills, communication skills, and leadership.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:15
Course Content
 

 

Each student is allotted one faculty donning the role as Practicum Advisor. The Practicum Advisor need not necessarily be the student’s Faculty Mentor. Appropriate Practicum Advisor may be chosen by the student based on the area of expertise and the experience that the faculty have in particular sector or domain that the student may want to work with.

Student opting for Industry Practicum instead of Dissertation should submit the proposal in the form of Practicum Charter.

This document is about 6-10 page document and it outline the work to be done, brief insight into the Literature review, a tentative engagement plan, and a timetable. On approval of the Practicum Charter by the Head of Specialization and the Practicum Advisor, the Industry Practicum could be taken up by the student and commence the work. 

The student are required to submit a 5-15 page Interim Report about half-way through the project indicating the activities completed thus far and highlighting any accomplishments completed.

The Final Report would be a document of  30 - 50 page. The final report is generated after completing the presentation about their findings and results to the corporate mentor and obtaining the certificate of completion. Students are required to give an oral presentation(Viva) to the Practicum Advisor or the panel  highlighting the  final results and accomplishments.

The student also need to provide weekly progress reports in moodle (just like  the Summer Internship Project) in a format agreed upon by the Practicum Advisor.

The student is expected to put in minimum  75-80 hours of work  (including Reports making and other related documentation preparation) on the Practicum. Two days per week will be freed up on in the Academic calendar in the sixth trimester  for this purpose. No Practicum related work will be taken up during exams (midterm and end term).

The Practicum Advisor may obtain feedback report from the Corporate Mentor before the awarding the marks for the Practicum.

 

Text Books And Reference Books:

Journal research articles related to the topic chosen for the Industry Practicum.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Students to submit literature review as part of the final report.

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation Criteria (Total 150 marks)

Practicum Charter                 15 marks

Interim Report                       25 marks

Final Report                            50 marks

Oral Presentation (Viva)       25 marks

Weekly Reporting      & Performance review by corporate mentor -         25 marks

Attendance & Punctuality with endorsement from corporate mentor – 10 marks

MBA585 - INDUSTRY PRACTICUM - HR (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:150
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

 

The Institute of Management, Christ University (IoM CU) proposes to introduce Industry Practicum as an alternative to Dissertation project for students and this is to be completed in the sixth trimester. It gives students real life experience and exposure to industrial environment. Having almost learnt and imbibed the knowledge in a specific specialization area, students can now look into the practical aspects and see how best the concepts can be put into practice.

Course Content

 

The curriculum integrates applied learning through the Industry Practicum. It provides an avenue where the students can integrate concepts learnt, apply their learning, and gain new perspectives on business.  This is experiential learning and hands on, also known as “learning by doing”. The Practicum is offered as an alternative to the Dissertation and the Industry gets a lot of value in having bright people look at things in different ways. They feel it is great to tap into younger minds and get the new ideas and the insight on new trends. The pedagogy is based on practical work and the students have to identify a task with set objectives and need to complete it in the industry so chosen for this industry practicum.

Course Outcome

 

On completion of this course, the participants must be able to achieve the following learning outcomes.

 

Knowledge:

 

·       Enable students to acquire an understanding of business processes, business working environment  and identification of problems or issues faced by the industry.

 

·       Equip students to formulate and implement business solution for the problem identified and address the objectives set out for the practicum.

 

·       Familiarize students with innovation in business practices and learn the problem solving skills.

 

Skill :

 

·       Provide a platform for students to practice and experiment their learning by way of a project work.

 

·       Written and verbal communication for the 21st Century. Students can prepare and present effective, well organized professional material in an effective manner, both orally and in writing (including presentation decks, graphical displays of numeric data, executive summaries, e-mails, etc.).

 

 

 

Attitude :

 

 

 

·       Critical thinking to solve large and complex technical challenges .Students are able to map large scale business challenges and questions into structured problems, and apply analytical techniques to solve them.

 

 

 

·       Collaboration and work in groups.Students can navigate corporate culture, and avoid potential obstacles to project success.

 

 

 

 

 

·       Reflection on professional learning. Students gain a deeper understanding of their personal strengths and weaknesses in the areas of technical skills, communication skills, and leadership. 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:45
Practicum Advisor and Practicum Charter
 

 

Each student is allotted one faculty donning the role as Practicum Advisor. The Practicum Advisor need not necessarily be the student’s Faculty Mentor. Appropriate Practicum Advisor may be chosen by the student based on the area of expertise and the experience that the faculty have in particular sector or domain that the student may want to work with.

 

Student opting for Industry Practicum instead of Dissertation should submit the proposal in the form of Practicum Charter.

 

This document is about 6-10 page document and it outline the work to be done, brief insight into the Literature review, a tentative engagement plan, and a timetable. On approval of the Practicum Charter by the Head of Specialization and the Practicum Advisor, the Industry Practicum could be taken up by the student and commence the work. 

 

The student are required to submit a 5-15 page Interim Report about half-way through the project indicating the activities completed thus far and highlighting any accomplishments completed.

 

The Final Report would be a document of  30 - 50 page. The final report is generated after completing the presentation about their findings and results to the corporate mentor and obtaining the certificate of completion. Students are required to give an oral presentation(Viva) to the Practicum Advisor or the panel  highlighting the  final results and accomplishments.

 

The student also need to provide weekly progress reports in moodle (just like  the Summer Internship Project) in a format agreed upon by the Practicum Advisor.

 

The student is expected to put in minimum  75-80 hours of work  (including Reports making and other related documentation preparation) on the Practicum. Two days per week will be freed up on in the Academic calendar in the sixth trimester  for this purpose. No Practicum related work will be taken up during exams (midterm and end term).

 

The Practicum Advisor may obtain feedback report from the Corporate Mentor before the awarding the marks for the Practicum.

Text Books And Reference Books:

 

Journal research articles related to the topic chosen for the Industry Practicum. Students to submit literature review as part of the final report

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Respective corporate website and other relevant made available to the student.

Evaluation Pattern

Report Submission - 50 Marks

Viva - 50 Marks

Practicum Advisor Evaluation - 50 marks

TOTAL: 150 marks

MBA586 - CAPSTONE PROJECT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:40
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:200
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description  

The Business Analytics capstone project is a three credit course offered to students of MBA in Business Analytics in their fifth and sixth trimesters.  A capstone project is a mode of experiential learning, carried out at the culmination of the program. It gives the students an opportunity to apply what they have learnt about how to make data-driven decisions to a real business challenge faced by various companies.

The students will have to choose a reputed organization and study a specific business problem associated with it. The specific role that the student will be playing in the organization and the scope of their work in the company will have to be finalized in consultation with the corporate mentor and with the approval of the academic mentor.

The students are required to submit a final report in the specific format detailing their learning in the organization in addition to apprising their academic mentor of the weekly progress.

Objectives

1.             To expose and acclimatize the students to real time working environment in an organization

2.             To enable the students to make effective business decisions based on data

3.             To provide an opportunity to be in and on the job work setting where they have clearly defined targets and timelines

4.             To improve the critical problem solving skills required while entering the job

5.             To develop interpersonal skills required to excel in the corporate

Course Outcome

On completion of the capstone project, the students will acquire:

Knowledge

·         The ability to use data effectively to address business challenges

·         An understanding of how cutting-edge businesses use data to optimize their strategies

·         The ability to make data-driven decisions

Skills

·         The ability to apply and demonstrate their conceptual learning to a business situation

·         Problem-solving, analytical and practical learning ability

·         Work efficiently with statistical tools such as IBM SPSS, R, Weka and Python

·         The ability to conduct statistical analysis to generate insights using statistical software packages like IBM SPSS, Watson Analytics etc.

·         Critical thinking skills acquired through their program

Attitude

·         Appreciate the use of statistical thinking in taking effective business decisions

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:40
Capstone Project
 

The students will have to choose a reputed organization and study a specific business problem associated with it. The specific role that the student will be playing in the organization and the scope of their work in the company will have to be finalized in consultation with the corporate mentor and with the approval of the academic mentor.

The students are required to submit a final report in the specific format detailing their learning in the organization in addition to apprising their academic mentor of the weekly progress.

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

https://nso.district287.org/pluginfile.php/58424/mod_page/content/6/Quick_Guide_to_APA.pdf

 

 

 

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation

Capstone project will be evaluated under three major categories; weekly updates, compliance to the format, content of the report and performance in viva voce.

The pattern of evaluation will be as under:

Weekly updates and compliance:                30 marks

Report evaluation by the guide:                   70 marks

Viva by panel:                                                 100 marks

Weekly Update

The student is expected to provide weekly updates to the academic mentor to enable him/her to check the efficacy of the process. Since weekly updates will act as the primary source for the academic mentor to provide guidance to the students, they must be as detailed and specific as possible.

MBA6041B - COGNITIVE ANALYTICS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:10
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:50
Credits:1

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

This is a one-credit course offered to the students of Business Analytics. The course introduces the students to Cognitive Analytics using IBM Watson.

Course Objective

The objective of this course is to equip the students to understand the cognitive aspects of computation and to carry out the related analytics task using the popular tool IBM Watson.

 

 

Course Outcome

At the end of the course, the student should be able to:

Knowledge

  • Understand the cognitive elements of data analysis.
  • Create a business case for use of cognitive analytics for solving business problems.

Skills

  • Use IBM Watson to carry out analytics task.
  • Create reports for the business decision makers from the insights gained from cognitive analytics.

Attitude

  • Appreciate the synthesis of cognitive mental models with objective data analysis.

 

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:3
Overview of Watson Analytics
 

Introduction to cognitive analytics.  Introduction to IBM Watson.  Identify Watson Analytics components and the user interface (Overview). 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:3
Working with Data and Data Connections
 

Identify data structure limitations and requirements; Upload data from flat files; Shape data before uploading; Upload data from Twitter; Create a secure connection; Create a secure gateway. Join data sets.  Add a calculation to the data set; Add a data group to the data set; Add a hierarchy

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:3
Discover patterns, relationships, and predictive insights
 

Change column headings.  Sorting data.  Perform analysis using natural language questions.  Edit targets in a predictive analysis.  Navigate the spiral in a predictive analysis.  View decision rules and the decision tree.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:3
Sharing and Displaying Analysis
 

Share the analysis through email. Share assets and set access permissions.  Change visualization types in a display.  Modify properties of a display.  Filter visualizations in a display

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:3
Cognitive Analytics Business Case
 

Presentations on Business Case by students

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation Pattern

Research-based assignment:                         10 marks

Quiz:                                                                 10 marks

Project:                                                              25 marks

Attendance:                                                       5 marks

 

MBA6041F - STRATEGIC FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course develops insights into the strategic aspects to investments. It goes beyond the conventional valuation metrics and focuses on value creation from investors’ perspective. The importance of managerial compensation, agency problems and ethics are learnt in this course.

This course attempts to develop insights into the strategic aspects of financial decision making.

Course Outcome

By the end of the course, the students should be able to:

 

Knowledge

·         Understand the conceptual and analytical framework of strategic financial management.

·         Build further on the concepts, which were, learnt through traditional valuation techniques.

·          Understand the organizational value levers and financial drivers of creating value.

·          Understand the strategic issues related to revenue, asset, liabilities and bankruptcy management.

·          Appreciate and manage the complex nature of business environment and conflicting requirement of different stakeholders.

 

Skills

·         Develop quantitative skills to measure ‘value creation’ by companies through various value metrics.

·         Analyze critically the business value of strategic decisions.

·         Nurture creativity in financial decision making.

 

Attitude

·          Appreciate the ethical, social and governance dimensions in the realm of strategic financial management.

·          Develop an integrative thinking of ‘creating value’ by companies.

·          Understand the importance of collaborative functioning in diverse teams to achieve the common organizational goal of value creation to all the stake holders. 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:3
Corporate Objective
 

Logic of Shareholder Wealth Maximization; Stakeholder Theory; Enlightened Value Maximization; Creation of Shared Value; Triple Bottom Line Approach of Reporting- Sustainability Reporting framework of Global Reporting Initiative  (GRI)- Clause 55 of Listing Agreement of SEBI, Business Responsibility Reporting- Green Accounting

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:6
Strategic Asset Management
 

Capital Allocation: Strengthening the Links Between Strategy and Capital Budgeting; Bridging the Gulf Between Strategic Planning and Financial Analysis; Investment in Capabilities; Real Options; Investment Timing Strategy; Management of Capital Projects

Disciplining the Capital Budgeting Process for Small Ticket Items; The Post-Audit. Strategic Revenue Management.

Concept of Strategy; Corporate Strategy; Diversification and Value Creation; Business Level Strategies; Business Model; Innovative Strategies and Business Models.

 

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:6
Strategic Liabilities Management
 

Capital Structure and Value in a Perfect World; Imperfections and Capital Structure; Signalling Theory; Tools for Developing an Effective Capital Structure; Guidelines for Capital Structure Planning; Dividend Policy and Firm Value; Implications of Real World Imperfections; Dividend Policy Formulation; Rationale and Objections to Share Buybacks; Share Buybacks and Valuation. Liquidity Crises Identification: Altman Z Score Model, Managing liquidity crisis and navigating the downturn.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:8
Value Based Management
 

Methods and Key Premises of VBM; Marakon Approach; Alcar Approach; Mckinsey Approach; Stern Stewart Approach; BCG Approach.

Traditional measures of EPS, ROI, EBIT, EBITDA, ROCE, RONA etc. New metrics of Market to Book Ratio (MBR), Total shareholder Return (TSR), Total Business Return (TBR),   Market Value Added (MVA), Economic Value Added (EVA), Future Growth Value (FGV), Cash Value Added (CVA), Cash Flow Return on Investment (CFROI) and the Balanced Score Cord (BSC).

Lessons from the Experiences of VBM Adopters.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:4
Strategic Cost Management
 

The Guiding Principles of Strategic Cost Management; Strategic Cost Management – Key concepts; Cost Drivers – Strategic Views; Value Chain Analysis; Instruments of Strategic Cost Management – Activity Based Costing and Management; Target Costing; Life Cycle Costing; Bench Marking.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:3
Corporate Governance and Ethics in strategic financial management
 

Divergence of Interest; Types of Corporate Governance Mechanisms; Key Principles of Good Corporate Governance; Corporate Governance Around the World; Board of Directors; Auditing; Investor Communication; Incentive Compensation.

Corporate governance & ethics; Ethical Brand Equity & Long term results, Functional ethics in financial management.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Chandra, Prasanna  (2017).  Strategic Financial Management- Managing for Value creation. New Delhi

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Damodaran, Aswath 4th edition (2015). Applied Corporate Finance. New Delhi: Wiley publications

Chandra, Prasanna (2017). Projects: Planning, Analysis, Selection, Financing. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill.

Young, S. and O'Byrne, S. (2000). EVA and value-based management: A practical guide to implementation. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill.

Evaluation Pattern

70% for internal assessments and 30 % for End Trimester Exams. The 70% internal assessment includes 5% for attendance.

The Internal Assessment consists of
a. CIA 1 - 10% Marks (One Assignment, group )
b. CIA 2 - 25% Marks (Written Exam for 2 Hrs)
c. CIA 3 - 30% Marks (15% group Assignment, 15% Quiz)
d. Attendance - 5%

MBA6041H - INTERNATIONAL HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course will cover the management issues which have implications on international HRM decisions including; cross-cultural negotiations, international dimensions of leadership, motivation, team work, and communicating with people of different cultural environment. The  major focus of the course will be on international human resource management & development issues of recruitment and selection, compensation and reward systems, training and development, performance appraisal, expatriation, repatriation and career development.

Course Outcome

 

On completion of the course, participants will be able to;

 

Knowledge

 

1.     To familiarize the students with the various concepts and issues relating to management of human resources in international businesses.

 

2.     To enable students to explore the challenges posed by rapid globalization of business, understand and analyze human resource issues for making effective decisions in the contemporary international business environment.

 

 

 

Skills

 

1. Application of the theories and concepts & their managerial implication

 

2. To review the theories, models and concepts developed in the areas of international management, international organizational behavior, cross-cultural management, and other emerging disciplines, and study their implications on international HRM practices.

 

 

 

Attitude

1. To provide an opportunity to change the way the students think by presenting them different perspectives

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:3
Introduction
 

 

Defining International HRM, Differences between Domestic and International HRM

Applying a strategic view of IHRM, The enduring context of IHRM, Path to global status, Control Mechanisms

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:6
HRP & Training & Development
 

 

Human resource planning in IHRM. – recruitment and selection – issues in staff selection – selection of expatriates.

 

 

Training and development – expatriate training –developing international staff and multinational teams. Training on Diversity and Inclusiveness

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:3
Performance Management & Compensation.
 

Performance management – factors associated with individual performance and appraisal – Criteria used for performance appraisal of international employees – appraisal of host country nationals.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
Expatriation & Repatriation
 

Expat failure – causes for failure. Repatriation – repatriation process. International assignments for local people.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:3
Forging cross-border mergers and acquisitions:
 

 

Examine the varying degrees of success international corporations experience when completing global mergers and acquisitions.

 

 

 

The human and cultural factors, Reasons for failure. The due diligence and planning for successful M&A’s, the importance of the retention of key talent, and how different aspects of the change process need to be managed for a smooth integration.

 

 

Mergers and acquisitions as a source of competitive advantage in the global economy

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:3
International Labour Relations
 

Labour relations – Key issues in international relations – strategic choices before firms – strategic choices before unions – union tactics.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:6
The International Context
 

 

Managing people in an international context – Japan – Europe – US

 

 

 

Ethical Dimensions in IHRM

 

 

Concluding Session

Text Books And Reference Books:

Peter J Dowling & Denice E. Welch, International Human Resource Management,- managing people in  a multinational context,  Cengage learning : 4th edition  2010

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

 

1.     Chris Brewster, Paul Sparrow, Guy Vernon and Elizabeth Houldsworth, International Human Resource Management, CIPD, 3e

 

2.     International Human Resource Management,  K Aswathappa & Sadhna Dash , Tata McGraw hill Publishing Co Ltd., 2010.

 

3.     Gunter K Stahl & Ingmar Bjorkman, Handbook of Research in International Human Resource Management, Edward Elgar Publishing.

Evaluation Pattern
  • CIA 1 - 10% Marks
  • CIA 2 - 25% Marks
  • CIA 3 - 30% Marks (15% One Assignment, 15% Quiz)
  • End Trimester Exam (30% Marks)

MBA6041L - SUSTAINABLE OPERATIONS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course offers a fundamental framework for sustainable operations management and sustainable supply chains. The curriculum provides in-depth knowledge and exposure in the areas of sustainable development, triple bottom line, design of green supply chains and waste management. Students undergoing this course are expected to be the drivers of sustainability in their respective organizations.

The pedagogy is based on case discussions, review of research papers on sustainability, class room discussions and self-study.

 

 

Course Objectives

This course attempts to offer a fundamental framework for sustainable operations management and sustainable supply chains. This will enable students to develop Sustainable operations for production of products and services.

Course Outcome

Learning Outcomes

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Knowledge

  • Acquire an understanding of sustainable development and sustainable business management in general and sustainable operations in particular.

  • Be familiar with current industry practices of sustainable operations and enforcement policies.

  • Understand the challenges of industrial waste management and methods to address this issue.

  • Gives in depth knowledge about problems and issues and enable students to develop strategies which may bring positive change in the Environment.

 Skills

 

  • Equip students to formulate and implement business responses and actions with regard to the triple bottom line, sustainable development and Government policies and enforcement laws on environmental protection and sustainability.

  • Develop, implement and monitor industrial waste management framework and sustainability performance measures in their respective organizations.

  • This will make students to analyze and implement right kind of technique to handle different types of waste such as e waste, organic waste etc..,

 

Attitude

 

  • To be the drivers of sustainable operations in their respective organizations by generating awareness of corporate social responsibility and good stewardship practices as business leaders.

  • It brings belongingness with the society to build a better tomorrow.

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:4
Introduction to Sustainability
 

Definition of sustainable development, triple bottom line, Social, ecological and Economic factors, Conventional vs. sustainable operations, reasons for implementing sustainable operations, drivers and barriers of sustainable operation. Concept of good stewardship practices as business leaders.

 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:4
Design for Sustainability
 

Resource optimization, low-impact materials, Energy efficiency, Design for repair, reuse and recycling, sustainable process development.

 

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:5
Sustainable Supply Chain Management
 

The Ecosystem Framework for Sustainable  Supply Chains, Forward-Backward Supply chains, Re-features in Supply Chain Design (Re use, Recycle, Re-manufacture), Green Procurement, Logistics : Freight Consolidation and mode selection., Risks in sustainable Supply Chain Management; Cradle to Cradle Protocol

 

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:4
Susutainability Performance Measurement
 

Management of Carbon footprints, Energy Management auditing, Performance measures for Business Sustainability.

 

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:5
Waste Management
 

Air pollution control methods and equipment, Waste water treatment, Solid waste management, Hazardous waste management, Cost benefits of waste management, e-waste management. Landfills and incinerators, Metropolitan City Waste Management: Best Practices.

 

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:4
Regulatory Bodies and Certifications for Sustainability
 

OHSAS, ISO 26000, ISO 14001, Pollution control and regulatory agencies – State Level, National Level and International Level.

 

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:4
Current Trends
 

Analysis of Annual Sustainability Reports of Indian as well as Multi National Businesses, Latest trends and research in sustainability, Ethical aspects of Sustainability and development, corporate social responsibility practices, socially responsible businesses.

 *Self Learning Module

Text Books And Reference Books:

 Essential Reading

 1. N. Viswanadham & S. Kameshwaran (2013). Ecosystem-Aware global supply chain

 management. World Scientific Publishing Co. Pte.Ltd.

 2. Paul, T. W.(2013). Waste treatment and disposal. New Delhi:  John Wiley and sons.

 3. Petra Molthan-Hill, (2014). The Business student's guide to sustainable management: principles and practice. Greenleaf Publishing Ltd, UK.

 
 

 Recommended Reading

 1. Beamon, B. M. (2005). Environmental and sustainability ethics in supply chain management. Science and Engineering Ethics, 11(2), 221-234.

 2. Toffel, M. W., & Van Sice, S. (2011). Carbon footprints: methods and calculations. Harvard Business School Technology & Operations Mgt. Unit Case, (611-075).

 3. Bergmiller, G. G., & Mc Cright, P. R. (2009). Parallel models for lean and green operations.In Proceedings of the 2009 Industrial Engineering Research Conference.

 4. Sarkis,J.(2003). A strategic decision framework for green supply chain management.Journal of cleaner production, 11(4), 397-409.

 5. Linton, J. D., Klassen, R., & Jayaraman, V. (2007). Sustainable supply chains: an introduction. Journal of Operations Management, 25(6), 1075-1082.

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Latest articles in the print media and related books

Evaluation Pattern

CIA I   - 10 marks

CIA II  - 25 marks

CIA III - 30 marks

Attendance - 5 marks

End-term exam - 30 marks

MBA6041M - BRAND MANAGEMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

This paper is offered as a marketing elective in the sixth trimester. This course aims to develop conceptual knowledge of branding as part of marketing decision making and to familiarize concepts of developing a brand, manage brand portfolios, brand lifecycles, brand extensions & rebranding decisions.

Course Objective

This course attempts to develop conceptual knowledge of branding as part of marketing decision making and to familiarize varied concepts related to branding.

Course Outcome

After completion of the course the students will be able to:

 

Knowledge

  • Develop a deep understanding of brand management tools and concepts and be prepared for careers in the areas of strategic brand management.
  • Acquire an understanding of real time brand development and re-structuring, focusing on every aspect of branding (identity, objectives, positioning etc).

 

Skills                                                                            

  • Practically diagnose strategic brand management issues for a firm and evaluate a series of potential branding solutions to those issues, arriving at a preferred branding solution that takes account of the solution’s wider implications for marketing and strategy within the firm.
  • Synthesize the elements of the chosen brand management solution into a professional, focused and persuasive pitch presentation  that is effectively communicated and delivered.

Attitude

  • Appreciate and understand the big picture of branding and it’s connect to marketing, organization and society.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:4
Brand Definition and Success
 

Strategic Success and Pioneer advantage, Successful brands, Concept of Market re-definition, Brand success            

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:6
Brand Equity
 

Cost based methods, Price based methods, Customer based brand equity,

Brand asset management strategy

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:8
Brand Identity
 

Brand Identity, The Identity structure, Developing Brand Identity system

Clarifying & elaborating Brand identity system

A strategic process for Building Integrated brands, Brand Vision, Brand Objectives

Choosing brand Elements, Designing & Implementing Branding Strategies

Leveraging Secondary brand knowledge

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:8
Brand extension & Brand Portfolio strategy
 

Types of brand extension, Need for brand extension   Pros & Cons of brand extension

Category of related extensions & unrelated extensions        

Brand portfolio strategy. Creating relevance, differentiation, leverage & clarity

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:4
Brand Personality &Brand Repositioning
 

Importance of Brand Personality Emotion centered definitions   Brand image

Brand Image and country of origin, celebrity, user status,

Positioning and repositioning Relevance to consumers Search for a viable position

Making the brand serious, contemporary   Brand as a differentiator.

Text Books And Reference Books:

1.      Kevin Lane Keller, ‘Strategic Brand Management’2nd Ed; Pearson Education

2.                  2.      .YLR Moorthi, Brand Management, Vikas publishing.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.Jean-Noel Kapferer, ‘Strategic Brand Management’; Kogan Page

2. David A. Aaker,  Building Strong Brands : Simon & Schuster

 

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation Pattern

Mid-term Question Paper Format : Marks 50;  Time: 2 hours

Section A - 10 marks, answer any 4 out of 6 questions (10 x 4= 40 marks)

Section B - 10 marks, case study, compulsory question (10x1= 10 marks)

End-term Question Paper Format: Marks 100; Time: 3 hours

Section A - 20 marks, answer any 4 out of 6 questions (4 x 20= 80 marks)

Section B - 20 marks, case study, compulsory question (1 x 20= 20 marks)

 

Marks Break-up: Marks Pattern

Test/Exam

Marks

Final Award

CIA I 

20 Marks

10 Marks

Mid-trimester Exam

50 Marks

25 Marks

CIA III          

20 Marks        

10 Marks

Attendance    

10 Marks        

5 Marks

End-trimester Exam

100 Marks

50 Marks

Total

200 Marks

100 Marks

 

MBA6042B - ANALYTICS APPLICATIONS IN FUNCTIONAL AREAS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This is a two-credit course offered to the students of Business Analytics. The course demonstrates how analytics as a horizontal can cut across many verticals called domains or functional areas. In this course, students get exposed to applications of analytics in business domains like marketing, finance, Human resources and supply chain. This course also enables students well conversant with domain specific analytical concepts and hands on with data and tools. The objective of this course is to equip students with domain specific analytical skills and develop passion to solve business problems in various domains with the help of statistical models specific to domains. This course attempts to inculcate in the students the ability to conceptualize business problems in statistical terms and to enhance their understanding of statistical data analysis, so as to be able to create an ecosystem for its implementation, and use it for competitive advantage in business organizations.

Course Outcome

At the end of the course, the student should be able to:

 

Knowledge:

  • Understand linkages between business processes and analytics
  • Articulate the usage of business analytics in a variety of functional areas

 

Skills:

  • Create a use case for analytics to solve business problems
  •  

Attitude:

  • Appreciate the importance of analytical in taking effective business decisions

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:3
Analytics in Marketing - Introduction
 

Basics of Marketing Management, High level Framework to understand the marketing function –A context diagram depicting high level process flow and parties involved in marketing function

Key Performance Indicators/Drivers of marketing function, Baseline and Benchmark KPI’s.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:4
Analytics in Marketing - Application
 

Application of analytics in marketing function with regard to market segmentation, customer profiles, market-mix models, customer analytics, customer churn, Recency, Frequency and Monetary analysis, social media and optimization of marketing budget and spend.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:3
Analytics in Finance Introduction
 

Basics of Financial Management, High level Framework to understand the Finance function –A context diagram depicting high level process flow and parties involved in Finance function

Key Performance Indicators/Drivers of Finance function, Baseline and Benchmark KPI’s, Application of analytics in finance function with regard stock market , high frequency trading, sentiments, working capital, ratios, decision making, business valuation and financial fraud

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:4
Analytics in Finance - Application
 

Basics of Financial Management, High level Framework to understand the Finance function –A context diagram depicting high level process flow and parties involved in Finance function

Key Performance Indicators/Drivers of Finance function, Baseline and Benchmark KPI’s, Application of analytics in finance function with regard stock market , high frequency trading, sentiments, working capital, ratios, decision making, business valuation and financial fraud

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:6
Analytics in Operations
 

Introduction.  Use of analytics in Supply Chain management.  Inventory control.  Solving Operations research problems with the help of analytics.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:6
Analytics in Human Resource Management
 

Basics of HR Management, High level Framework to understand the HR function –A context diagram depicting high level process flow and parties involved in HR function, Key Performance Indicators/Drivers of HR function, Baseline and Benchmark KPI’s, Application of analytics in human resource function with regard employee attrition, employee retention, workforce analysis, core and non-core activity analysis, capacity planning and resource optimization, skill analysis using association mining techniques, demand sensing and planning and channel analytics.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:4
Application of Artificial Intelligence in Industries
 

Introduction to Robotics and automation.  Use of Artificial Intelligence (AI) in manufacturing.  Internet of Things (IoT).  AI in logistics.  E-Business with AI tools.

Text Books And Reference Books:

TBD

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

TBD

Evaluation Pattern

Centralized:

CIAI: 10 marks (Research Based Assignment)

CIAII:25 marks Midterm

CIAIII:30 marks

               15 marks: MCQ

               15 marks: Assignment

End Term: 30

Attendance:5

MBA6042H - LATEST TRENDS IN HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

 

This course is designed to help the students to understand the latest HR practices and trends in the industry, giving special attention to the major challenges and the paradigm shift facing today’s HR management

 

The experiential learning method is adopted through discussions/ presentations based on Research articles/ case studies on issues relating to emerging HR trends and practices. Groups and individual presentations will be made by the students.

 

Course Outcome

 

The course is offered as a human resource elective in the second year.

 

·         To develop awareness towards the latest trends and prepare students for careers in the areas of  human resources.

 

·         To develop skills required for handling the current trends in HR practices and understand the requirements of the industry.

 

  • To discuss issues relating to emerging HR trends and practices

 

 

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:5
Learning organization
 

Learning Organization, Meaning, Characteristics, Single-loop learning V/S Double loop learning. Creating a learning organization.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:4
KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT & MANAGING KNOWLEDGE WORKERS
 

Knowledge management meaning, challenges and recent trends, Human Resource Information system

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:3
Psychological contract
 

Psychological contract. Meaning, Importance, Types and managing the psychological contract

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:5
Digital HR
 

SMAC- Social media recruitment, Mobile recruitment Gamification, MOOCs, E – Learning: Challenges and issues Enterprise social network, Digital leadership

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:4
HR ACCOUNTING AND STRATEGIC HRM
 

Human Resource Accounting and Audit: Meaning, process and importance, Green HRM, Acquihiring

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:4
Organizational design and culture
 

Hybrid organizations, Holacracy, Teal organizations, Network of teams, relationship between design and employee engagement

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:5
Workforce diversity
 

 

Managing work force diversity – Challenges and issues- Gender, Age/generation , Skills, LGBT

 

Text Books And Reference Books:

. Compilation of articles /chapters from various books and other resources will be made.

 

1.      Nonaka, I (1991). The knowledge creating company. Harvard Business Review. 69(6), 96-104.

 

2.      Romme, A.G.L., Witteloostuijn, A.V.(1999) . Circular organizing and triple loop learning, Journal of Organizational Change Management, 12 (5), 439 - 454

 

3.      http://keithdwalker.ca/wp-content/summaries/d-f/Fifth%20Discipline.Senge.EBS.pdf

 

4.      Rao, T.V., Juneja, M (2007). Is past performance a good predictor of future potential?Working paper: IIM Ahmedabad.

 

5.      Wellin, M (2007). Managing the Psychological contract.New York: Routeldge Publishing.

 

6.      Krishnan, T. N. (2011). Understanding employment relationship in Indian organizations through the lens of psychological contracts. Employee Relations, 33(5): 551-569.

 

7.      Tandulwadikar,A (2013). Gamifying business to drive employee engagement and business performance.Cognizant reports.

 

8.      http://www.ihmkolkata.org/Study%20Metrials/5th%20SEM/hrd/HUMAN%20RESOURCE%20AUDIT.pdf

 

9.       Smith, C., Turner, S (2015). The Radical Transformation of Diversity and Inclusion TheMillennial Influence. Deloitte University.

 

10.  Inclusivity at the work place: Five principles that enable and empower. NASSCOM Foundation. http://www.dnis.org/Inclusivity_at_workplace_NASSCOM.pdf

 

11.  John Boudreau (2016) Work in the future will fall into these 4 categories

 

https://hbr.org/2016/03/work-in-the-future-will-fall-into-these-4-categories

 

12.  Frank Dobbin and Alexandra Kalev (2017) Training programs and reporting systems won’t end sexual harassment. Promoting more women will. https://hbr.org/2017/11/training-programs-and-reporting-systems-wont-end-sexual-harassment-promoting-more-women-will

 

Case Studies:

 

1.         Ethan S. Bernstein; Paul D. McKinnon; Paul Yarabe (2017).GROW: Using artificial intelligence to screen Intelligence, Boston: Harvard Business Publishing.

 

2.         Gary P. Pisano; Robert D. Austin (2016) SAP SE: Autism at Work, Boston: Harvard Business Publishing.

 

3.         Garvin, D.A &Tahilyani, R (2010). Mindtree: A community of communities, Boston :Harvard Business Publishing.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

 

Mark, Easterby.,Loius, Arajo. (2008). Organizational learning and the learning organization. Sage Publication

 

2.  John, C.Maxwell., (2006).  The 360 leader.Pearson publication.

 

3.  Gupta,R.K. (2003).  Human resource accounting.Anmol Publications.

 

4. Dr. Michael, J. K., & Mohan, T. (2007).Human resources information system.Sage publication.

 

5. Chaudhari,S.(2004).  Effective psychological contract: implications for HR practices.  ICFAI University Publication.

 

6.  Amar, A.D. (2002).  Managing knowledge workers: Unleashing innovation and  productivity.  Quorum books.

 

7.  Pushkala, P.(2002).  Managing the organizational melting pot: dilemmas of workplace diversity, Sage publication.

 

Evaluation Pattern

 

Continuous Internal assessment

 

The course has no mid trimester and end term examination, and evaluation is based on continuous testing using multiple components on conceptual knowledge, understanding and application of skills. The continuous assessment is designed to have six components; learning diary, quizzes, essays, an organized show, a group presentation and peer learning.

 

Component 1: Learning Diary

 

Assignment description:

 

The learning diary has to be consistently maintained and to be submitted for getting it duly signed by the respective faculty monthly twice. It should contain –

 

1.                  Identifying a trending concept, which is to be linked with the module they are dealing as part of the course.

 

2.                  A critical assessment of the similarities and dissimilarities with the existing concepts. For example, critical evaluation of differences and similarities of recruitment and talent acquisition.

 

3.                  Two team presentations will be a part of this course. As part of the CIA, written feedbacks has to be collected from the students after each presentation. The final submission on learning diary should be about each student’s take away from those feedbacks and how it helped them as an individual for the overall growth and development.

 

Each submission can go up to 150 words. The learning diary has to be submitted in the first class of second and third week of the month. Final description on take away from feedbacks collected has to be submitted on 1st week of March.

 

Learning Outcomes:

 

1. To check whether the students have the potential to identify and research the concepts/practices that are trending.

 

2. To ensure the students are up to date with respect to the latest trends in HRM/OB

 

3. To check if the students can comprehend and explain the concepts in a coherent manner in their own words.

 

4. To enable them to introspect and direct those learning to work for their self-directed goal.

 

Evaluation rubrics:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

The students will be appreciated for the originality of the content, conceptual clarity on differences and similarities, reflective explanation and timely submission.

 

Date of submission:

 

Learning diary is to be submitted monthly twice, specifically during the first class of second and fourth week of every month.

 

Component 2: Essay: Methodical research on latest trends in HRM

 

The students are expected to choose a company of their choice and do a thorough research using either secondary or primary data collection methods. Each student should identify a latest practice that is employed in the company of their choice and make a report on the same. The report can range from 2500-3000 words with adequate references. They can refer main stream newspapers, very well-known magazine articles, company websites, annual reports, HR audit reports or A star rated scholarly journal articles (Refer ABDC ranking list of journals) for the secondary data. Primary data can be carried out through interviews, observation records and focus group discussion. The report should have a brief explanation of the innovative HR practice in the company, the context in which it was introduced and its impact.

 

Learning Outcomes:

 

1.      To test whether the student are capable to understand the relevance of innovations in HRM emphasizing on the implications.

 

2.      To make sure the student is good at current affairs and practices.

 

Evaluation rubrics:

 

Criteria

Very good

Good

Average

Below average

Content

In-depth explanation of the practice with good subjective knowledge and the content is original (4)

Includes essential knowledge about the topic. Subject knowledge appears to be good. Originality is adequate(3)

Includes essential information about the topic but there are 1-2 factual errors. (2)

Content is minimal OR there are several factual errors. (1)

Research

Intense research and provision of excellent references. Multiple references are used (4)

Research is adequate and references has been given (3)

Minimal research or incomplete references (2)

Inadequate research; improper and incomplete references (1)

Methods

If mixed methods have been used systematically without errors (4)

If only one method is adopted systematically (3)

One method has been adopted without following systematic procedures (2)

Errors in method adopted and inadequate steps are taken (1)

Organization

If the content is organized with  a story telling flow and if the content is crisp without stalling, highlighting very important points (4)

If the content is adequately organized with stressing important points (3)

If the content is over loaded with insignificant information (2)

If the content does not serve its purpose (1)

 

 

 

Date of submission:

 

15th of February 2018

 

Component 3:

 

Video/Movie/Documentary/Short Film Based Tools: An organized show on “FUTURE OF WORK”

 

The third component is based on HBR article titled “Work in the future will fall into these 4 categories” published in 2016 by John Boudreau in the series “Managing organizations”. The article link is given below;

 

https://hbr.org/2016/03/work-in-the-future-will-fall-into-these-4-categories

 

There are two dominant themes in the article; the driving forces that shape up the future of work and four categories of work in future. Students can be grouped and can take up one category of future work for conducting a one hour organized show to the whole class. Each team has to design a HR practice which is the most appropriate for the chosen category of future work by creating a fictional company. The driving forces can be taken as a support to claim the practicality of the proposed HR practice.

 

The show should be a combination of presentation and a debate. The team can initiate the show with a presentation of the proposed HR practice and how it is appropriate for the chosen category of future work. This is followed by a debate session involving the entire class to criticise the pros and cons of the HR practice proposed. The team that could initiate lot of opinions and discussions in the class will be recognized.

 

Date of presentation

 

The presentations can start from the second week of January, 2018 to February fourth week.

 

Learning outcomes

 

1.      To test the potential of students to foresee the trends, opportunities and challenges of the future and practice innovation to adapt.

 

2.      To enable students to critically evaluate the innovative practices in HRM

 

3.      To test their adequate use of effective verbal and non-verbal techniques when making a presentation

 

4.      To assess the competence of the team to create a discussion and elicit interest among audience while presenting their ideas.

 

5.      To empower students for creating a mass change in the workplace through innovation.

 

 

 

Criteria

Highly Effective

Effective

Improvement necessary

Does not meet standards

Impact

If the show moved the entire audience and could create great impact, thus facilitating discussion. Conclusions were generated (4)

If the show moved the entire audience and could create great impact, thus facilitating discussion. Conclusions were not adequately generated.(3)

If the group could elicit only minimal interest in the audience and facilitate discussion adequately. (2)

If the group could not elicit even minimal interest in the audience and ended with no discussion. (1)

Innovation with research base

Originality of the content with Intense research and provision of excellent references. Multiple references are used to support the proposed solution is workable (4)

Originality of content but the research is minimal but logically workable solution (3)

adequate effort to innovate, following the previous method with no innovation or a solution which is not logically workable(2)

Lack of understanding the problem, thus having a wrong solution (1)

Presentation

Multiple properties and creativity is used to present (4)

Presentation is clear with adequate effort  (3)

Minimal use of presentation skills, and properties (2)

Lack of any supporting properties or creative methods in presentation (1)

Team synergy

If all the team members are equally participating and synergy is created (4)

If team effort is adequate (3)

If at least one team member do not contribute (2)

If only one person dominates in the entire discussion (1)

 

 

 

Component 4: Presentation: Module study

 

 

 

Each group has to identify a peer reviewed journal article/ case study on the concept/module from the course pack and make a presentation on the same. The article has to be prior approved by the faculty. Ensure the article is published very recently (From 2014 onwards) and which belong to ABDC ranking. The presentation should contain

 

1.      A brief explanation of the concept/module being analysed in their own words.

 

2.      Illustration of research findings (both empirical as well as descriptive is allowed) from the research.

 

The presentations will be assessed on their team effort. Hence, demonstration of equal participation is crucial. The team needs to collect a written feedback from students on their presentation.

 

Date of presentation

 

The concept/module will be allocated for each student and schedule will be planned by the faculty. The presentations can start from the second week of January, 2018 to February last week.

 

Learning Outcomes:

 

1.      To examine students’ knowledge of theory and application.

 

2.      To enable students for collaborative work to create value and synergy

 

3.      To check the potential to organize the presentation using the concepts of ordering and determining the central, main and supporting ideas.

 

4.      To gain feedback from peers and the trainer that will identify strengths and areas for improvement.

 

 

 

Evaluation rubrics:

 

Criteria

Highly Effective

Effective

Improvement necessary

Does not meet standards

Content

Subject knowledge is deep and intense research has been done. Critical evaluation of the concept being presented (4)

Subject knowledge is adequate and essential research has been done. Conceptual clarity is adequate.(3)

Minimum effort has been put in understanding the content and minimal level of conceptual clarity. (2)

The presentation content has factual errors and lack of understanding. (1)

Presentation

Multiple properties and creativity is used to present (4)

Presentation is clear with adequate effort  (3)

Minimal use of presentation skills, and properties (2)

Lack of any supporting properties or creative methods in presentation (1)

Team synergy

If all the team members are equally participating and synergy is created (4)

If team effort is adequate (3)

If at least one team member do not contribute (2)

If only one person dominates in the entire discussion (1)

 

 

 

Component 5- Quiz

 

Students will be given two quizzes divided over the 3 months of coursework. The syllabus for the quiz will include reading materials as prescribed in the course pack, and articles chosen for group presentations.

 

Learning Outcomes:

 

1. To test the conceptual understanding of the student

 

2. To test whether the student is able to understand and apply concepts in real business situations

 

Evaluation rubrics:

 

The quizzes will be evaluated based on the answer key prepared by the course instructor.

 

Date of submission:

 

First quiz will be held on 4th week of January 2018

 

Second quiz will be held on 1st week of March 2018

 

Component 6- Peer to peer/group/ team learning: Class participation in debates

 

Students are evaluated consistently by their active participation while debates are being conducted and lecture is scheduled. This component is to ensure peer learning/team learning and to nurture the skill of engaging in group discussions. It is assessed at an individual level by the faculty.

 

Learning outcomes

 

1.      To assure peer learning is happening in the class.

 

2.      To develop the capability to brainstorm and arrive at a conclusion.

 

3.      To enable student to learn from brain storming.

 

4.      To empower students to emphasize their point of view without evaluative apprehension and to avoid production blocking of other members’ ideas.

 

Criteria

Highly Effective

Effective

Improvement necessary

Does not meet standards

Listening

Student actively listens to the class and take notes and actively attempt to process the information collected(4)

Student is adequate in listening and in understanding.(3)

Minimum effort has been put in listening and understanding. (2)

The student is indifferent and shows no presence of mind. (1)

Participation in debates

Student actively participates in debates by contributing their perspectives. High level of knowledge sharing (4)

Student adequately participate without much perspectives/knowledge to share  (3)

Minimal level of participation in knowledge sharing activities (2)

Indifferent with respect to discussion, lack of participation and no contribution to knowledge (1)

Team work

Student facilitates the growth of other class members  while sharing knowledge(4)

Student  adequately participate in team process

Student try to dominate in the discussion without allowing others to come up with their point of view(2)

Always ends up criticizing and putting others down (1)

 

 

 

 

 

Marks break-up:

 

Test/Exam

Marks

Final Award

Component 1:Learning diary

100 Marks (10 marks each)

20 Marks

Component 2: Methodical research on latest trends in HRM

15 Marks

15 Marks

Component 3: Organized show

20 Marks

 20 Marks

Component 4: Module study

20 Marks

20 Marks

Component 5: Quizzes

100 Marks (50 marks each)

10 Marks

Component 6: Class participation in debates

30 Marks

10 Marks

Attendance

--

5 marks

Total

 

100 Marks

 

 

 

MBA631A - LEADERSHIP AND BUSINESS ETHICS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course examines the intersections of the concepts of ethics and leadership from a wide range of disciplines, contexts, and professions. This course will help students to develop as leaders and to prepare them to have a positive influence on others, as well as throughout their lives. Using an interdisciplinary approach, students will deepen and broaden their learning about theories, models, and constructs related to the study and practice of ethics and leadership while examining compelling contemporary questions and dilemmas. In taking decisions, an individual may utilize the ethical values in legal or religious compliance and even in maximizing profits. This course will include experiential learning activities that connect formal knowledge with real world examples. It is offered as a choice based course in the sixth trimester.

•Learn about theories and models of leadership and the role of ethics in these models and theories

•Develop the capacity to think about individual responsibilities and actions in relation to one’s values and ethical principles.

•To understand the link between business ethics and social responsibility

•To sensitize to the nature of ethical issues and ethical dilemmas in corporate world

•To develop a capacity for ethical reasoning and to apply them in organizational contexts.

Course Outcome

Learning Outcomes

At the end of the course students should be able to:

 

Knowledge

•Understand the core concepts of Leadership & Ethics and its impact on individuals, teams and organizations

•Understand the evolution of Leadership and Ethics and their application and relevance in the business environment today

Skill

 

•Observe, reflect upon, and understand the factors that influence ethical and leadership behavior

•Develop a capacity for ethical leadership, and to apply it in the current Organizational and Business context

 

Attitude

•Develop a greater capacity and capability as tomorrow’s ethical employees and leaders

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:3
Introduction to Leadership and Ethics
 

The nature of Leadership and its Participative Nature, Delegation and Empowerment. Normative decisions, Delegation, Guidelines for delegating, perceived empowerment – Nature of psychological empowerment, Consequences of empowerment, Facilitating conditions for empowerment. Concepts and theories of Business Ethics

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:6
Power Influence and Charismatic and Transformational Leadership
 

Concepts of Power and Authority, Influence processes, Power types and sources, Power acquisition via social exchange theory and consequences of Power. Ethical Dilemmas, Ethical Decision Making in Business, Charismatic and YTransformational Leadership

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:6
Early leadership Theories, Leadership in Teams, Developing Leadership Skills and Creating Ethical Leadership
 

Early contingency theories of effective leadership, different leadership Styles, Self-leadership. Team leadership, procedures for facilitating team learning, guidelines for team building, Ethical leadership, gender and leadership, leadership in different cultures, managing diversity.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
Business Ethics, Values and Code of Ethics
 

Nature of Business Ethics and Values, Sources of ethics, Cultutural Experience and Legal System, Factors influencing Business Ethics, Managging code of ethics, Ethics training program

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:6
Functional Areas of Management and Ethics
 

Ethics in HRM – Cash and incentive plans, performance appraisal, employment and privacy issues, restructuring and layoffs, wages empowerment of the weakest.

Ethics in marketing – Process relative ethics, product relative ethics, competition relative ethics

Ethics in finance and accounting –investment decisions, disclosure norms, insider trading norms.

Ethics in production and operations management – Worker safety, product safety, quality, environment and worker’s rights

 

 

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:3
Ethics in Business Discipline
 

Ethics in global business, ethics realted to cultures, Issues related to negotiations in developed countries, Pressure of ethcial convergence and Gender ethics at work

Text Books And Reference Books:

·      A C Fernando, (2013), Business Ethics – An Indian Perspective, New Delhi, Pearson.

·      Yukl, G A (2013). Leadership in Organizations. 7th Edition. Pearson.

·      Daft, R L (2012). Leadership. Cengage Learning.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

·      Hartman Laura P, (2004), Perspectives in Business Ethics, McGraw – Hill International

·      Daniel Albuquerque, (2010), Business Ethics – Principles and Practices, Oxford University Press

·      Joseph W. Weiss, (2009),  Business Ethics – Concepts and Cases, Cengage Learning.

Evaluation Pattern

Test/Exam

Marks

Final Award

CIA I

20 Marks

10 Marks

Mid-trimester Exam

50 Marks

25 Marks

CIA III

20 Marks

10 Marks

Attendance

10 Marks

5 Marks

End-trimester Exam

100 Marks

50 Marks

Total

200 Marks

100 Marks

MBA631B - INNOVATION AND DESIGN THINKING (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

This is a choice based core paper offered in the sixth trimester to students across all specializations. The course focuses on the manager's or leader's role as an innovator and facilitator of innovation by others. Design thinking is a method of applying creativity to come up with novel solutions to tough problems. The second part of the course helps develop an appreciation as well as skills for design thinking.

 

Course Objective

This course attempts to make students understand the different dimensions of innovation e.g. Breakthrough innovation, Reverse innovation, and Open innovation.

Course Outcome

On having completed this course, students should be able to:

 

Knowledge

·       Understand the process of innovation and how it can be nurtured in an organizational setting.

·       Gain experiential knowledge - in this course, much of the learning comes from in-class exercises and discussions.

 

Skills

·       Empathize with the needs and motivations of the end users, come up with a large number of ideas for solving a problem, hone in on the right value proposition, and start to prototype a new offering.

·       Generate ideas for executable business.

 

Attitude

·       Improve their ability to think creatively within the boundaries of what makes economic sense.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:5
Introduction
 

Understanding innovation by looking at how it is defined, various types of innovation, how innovation is measured, theories of innovation, factors influencing innovation in organizations, Innovation and firm size, and research trends in innovation.    

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:4
The design process and business model innovation
 

What is design thinking? The design process and business model innovation. Design research, visualization.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:6
Human-centered design & achieving deep customer understanding
 

Journey mapping, value chain analysis, and mind mapping.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:5
Identifying opportunity areas: Problem framing and definition
 

Brainstorming and rapid concept development, assumption testing, rapid prototyping.    

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:4
Idea generation, concept development and implementation
 

Customer co-creation, learning launches, and story telling.    

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:3
Frugal Innovation
 

Base of the pyramid innovation, managing disruptive innovation.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:3
Organizing for innovation
 

Managing Open innovation, building systematic organizational innovation capabilities.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Please see next section.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Essential Reading

1.     Brown, Tim (2012). Change by Design. Harper Business.

2.     Liedtka, Jeanne M, Ogilvie, Tim. (2011). Designing for growth: A Design thinking toolkit for Managers.  New York: Columbia Business School Publishing.

 

Recommended Reading

1.     Krishnan. Rishikesh T. & Dabholkar, Vinay M, (2013). 8 steps to innovation. HarperCollins Publishers India.

2.     Afuah, Allan (2009). Strategic Innovation: New Game Strategies for Competitive Advantage. Routledge.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA I                                                                                                                           20 Marks

CIA II – Mid Trimester Project                                                                                   50 Marks

CIA III                                                                                                                        20 Marks

Attendance                                                                                                                 10 Marks

End Term – Project                                                                                                    100 Marks

MBA631C - COST ANALYSIS AND MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEMS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description                                                                                     

In this course, the focus shifts to using the cost information of an enterprise for analysis and decision making. While the Financial accounting system provides information, this course helps in developing the analytical ability of the student by using various Managerial accounting methods and techniques. In addition, the student gets to learn about the various Management control aspects that would be required for a manager, in terms of designing, Using and planning control systems to achieve firm’s objectives.

 

 

Course Objective

This course attempts to provide the students with the knowledge of fundamentals of Cost analysis and Management Control systems required for all the managers.   

Level of Knowledge: Basic, Applied / Working    

Course Outcome

Learning Outcomes

By the end of the course, the students should be able to:

 

Knowledge

·       Develop a fundamental knowledge of cost behavior, cost objects and cost classifications.

·       How cost allocations are used to ascertain the cost of cost object.

·       Develop clarity about how cost –volume profit relationship works.

·       Understand the usefulness of cost sheets, budgets and responsibility centers to business.

·       Understand how Transfer pricing mechanism works.

·       How firms use Balance Score Card to manage their business.

 

Skill

·       Evaluate and use cost information for decision making.

·       Prepare budgets and monitor them in a multi-product or service business context.

 

Attitude

·       Appreciate and practice the ethical and social dimensions relevant to cost management in business.

·       Understand the importance of collaborative functioning in diverse teams to achieve the common organizational goal of value creation to all the stakeholders.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:2
Introduction to Cost concepts and classifications
 

Cost, Cost centers, Cost Unit, Method of costing, Techniques of costing, Classification of cost- fixed and variable, Allocation, Apportionment & Absorption, Apportionment of costs to service cost centers, Pre-determined overhead rates.    

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:4
Job and Process Costing Methods
 

Job costing, Process Costing, WIP (Equivalent Production), Normal & abnormal losses, Internal process profits, Joints & by-product costing.    

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:8
Cost Volume Profit Analysis & Variable Costing
 

Common cost behavior patterns- cost estimation method – Breakeven analysis– contribution margin and what if analysis-  multi product analysis -Assumptions in CVP analysis- Variable costing and Full costing- benefits of variable costing for internal reporting purpose- Incremental analysis- make or buy decisions-dropping a product line- qualitative considerations in decision making including ethical dimensions.    

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:4
Cost Allocation and Activity Based Costing
 

Process of cost allocation- traditional product costing systems - problems with cost allocation- activity based costing- Activity based management as a tool to improve efficiency (Self Learning area).    

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:4
Management Control systems
 

Performance evaluation- Revenue centers, Cost centers, Profit center and investment center – Transfer Pricing.    

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:6
Budgetary Planning and Performance analysis
 

Uses of budgets in planning and control (Self Learning area) - developing the budget- The master budget- budgeted balance sheet- static and flexible budgets -  standard costs and budgets- development of standard costs- variance analysis.    

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:2
Special Topics
 

Balanced score card and performance evaluation including Governance adherence - Target costing- Life cycle costing- Total cost of ownership.    

Text Books And Reference Books:

Reference Books

1.  Managerial Accounting - James Jiambalvo 5th ed. Wiley

 

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

2.  Managerial Accounting - Creating Value in a Global Business Environment,  Hilton & Platt, 9th ed. McGraw Hill

3.  Accounting - Text and Cases, Anthony, Hawkings, Merchant 13th ed. McGraw Hill

4. Cost Accounting - A Managerial Emphasis, Horngren, Datar, Rajan 15th ed. Pearson

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation method:

CIA 1: 10% marks - Quizzes, class participation and assignment

CIA 2:  Midterm. - 25% marks

CIA 3: 30% marks - Quizzes, class participation and assignment

End term examination: 30% marks.   

Attendance - 5% 

MBA631D - E-BUSINESS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Objective

This course attempts to enhance the level of practical knowledge about E-Business thereby helping students to appreciate the integral part played by electronic means of doing business.

 

Course Description

The subject enhances the level of practical knowledge about E-Business thereby helping students to appreciate the integral part played by electronic means of doing business. It prepares them to be able to implement digital technologies in business. 

 

Course Outcome

 

Knowledge

·    Understand and identify the scope of  E-Businesses in an economy

·    Understand the obstacles in the implementation of digital technology with its impact on business, society and individuals

·      Identify and understand different technologies and strategies of E-Business

·       Understand e-business implementation through an awareness of SAP ERP

·       Understand to map different models of E-Business for different formats of Businesses

Skills

·         Develop strategies to handle present and future challenges of E-Business

·         Gain to understand and implement digital technologies in business

Attitude

·    Appreciate the role of e-payments, e-security, e-marketing, e-services and cyber laws and Value the interaction as a professional with all the stakeholders’ to develops SOPs

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:4
Electronic Commerce Business Models and Concepts
 

Overview of E-Commerce, Unique features of E Commerce,Types, origins and growth of E Commerce,Electronic Commerce Business models

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:4
Technology Platforms
 

Infrastructural requirements,E-commerce and internet, World Wide Web Wireless and handheld devices,Cloud based e-business

 

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:5
Business Applications
 

Online Retailing,E-SCM, collaborative commerce,online services (Financial services, travel & online career services),E-Governance

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:5
Building an E-Commerce site and Search Optimization
 

Systematic approach to building an EC web site, Choosing Spftware tools, hardware for EC, Search engine marketing (SEM) and Search Engine Optimization (SEO)

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:6
Introduction to Mobile Technologies and M-Commerce
 

Introduction - Infrastructure of M-Commerce -  Types of Mobile Cpmmerce Services - Technologies of Wireless Business - Benefits and Limitations, Support, Mobile Marketing & Advertisement, Non-Internet applications in M-Commerce - Wireless / Wired Commerce comparisons.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:3
Social Media and Networks-based Business models
 

Social media applications for E-Business,Social media analytics, Networks and Platform-based Business Models.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:3
Ethical and legal issues
 

E-Commerce and ethics, Privacy regulations and information rights - Indian and global perspectives, Greening the E-Business Supply Chain.

Text Books And Reference Books:

1.       P T Joseph S J, E-Commerce: An Indian Perspective. Fourth Edn,

2.       India: Prentice -Hall Of India Pvt. Ltd. Publications.

3.       Schneider Gary P., Electronic Commerce. Fifth Edn, USA: Thomson - Course Technology Publications.

4.       Bhasker Bharat, Electronic Commerce Framework. Technologies and Applications. Third Edition, India: Tata McGraw Hill Co. Ltd. Publications.

5.       Schneir Bruce and Ferguson Neils., Practical Cryptography.  Wiley- Dreamtech India Private Ltd. Publications.

6.       Awad Elias M., Electronic Commerce”, From Vision to Fulfillment.  PHI Publications.

7.       Rayport Jeffrey F and Jawoski Bernard J., Introduction to E-Commerce.

8.   Kalakota Ravi B and Whinston Andrew B., Latest, Frontiers of Electronic Commerce.   USA: Addison Wesley Publications.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Laudon, Kenneth. C., &Traver, Carol. Guercio.E-commerce- business. Technology Society(10th ed.) India: Pearson Education.

Latest articles,white papers and research papers.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA I  - 10 marks

CIA II - 25 marks

CIA III - 30 marks

End-term exam - 30 marks

Attendance - 5 marks

 

MBA642AF - INSURANCE (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

This is a Finance elective course. The course offers basic knowledge about the uniqueness of the Insurance business.  It enables the participants to understand the multi disciplinary functions of an Insurance organization.  The course creates the interest among the participants in the legal / regulatory aspects of the insurance business and in the emerging areas like Underwriting, Actuarial, and Loss assessment.

 Course Objective

This course attempts to enable the participants to understand the multi disciplinary functions of an Insurance organization.    

Course Outcome

Learning Outcomes

By the end of the course, the students should be able to:

Knowledge

  • Develop the knowledge of various aspects of risk management through life and non-life insurance products including their structure.
  • Understand Insurance management.
  • Understand the developments in the Insurance industry

Skill

  • To manage risk.

Attitude

  • Appreciate and practice the ethical and social dimensions relevant to Insurance industry, particularly while selling insurance products.
  • Display confidence in taking risk and insurance related matters at the tactical as well as strategic level.    

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:3
Introduction and Overview
 

Define risk from an insurance perspective, Understand uncertainty and risk, Degree of risk, Perils & Hazards, Categories of risks from an insurance perspective pure Vs speculative risk, fundamental Vs particular risk, Types of insurance, Risk Management approaches.      

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:7
Key Insurance Concepts
 

The insurance mechanism, What is Insurance? Place in financial system – concept & role, purpose & need, social security, role in economic development, Insurable risks, Self & Social Insurance, Fundamental Principles – Indemnity, Insurable interest, Actual Cash Value (ACV), Subrogation, Personal Contract, Conditional Contract, Contract of Adhesion, Aleatory Contract,  Contract of Utmost Good Faith, Misrepresentation, Warranties, Concealment, Waiver & Estoppel, Parole Evidence, Reasonable Expectations, Contribution, Proximate Cause, Vicarious Liability, Assignment. 

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:7
Life Insurance Products
 

Life Insurance contracts not contracts of indemnity, Types of Life Insurance covers – Term, Variable, Adjustable, Participating, Non Participating, Life Insurance Products –Term, Endowment, Money back, Unit linked, Annuities, Standard Life Insurance Clauses and Riders, Free Look Up Period, Grace Period, Treatment of Suicides. 

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:7
Non Life Insurance Products
 

Non Life insurance products – Fire, Health, Motor Vehicle -third party – personal accident, Liability - Employers’ liability, Public Liability linked to other types of insurance such as property, vehicle etc., Product Liability, Professional Indemnity. Property damage: residential building, moveable property, commercial building, land vehicles, marine craft and aircraft. Financial Loss: Pecuniary loss, Fidelity guarantee, Business interruption cover (consequential loss). 

Reinsurance: Proportional Reinsurance - Quota Share, Surplus, Non-Proportional Reinsurance - Excess of loss, Stop loss.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:2
Underwriting
 

Underwriting and Actuarial Framework: Basics of underwriting in Life Insurance,  Rate Making, Gross Rates, Mortality, Interest, Loading, Annual Premium, Net Single Premium, Level Premium, Concept of Reserves, Types of Rates, Importance of Actuarial Framework in Insurance (scope and basic application); Premiums and Product Pricing (basic difference in Life and General Management Insurance methodology); Asset Liability Management (basic difference between General Management and Life insurance); Valuations of Insurance company and solvency.

Process, Documents  & Premiums - Proposal – policy – renewals – claims – endorsements – premium calculations  - benefits - Underwriting - Rating risk – premium fixing.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:2
Indian Insurance Market & Regulations
 

History of Insurance industry, Role of LIC and GIC, Insurance market now in India, Role of Private life insurance companies in India, Private Non Life Insurance companies in India, Private Reinsurance companies in India, FDI Norms in the Insurance Industry, Where is the Insurance Industry headed?

History of Insurance Regulations in India, Insurance Laws now in force, IRDA, TAC, Ombudsman, Deposit and Investment norms that life, non life and reinsurers must adhere to. 

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:2
Financial Planning
 

Financial Planning - Needs analysis, Life cycle planning, HLV, Mapping of needs to choice of Insurance products, Review of Insurance cover.

Need for socially relevant and ethical insurance advisory. Whither insurance agent? Role of Micro insurance in inclusive industry growth. Government the direct insurer? 

UNIT 8
Teaching Hours:3
 
Regulations

Level of Knowledge: Conceptual and Working Regulations - Insurance acts ? code of conduct ? agents ? agency law ? commission structure - Advisors - Role ? functions ? requirements ? sales ? key success factors

Text Books And Reference Books:

Essential Reading

Vaughan, E. J., & Vaughan, T. (2012). Fundamentals of risk & insurance (9th ed.). Wiley India.    

    

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Recommended Reading

1.     Life Insurance – IC 33 – Insurance Institute of India

2.     Non Life Insurance – IC 34 - Insurance Institute of India – select chapters

3.     George, R. E. (2008).  Principles of risk management and insurance  (10th ed.). Pearson Addison Wesley.

4.   The Actuary India Magazine from the Institute of Actuaries of India.

 

Websites:

Insurance companies in India    

Evaluation Pattern

Non-exam based course and evaluation through projects and assignements

MBA642AL - BUSINESS ANALYSIS - II (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

The purpose of this course is to provide the students with a deep understanding of the approach, tools, techniques and best practices required to facilitate definition of stakeholders, Requirements for IT solutions to business problems.

 Course Objectives

This course attempts to provide the students with a deep understanding of the approach, tools, technique and best practices required to facilitate definition of stakeholders, Requirements for IT solutions to business problems.

Course Outcome

At the end of the course, students should be able to:

 Knowledge:

·         Learn how to define the scope of the solution using visual modeling technique called scope modeling.

·         Understand business processes, their modeling, analysis and design

·         Understand the nuances involved in eliciting stakeholder vs. solution requirements.

·         Understand the information to be maintained using the business domain modeling technique

 Skill:

·           Polish their presentation skills for stakeholder and team interactions

·           Develop Written business communication

·            Develop Visual thinking and representation skills

Attitude:

·         Interact as an IT professional with stakeholders and team members at all levels

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:5
Scope modelling
 

Introduction, distinguish from project scope. Concepts- Actors, System, Sub system, External system. Developing level 1 and 2 Distinguish Context vs. Architecture diagram.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:5
Case modelling and Business Domain modelling
 

Use case modelling: Use Case overview - modeling principles and relationships

Business Domain Modelling – basic and advanced principles

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:5
Use case specification
 

Use case specification Structure, 4D Approach, Basic Validation, Capturing –Assumptions, Interface requirements, and dependencies

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:5
Business rules and User experience principles
 

Rationale for Business Rules*, Structural and Operative Business rules, wording Business rules, Embedding Business rules. User experience Principles- User persona, wireframes/prototypes, user experience in use case specification

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:5
Non functional requirements and requirement analysis
 

Non functional requirements: definition, types, practices in eliciting NFR.

Requirement Analysis: Organizing a requirements repository, requirements verification, validation, Documenting User stories

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:3
Requirement management and Planning
 

Requirements Management and planning**- traceability matrix, change management and impact analysis, requirements transition, Managing issues/clarifications.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:2
Current Trends
 

Trends in Business Analysis, Requirements Engineering, Digital transformation, SEMAT

.

Text Books And Reference Books:

1. IIBA (2015)..A Guide to the Business Analysis Body of Knowledge Version 3.0 (BABOK Guide, Version 3.0)

2. Wirgers K., and Beatty J.(2013). Software Requirements., 3rd ed.) Microsoft Press.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.       Hull, E., Jackson, K.., and Dick, J. (2011) Requirements Engineering. (3rd ed.) Springer.

2.       Carkenord, B.A.. (2009) Seven steps to mastering business analysis. Cengage.

3.       Leffingwell, D., Widrig, D. (2003). Managing Software Requirements. (2nd ed.) Pearson.

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation for the project-based course:

Objective test + Assignment / Presentation - 20 marks (converted to 10 marks)

Interim Project - 50 marks (converted to 25 marks)

Research-based assingment + Class participation - 20 marks (converted to 10 marks)

Final Project - 100 marks (converted to 50 marks)

Attendnace - 5 marks

 

MBA642AM - DIGITIAL MARKETING (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Developing a successful digital marketing strategy and implementation is both an art and science. It involves in-depth knowledge of dynamics of new media (Social Media, Mobile) and utilizing the right resources and marketing skills to design and launch successful customer engagement campaigns. Digital Marketing course has been designed to help students to understand both functional and management roles required to plan and execute effective Digital Marketing campaigns. The course also helps students gain an insight how to plan and implement Digital Marketing initiatives

This course attempts to help students to understand both functional and management roles required to plan and execute effective Digital Marketing campaigns.

Course Outcome

  • After completion of the course the students will be able to:

     

    Knowledge

    • Understand the growing importance of consumption and communication of value on digital platforms
    • Learn  digital and social media marketing goals, plan campaigns/ projects, assign resources, implement and measure effectiveness/ROI

    Skills

    • Effectively design and manage  digital campaigns
    • Use Google Adwords, Facebook ads, Blog and other platforms

     

    Attitude

    • Appreciate the significance  of digital media in marketing strategy

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:5
Marketing in the Digital Era
 

The virtual world and the changing marketing landscape; Web and the new corporation, Online Marketing Domains, The Behavioural Internet and Behavioural Targeting; Digital marketing optimization.

 Ethical Challenges: Frauds on the Web, Data and Identity Theft, Issue of Privacy

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:8
The Online Marketing Mix and the Online Consumer
 

Creating customer value in an Online World- Segmentation (different methods in the virtual space), Popularity of brand pages, Consumer psychographic profiles; Targeting – Consumer targeting, online targeting, deterministic targeting, predictive behavioural and non-deterministic; Positioning Online, E-price, E-promotion; Digitization and Implications to Online marketing mix decisions; Emerging consumer segments in India.

The Digital Ecosystem, Online Consumer Behaviour, Models of website visits, Behavioural targeting vs. contextual targeting; New Online Consumers

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:8
Business Drivers in the Virtual World
 

Social Media – The Social Media Model by McKinsey, Marketing with Networks, The Social World, Social Media Tools and Analytics; Viral Marketing, Social Curation and Brands, Inbound Marketing and Co-creation

Online Branding – The Digital Brand ecosystem, Brand experience, Using consumer brand knowledge and consumer brand emotion to develop consumer engagement; brand customer centricity and consumer brand emotion

Traffic Building – The Diamond-water Paradox; Internet Traffic Plan, Search marketing Methods for Traffic building, Traffic Volume and Quality; SE Marketing; Site Optimization; Keyword Advertising, Value and Portfolio Evaluation; Internet Marketing Metrics; Website and Internet Marketing

 Web Business Models – Customer-centric Web Business Models; Web Chain of Events, Web Chain Analysis; Business Models and Revenue Benefits; Price effects in Online Domain; Role of Internet in Impacting Consumer Price Sensitivity

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
Online Tools for Marketing
 

Engagement Marketing; Social Plugins and their contribution to Marketing; Building consumer engagement through content management; finding top loyalty drivers

Online Campaign Management; Campaign Management using Facebook, Twitter, Corporate Blogs; Tagging and Folksonomies, Sentiment Mining, Measuring Campaign Effectiveness

Consumer-generated Media, Opinion Leaders and Consumer Behaviour; Peer Reviews, Word of Mouth, and the Dissatisfied Customer; Sales and Power of Influence; Mining Consumer-generated Media

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:3
Contemporary Digital Revolution
 

Online Communities and Co-creation: Co-creation communities;

Eight Different versions of Facebook; The Anatomy of Facebook, Netiquette, The Impact of a Facebook Fan, Brand Post Popularity

Gamification and Game-based Marketing; Consumer Motivation for Playing Online Games; Consumer Brand Affinity  Spectrum; The Anatomy of Gamification; Use of Games as Marketing Tools; The World of Apps and the Indian Diaspora

Text Books And Reference Books:

  • 1)       Evans. D. & Bratton, S. (2008).  Social Media Marketing: An Hour a Day (2nded.). Wiley.

    2)       Ryan, D. & Jones, C. (2012). Understanding digital marketing: Marketing strategies for engaging the digital generation. Kogan Page.

    3)      Teixeira, J. (2010). Your Google Game Plan for Success: Increasing Your Web Presence with Google AdWords, Analytics and Website Optimizer. Wiley.

    4)       Paul M. Rand, Harnessing the Power of Word of Mouth and Social Media to Build your Brand and your Business, (2013)McGraw Hill

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

  • Ahuja, V. (2015). Digital Marketing. New Delhi: Oxford University Press.

Evaluation Pattern

The evaluation is based on a team project and individual assessment.

The team projects require students to undertake digital marketing campaigns for chosen companies. The teams are expected to use the various digital media based on the requirements of the company. The evaluation is divided into four phases of the project spread across the trimester and the breakup of tasks.

 

The individual assessment is based on student participation and learning in the case study discussions. 

MBA642BL - INTERNATIONAL LOGISTICS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course description

This paper offers a extensive coverage of the logistics infrastructure of India's foreign trade system. Beginning with an overview of India's trade scenario, it also provides an in-depth discussion on the factors affecting the choice of mode of transport, information and order processing in trade logistics, functions of packing and packaging, labelling and marking, inventory, and warehouse management, unitization, palletization, and stowing of cargo. Knowledge about India’s transport infrastructure, ocean transportation, India shipping and the documentation practices.

Level of Knowledge

Students should have basic knowledge of Supply chain Management.  They should have undergone course dealing with fundamentals of MIS and operations management.

Course Objective

This course attempts to offer an extensive coverage of the logistics infrastructure of India's foreign trade system and provide students concepts and practices related to International Logistics. This will enable students to nurture their career in the Logistics area.

 

Course Outcome

At the end of the course, students should be able to:

Knowledge

·         Get exposure to the requirements and concepts of International Logistics.

·         Learn the concepts of Logistics for International trade, warehouse management and additional value added services that Logistics players can offer the customers.

·         GainKnowledge about International Logistics options - Ocean transportation, Air, Land and multi-modal logistics options.

·         Gain Knowledge about documentation practices and India’s transport  Infrastructure

 

Skill

·         Develop the students in the area of International Logistics that enable students to work out the best logistics solution for any given requirements.

·         Acquire skill to manage logistics operations and value added services.

 

Attitude

·         Develop Confidence to take up jobs in the area of International Logistics

·         Develop complete understanding of documents required to do the Logistics operations both for domestic and International trade.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:3
Introduction
 

Introduction to International Trade Logistics, Integrated Logistics and Sub-system Elements



Unit-2
Teaching Hours:4
Transport and packaging
 

Choice of Mode of Transport, Information and Order Processing,  Packing and Packaging,   Labelling and Marking in International Logistics

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:4
Inventory Management and warehousing in logistics
 

Inventory Management in Trade Logistics, Warehousing Unitization, Palletization, and Stowing of Cargo

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:4
India ?s transport Infrastructure and containerization
 

Role of Dry Ports in Trade Logistics, Incorporating Shipping Terms India's Transport Infrastructure,  Air Transport,  Ocean Transportation Containerization in Trade Logistics,   Multimodal Transportation

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:4
Shipping practices , Freighting principles and clauses
 

Liner Shipping and Freighting Practices,   Tramp Shipping and Chartering Clauses
Freighting Principles and Practices in Trade Logistics

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:5
Documentation , Risks and Insurance
 

Documentation in Trade Logistics,   Risks in International Trade Logistics
Cargo Insurance and Claim Procedure, Understanding and Preventing Maritime Frau
Role of Intermediaries in Trade Logistics

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:6
Current Trends: Green logistics and Reverse logistics
 

Green Logistics, Reverse Logistics, Commercial Incotex, vehicle routing and scheduling(models),International Transportation - Defn, concept & importance include transportation cost structure, Ethical aspects of Logistics and Documentation

Text Books And Reference Books:

International Trade Logistics   By Ram Singh,  Oxford  Higher  education

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

International Trade Logistics   By Ram Singh,  Oxford  Higher  education

 

Evaluation Pattern

CIA I  - 10 marks

 

CIA II - 25 marks 

 

CIA III - 30 marks

 

Attendance - 5 marks

 

End-term exam - 30 marks

MBA642BM - CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:6
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course description:

CRM: This paper is offered as an elective course in marketing in the sixth trimester. Students will be able to understand various aspects of customer relationships. This course aims to provide students with the knowledge of the fundamental aspects of developing and managing customer relationships. The course builds on the foundation of the core Marketing Management course by introducing students to the concepts and tools used for developing and implementing CRM programs. It will help them appreciate the strategic role of CRM that leverages technological tools to improve business performance.

 

Course Outcome

Learning Outcomes:

After completion of the course the students will be able to:

 

Knowledge

· Acquire an understanding of the concept and meaning of customer relationship, the relationship process and various models of customer value and satisfaction.

 

Skills

· Demonstrate an understanding of the principles and practices of customer relationship management for building effective organization – customer relationship continuum.

Attitude

· Develop a positive customer relationship attitude and be prepared for careers in the areas of customer facing roles. 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:3
Unit I Concepts and Context of CRM & Understanding Customers
 

Definitions, Evolution, Transactional Vs Relationship Approach, CRM as a strategic marketing tool, CRM significance to the stakeholders, B2B, B2C and services context for CRM, Models of CRM.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:7
Unit II Managing Customer Relationships
 

Understanding relationships, Customer Lifetime value- goals and measurement , Managing the customer Lifecycle-Customer acquisition and customer retention, customer portfolio management, managing customer experience-Customer journey, Moments of truth, channel experience ,  Customer co-creation.

 

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:7
Unit III Technological tools for CRM
 

 

Sales force Automation, Marketing Automation, Services Automation, Supplier Relationship Management (SRM), Mobile CRM.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:7
Unit IV Analytical CRM
 

Developing customer related database, Analytics of structured and unstructured data, Analytics throughout the customer lifecycle-segmentation, propensity, sequences and buyer journey, Customer tracking, Privacy and ethical issues.

 

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:6
Unit V Implementing CRM
 

CRM implementation process, CRM project management, implementation issues, trends in CRM

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:6
Unit V Implementing CRM
 

CRM implementation process, CRM project management, implementation issues, trends in CRM

Text Books And Reference Books:

Buttle F., (2009) Customer Relationship Management: Concepts &Technologies, New Delhi, Reed Elsevier.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1. G. Shainesh & Jagdish Sheth (2006) Customer Relationship Management A Strategic Perspective, Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd.

2. Wincaid, J. (2007), Customer Relationship Management, Pearson Education Publications.

3. Kumar A, Sinha C, Sharma R (2007), Customer Relationship Management: Concepts & Application, Biztantra

 

Evaluation Pattern
Evaluation Pattern
 

Evaluation Pattern

Marks Break up

Out of

Weight

Attendance

Total

CIA-I

20

10

0

 

10

 

CIA-II MID TERM

50

25

0

25

CIA-III (MCQ – 15 MARKS & ASSIGNMENT – 15 MARKS)

30

30

0

30

END TERM

50

30

5

35

 

 

 

TOTAL

100

 

MBA642CF - FINANCIAL ENGINEERING (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

This course deals with the application aspects related to structured products (PE, REIT, Venture Capital, Notes, Reverse Mortgage and Estate Planning) in the area of investment finance. This course has been decided and constructed on specific demand from large financial conglomerates, keeping the knowledge of complex financial structure and their operation in mind. Management students, who will be working in these areas, in the dynamic global scenario will find it fairly industry centric and in-depth course at the same time.

Course Objective

This course attempts to understand the process and techniques of structured products and their varied implications in the area of investment finance as a whole.

Course Outcome

Learning Outcomes

By the end of the course, the students should be able to:

Knowledge

ü  Understand the process and techniques of structured products and their varied implications in finance domain.

ü  Understand the ethical components of the same in the financial service industry.

 

Skills

ü  Develop proficiency of modeling of various complex financial models according to the requirement of the situation faced.

ü  Develop unbiased data observational and result interpretation skills.

Attitude

ü  Develop an attitude that allows out of box thinking.

ü  Develop an unbiased interpretation of outcomes and results.

ü  Appreciate the ethical and social dimensions of decision making using analytics in the realm of finance and its related areas.

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:3
Financial Engineering Basics
 

Concept of Financial Engineering by deploying customized and Special Structures, Concept of Private Placements

Linking social, ethical and varied product ranges (offered mostly as private placements)

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:3
Gap Guarantee, Regulatory aspects
 

Risk Aspects of Financial Engineering, Concept of Gap Guarantee, Regulatory aspects

Proficiency in Model development and customization to requirements

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:6
Investment Banking
 

Difference between Retail and Private and Investment Banks and the requirement of Structures, Constant Proportion Portfolio Insurance, Reverse Mortgage, Estate Planning

Proficiency in Model development and customization to requirements

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:6
CPPI, Reverse Mortgage, Estate Planning
 

Difference between Retail and Private and Investment Banks and the requirement of Structures, Constant Proportion Portfolio Insurance, Reverse Mortgage, Estate Planning

Proficiency in Model development and customization to requirements

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
Efficient Multi Asset Portfolio
 

Efficient Multi Asset Portfolios, Nifty Linked Debentures (with fixed coupon and without fixed coupon)

Proficiency in Model development and customization to requirements

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
Nifty Linked Debentures or NLD
 

Efficient Multi Asset Portfolios, Nifty Linked Debentures (with fixed coupon and without fixed coupon)

Proficiency in Model development and customization to requirements

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:6
IRS,LBO applications
 

Mezzanine Debt Structures, Interest Rate SWAP structures, LBO structures, Structured

Proficiency in Model development and customization to requirements

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:6
Mezz Debt Applications
 

Mezzanine Debt Structures, Interest Rate SWAP structures, LBO structures, Structured

Proficiency in Model development and customization to requirements

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:3
Real Estate Investment Trust
 

Real Estate Investment Trust

Structuring, functioning and model building as per specifications

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:3
Private Equity and Real Estate Private Equity Funds
 

Private Equity and Real Estate Private Equity Funds

Structuring, functioning and construction as per specifications

Text Books And Reference Books:

Essential Reading

 

[1] Reverse Mortgage https://www.linkedin.com/pulse/reverse-mortgage-all-u-wanted-know-itadvisable-manju-mastakar?trk=hp-feed-article-title-like

[2] CPPI http://www.deltaquants.com/Introduction-to-risks-in-CPPI-products

[3] GAP http://www.protectiveassetprotection.com/Products/GAP.aspx

[4] Estate Planning http://www.mondaq.com/unitedstates/x/461262/wills+intestacy+estate+planning/A+Guide+To+Estate+Planning

[5] EMAP (AAP) http://www.benchmarkfunds.com/gs/Documents/DisclosureDocument.pdf

[6] NLD http://www.kotaksecurities.com/pdf/pdfs/productnote-kmp-n011-36.pdf

[7] MEZZ http://mediaedge.imirus.com/Mpowered/book/vprivcap12/i3/p10

[8] Interest Rate SWAP http://www.actuariesindia.org/%28S%28cghcfxfmeyh5t455345eltup%29%29/IFS/21IFS/ppt/ApplicationofinterestrateswapsinIndianInsuranceIndustry_Group7.pdf

[9] LBO http://www.edupristine.com/blog/dells-leveraged-buyout-real-life-case-study

[10] Structured Obligation http://www.icra.in/rating.aspx?ck=Al1zZU0jCxnnNzwL5uegvxOYYCGmewlEnrkTRw4W72jzuSJw1FnjS90119011P3SITT9J2f/6H54LKNQ3248HCfA5EFK7c/vYiBbpgUU6xfTtaxAT0xZcfZljWNP8cwZQ4XG1p0

[11] REIT https://www.reit.com/

[12] Private Equity http://www.interviewprivateequity.com/what-do-private-equity-investors-do/

[13] Regulatory Impact http://www.telegraph.co.uk/finance/rate-swap-scandal/12115125/Interest-rate-mis-selling-under-the-spotlight-in-judicial-review.html

[14] Private Wealth Management: The Complete Reference for the Personal Financial Planner, Ninth Edition (McGraw-Hill, 2015) G. Victor Hallman and Jerry S. Rosenbloom, both affiliated with the Wharton Business School

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Essential Reading

 

[1] Reverse Mortgage https://www.linkedin.com/pulse/reverse-mortgage-all-u-wanted-know-itadvisable-manju-mastakar?trk=hp-feed-article-title-like

[2] CPPI http://www.deltaquants.com/Introduction-to-risks-in-CPPI-products

[3] GAP http://www.protectiveassetprotection.com/Products/GAP.aspx

[4] Estate Planning http://www.mondaq.com/unitedstates/x/461262/wills+intestacy+estate+planning/A+Guide+To+Estate+Planning

[5] EMAP (AAP) http://www.benchmarkfunds.com/gs/Documents/DisclosureDocument.pdf

[6] NLD http://www.kotaksecurities.com/pdf/pdfs/productnote-kmp-n011-36.pdf

[7] MEZZ http://mediaedge.imirus.com/Mpowered/book/vprivcap12/i3/p10

[8] Interest Rate SWAP http://www.actuariesindia.org/%28S%28cghcfxfmeyh5t455345eltup%29%29/IFS/21IFS/ppt/ApplicationofinterestrateswapsinIndianInsuranceIndustry_Group7.pdf

[9] LBO http://www.edupristine.com/blog/dells-leveraged-buyout-real-life-case-study

[10] Structured Obligation http://www.icra.in/rating.aspx?ck=Al1zZU0jCxnnNzwL5uegvxOYYCGmewlEnrkTRw4W72jzuSJw1FnjS90119011P3SITT9J2f/6H54LKNQ3248HCfA5EFK7c/vYiBbpgUU6xfTtaxAT0xZcfZljWNP8cwZQ4XG1p0

[11] REIT https://www.reit.com/

[12] Private Equity http://www.interviewprivateequity.com/what-do-private-equity-investors-do/

[13] Regulatory Impact http://www.telegraph.co.uk/finance/rate-swap-scandal/12115125/Interest-rate-mis-selling-under-the-spotlight-in-judicial-review.html

[14] Private Wealth Management: The Complete Reference for the Personal Financial Planner, Ninth Edition (McGraw-Hill, 2015) G. Victor Hallman and Jerry S. Rosenbloom, both affiliated with the Wharton Business School

Evaluation Pattern

Assesment Details

 

Rubrics for Evaluation

Project based evaluation

 

 

MBA642DF - BEHAVIORAL FINANCE (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

This course seeks to provide comprehensive knowledge to the students about irrational investor behavior and about how to create individual investor portfolios that account for their irrational behaviour. This course will also help students become more introspective about their own behaviour and enable them to create a portfolio that works best for themselves.

Course Objective

This course seeks to provide comprehensive knowledge to the students about irrational investor behavior and how to create individual investor portfolios that account for their irrational behaviour.

Course Outcome

By the end of the course, the students should be able to:

Knowledge

·       Understand different behavioural biases exhibited by investors.

·       Develop client portfolios that take into account these behavioural biases.

·       Understand why clients make the decisions that they do and whether their behaviour needs to be modified or adapted.

·       Review work done by some of the key people who have shaped the current body of behavioural finance thinking.

Skill

·       Be able to design portfolios for different clients after taking their behavioural biases into account.

Attitude

·       Understand the importance of taking behavioural biases into account while designing portfolios for different clients.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:3
Introduction to Behavioural Finance
 

What is Behavioural Finance? – The Big Picture, Standard Finance v/s Behavioural Finance, The Role of Behavioural Finance in Creating a Successful Advisory Relationship; The History of Behavioural Finance – Historical Perspective on the link between Psychology and Economics, Modern Behavioural Finance, Psychographic Models used in Behavioural Finance; Introduction to Behavioural Biases – Definition and Categorisation, Differences between Cognitive and Emotional Biases.

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:6
Belief Perseverance Bias
 

Cognitive Dissonance Bias, Conservatism Bias, Confirmation Bias, Representativeness Bias, Illusion of Control Bias, Hindsight Bias – Description, Practical Application, Research Review, Diagnostic testing and Advice.

 

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:7
Information Processing and Biases
 

Mental Accounting Bias, Anchoring and Adjustment Bias, Framing Bias, Availability Bias, Self-Attribution Bias, Outcome Bias, Recency Bias - Description, Practical Application, Research Review, Diagnostic Testing and Advice.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:7
Emotional Biases
 

Loss Aversion Bias, Overconfidence Bias, Self-Control Bias, Status Quo Bias, Endowment Bias, Regret Aversion Bias, Affinity Bias - Description, Practical Application, Research Review, Diagnostic Testing and Advice.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:4
Application of Behavioral Finance to Asset Allocation and Case Studies
 

Application of Behavioural Finance to Asset Allocation, Best Practical Allocation, Guidelines for Determining Best Practical Asset Allocation, Investment Policy and Asset Allocation, Case Studies.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:3
Behavioural Investor Types
 

Behavioural Investor Type Diagnostic Process, Background of the Development of Behavioural Investor Types, Psychographic Models of Investor Behaviour, Early Psychographic Models, The Behavioural Alpha Process – A Top-Down Approach, Behavioural Investor Types – Preserver, Follower, Independent, Accumulator.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Michael M Pompian, Behavioural Finance and Wealth Management, Wiley Finance.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.      Daniel Kahneman, Thinking, Fast and Slow, Penguin Books.

2.      Hersh Shefrin, Beyond Greed and Fear, Oxford University Press.

Evaluation Pattern

CIA I - 20%

CIA III - 30%

Attendance - 5%

Mid-term Exam - 25%

Final Exam - 25%

MBA645A - CUSTOMER CENTRICITY (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:6
No of Lecture Hours/Week:30
Max Marks:3
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This is a course that is offered to engage participants in developing meaningful perspective on the significance of identifying customer as a stakeholder while taking business decisions. The course employs a cross-functional approach by exploring how principles and ideas of marketing could be effectively used in the conduct of varied functional decisions in business such as human resources, research and development, mobilizing capital from the investment markets.

The course adopts a participant centered learning approach where the content is largely driven through engaging discussions on case studies, concepts and observable applications of concepts in business situations. Participants are required to be prepared to read materials suggested by the course anchor and make subsequent presentations to the peer group.

The competence of participants is evaluation using diverse approaches- case study analysis and presentation, business simulation games and a term paper. This course offers 3 credits.

Course Outcome

On completion of the course, participants will be able to;

Knowledge;

1.      Appreciate cross-disciplinary nature of marketing decisions

2.      Demonstrate deeper understanding of application of marketing principles in a variety of business decisions

Skills;

3.      Chart out the various customer engagement initiatives to be taken by managers of various functions in business

4.      Create a customer centric decision plan for business at the strategic level

Attitude;

5.      Develop sensitization towards the significance of customers’ role in key business decisions

6.      Develop a multi-dimensional perspective on business with customer as the primary stakeholder

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:10
Serving the Customer
 

Solution selling for strategic segments, reducing customer risk & cost & increasing revenues through solution selling;

Pricing – issues & challenges for different strategic segments;

Emergence of retail power & the influence on pricing.

 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:5
Understanding the Customer
 

Brand as a strategic asset, meaning & importance of branding, brand extensions, parent & child brand strategies;

Valuing a brand, brand valuation methods – price-based, cost-based method; Brand Equity – CBBE Model.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:6
Practicum
 

Customer Centricity:

HBR/Non HBR - Non HBR - The Wharton School, University of Pennsylvania

Synopsis:Students act as Chief Marketing Officer of a 3D printing company tasked with building a customer-centric strategy to drive business growth. Equipped with a Customer Relationship Management dashboard, they gather and analyze customer behavior data over time and make strategic decisions to develop a profitable customer base. The simulation illustrates the differences between individual customers, market sectors, and customer segments while exploring the relationship between customer equity and market valuation.

 

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:9
Term Paper
 

Literature Review [30 research articles]on assigned topics on Customer Centricity

Text Books And Reference Books:

1.    A never before world by Rama Bijapurkar

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.      Marketing as strategy by Nirmalya Kumar

2. Case studies;All the case studies prescribed

 

 

Evaluation Pattern

Non Exam based

MBA645B - PERSONAL FINANCIAL PLANNING (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:150
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course is focused on sharing the best practices in the area of saving and investing as practiced by high net-worth individuals in India and abroad.

This course attempts to help students to understand the conceptual and analytical framework of financial planning process.

 

 

Course Outcome

By the end of the course, the students should be able to:

 

Knowledge

·         Understand the conceptual and analytical framework of financial planning process.

·         Understand the conceptual and analytical framework of different financial / savings instruments, their risk and return profiles and using these financial / savings instruments in managing funds.

Skill

·         Use value investing techniques and key asset allocation strategies commonly adopted by wealth managers.

Attitude

·         Develop an attitude towards savings and the financial discipline to do the same.

·         Understand the importance of spreading the knowledge of financial discipline in the context of managing risk.

·         Understand and appreciate the ethical and social dimensions of Financial Planning.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:5
Overview on Financial Planning and Wealth Management
 

Introduction to wealth management, concept of being rich, concept of asset classes, risk and return trade-off and risk profiles. Introduction to financial planning, life cycle analysis, financial planning process. Answering, why plan for the future? 

 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:3
Role of Insurance
 

Why buy insurance? Role of insurance as a risk mitigate. Introduction to various types of risks, concept of insurable risks from an investor’s perspective. Various insurance products available – Life and Non Life, Concept of Human Life Value (HLV) and methods of computing HLV

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:4
Mutual Funds as an Asset Class
 

What are Mutual Funds? Structure of a Mutual Fund, Mutual Funds in India, Type of Mutual Funds available for investment – Income, Liquidity, Debt, Equity, Sectoral theme based schemes and ETFs.

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
Equities as an Asset Class
 

Investing philosophies for equities. Value investing, the long term strategy.  Equity investing versus equity trading. How to identify industry or sector and a specific equity for investment? Importance of timing of investment. Alternate equity based investment avenues like PMS.A discussion on Behavioral finance in the context of investing in equities.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:5
Alternate Asset Classes
 

Gold as an asset class and how to invest in gold in India? Real Estate as an asset class. Challenges of investing in real Estate. Urban Vs Rural, Residential Vs Commercial, Land Vs Built Properties, REIT, Private Equity, Venture Capital, Structured Notes, Quant Funds and Off-shore opportunities

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:3
Asset Allocation Strategies
 

.

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:2
Taxation and Financial Planning
 

Income under the head Capital gains, Income from House property and Income from other sources to the extent relevant to financial planning. TDS on various income concerning

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:2
Service offering models in WM industry
 

Holistic approach to wealth management advisory, Integrity and Ethics the bedrock of long term advisory roles, Investment philosophies of Benjamin Graham., Warren Buffet and Peter Lynch.

Unit-9
Teaching Hours:15
Project work
 

A team of two students will undertake a project related to ‘Personal Financial Planning’ and submit a written report. The Project work provides a platform for students to practice and experiment their learning. The student should identify a topic of interest in consultation with teaching faculty. As far as possible the most relevant and current problems of the industry related to personal financial planning must be addressed. Cross functional topics are allowed with the consent of teaching faculty.

 

Procedure:

 

a.         The project needs to be from Industry related to personal financial planning.

b.         Project identification. Project identification should be based on industry interaction carried out by the students during the first 20 days of the course.

c.         Problem definition. Problem definition for the project and project methodology needs to be submitted by every student within 30 days of starting of the course.

d.         Literature review. Students will carry out literature review and industry survey with the aim to understand the existing theoretical frameworks, empirical studies and methodologies and help the student develop critical review skills. 

d.         Project work. Project work will be completed within a period of 60 days from the start date of the course.

e.         Project report. A project report consisting of Problem Definition, Literature survey, project Methodology, Results and analysis, recommendations and references will be submitted in spiral bound form.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Essential Reading

National Institute of Securities Market – Financial advisor’s workbook

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Recommended Reading

 

  1.  Raja Sekharan S G, How to get rich and retire early,  Maple Press
  2. Ashiya Manish., Wealth Management. ICFAI Press.
  3. Facrber Esme., All about Investing. Tata McGraw – Hill Publications.
  4. Introduction to financial planning by Indian Institute of Banking & Finance. Taxmann Publications P Ltd.
  5. Kapoor Jack R., Dlabay L R, Huges R J,(2008). Personal Finance, New Delhi: Tata Mc-Graw Hills Publications.

 

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation through assignemtns and examination

MBA645C - SUSTAINABLE BUSINESS MANAGEMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:150
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

This course provide a comprehensive overview of the concepts, strategies and practices of sustainable business. Sustainable Business examines business strategies in response to environmental and social challenges. The course assists students to understand the costs, benefits and risks associated with driving toward sustainable businesses.

 Course Objective

Students undergoing this course are expected to become the facilitators and drivers of sustainability in their respective organizations.

 Course Content

The pedagogy is based on case discussions, review of research papers on sustainability, student assignment to evaluate sustainable initiatives of select businesses and class room discussions. Thirty hours is dedicated to class room based pedagogy and fifteen hours learning is based on project work.

 

 

Course Outcome

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Knowledge

·        Acquire an understanding of business risks and opportunities created by sustainability initiatives in businesses.

·        Understand the current industry practices and enforcement policies related to sustainability.

·        Appreciate the competitive advantage by practicing sustainability and thus effectively deal with the sustainability challenges that they may encounter.

Skill

·        Formulate and implement business responses and actions with regard to the triple bottom line, sustainable development and Govt policies and enforcement laws on environmental protection and sustainability.

·        Provide a platform for students to practice and experiment their learning by way of a seminar and project work.

Attitude

·        Be drivers of sustainability in their respective organizations by generating awareness of corporate social responsibility and good stewardship practices as business leaders.

·        Encourage innovation in business practices and entrepreneurial opportunities created by the “sustainability” movement by profiling business cases.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:3
Sustainable Development - Introduction
 

Concept and definition of sustainable development, guiding principles of sustainability, Social, Ecological and Economic indicators of sustainability, Global sustainability challenge. 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:5
Corporate Sustainability Strategies
 

Conventional vs. sustainable businesses, reasons for implementing sustainable businesses, enablers and barriers of sustainable businesses. Risks, opportunities and challenges of sustainable businesses. Innovation, Collaboration, Technology, Process improvement, Carbon Trading, Cap and trade, Carbon offset schemes.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:5
Sustainable Supply Chain Management
 

Conventional vs. sustainable operations, The Ecosystem Framework for Sustainable  Supply Chains, Forward-Backward Supply chains, Re-features in Supply Chain Design (Re-use, Recycle, Re-manufacture), Green Procurement, Logistics : Freight Consolidation and mode selection., Risks in sustainable Supply Chain Management; Cradle to Cradle Protocol

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:4
Sustainability Reporting and Performance Measurement
 

Life Cycle Analysis (LCA), ISO 14040, Reporting and disclosure, Carbon footprint. Direct and indirect emissions, Energy auditing, Performance measures for business sustainability.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:4
Industrial Waste Management Challenges
 

Types and classification of industrial wastes, Hierarchy of waste management, Challenges in Solid waste management, Hazardous waste management, e-Waste management, Nuclear waste management. Cost benefits of waste management.

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:4
International standards for compliance to sustainability
 

Environmental Management System (EMS), ISO 14001, OHSAS, ISO 26000, Pollution control and regulatory agencies: State Level, National Level and International Level

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:5
Current Trends
 

Analysis of Annual Sustainability Reports of Indian as well as Multi National Businesses, Latest trends and research in sustainability, Ethical aspects of Sustainability and development, Corporate social responsibility practices, socially responsible businesses. Concept of good stewardship practices as business leaders. 

Unit-8
Teaching Hours:15
Project Work - Field work
 

Project Work                                                                                                                             (15 Hrs)

A team of two students will undertake a project related to business sustainability and submit a written report. The Project work provides a platform for students to practice and experiment their learning. The student should identify a topic of interest in consultation with teaching faculty. As far as possible the most relevant and current problems of the industry related to sustainability must be addressed. Cross functional topics are allowed with the consent of teaching faculty.

 

Procedure:

a.         The project needs to be from Industry/ NGOs /Govt.organization/ socio-economical issues related to sustainability.

b.         Project identification. Project identification should be based on industry interaction carried out by the students during the first 20 days of the course.

c.         Problem definition. Problem definition for the project and project methodology needs to be submitted by every student within 30 days of starting of the course.

d.         Literature review. Students will carry out literature review and industry survey with the aim to understand the existing theoretical frameworks, empirical studies and methodologies and help the student develop critical review skills. 

d.         Project work. Project work will be completed within a period of 60 days from the start date of the course.

e.         Project report. A project report consisting of Problem Definition, Literature survey, project Methodology, Results and analysis, recommendations and references will be submitted in spiral bound form.

Suggested topics for project work

(The list is indicative. Students should select appropriate topic based on industry visits and their interest)

1.         Assessing the environmental impacts of freight transport

2.         Carbon auditing of companies/ products / supply chains.

3.         Evaluating environmental costs of logistics/ product development/ production/ marketing

4.         Reducing energy consumption in production/ logistics/ administration of selected organization.

5.         Stakeholder identification and engagement in selected business enterprises

6.         Development of fair operating practices in selected areas of businesses.

7.         Sustainability performance measurement in supply chains/ organizations.

 

 

Text Books And Reference Books:

1.Daniel C. Esty and Andrew S. Winston (2009). Green to Gold:  How Smart Companies Use Environmental Strategy to Innovate, Create Value, and Build Competitive Advantage, John Wiley & Sons.

2.N. Viswanadham and S. Kameshwaran (2013). Ecosystem-Aware Global Supply Chain Management, World Scientific Publishing Co. Pte. Ltd.

3.Paul, T. W.(2013). Waste treatment and disposal. John Wiley and sons.

4.Petra Molthan-Hill, (2014). The Business Student's Guide to Sustainable Management: Principles and Practice, Greenleaf Publishing Ltd, UK.

 

5. H. M. Saxena, Environmental Ecology, Biodiversity and Climate Change: Towards Sustainable Development. Rawat Publications.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1. Beamon, B. M. (2005). Environmental and sustainability ethics in supply chain management. Science and Engineering Ethics, 11(2), 221-234.

2. Toffel, M. W., & Van Sice, S. (2011). Carbon Footprints: Methods and Calculations. Harvard Business School Technology & Operations Mgt. Unit Case, (611-075).

3. Bergmiller, G. G., & McCright, P. R. (2009, May). Parallel models for lean and green operations. In Proceedings of the 2009 Industrial Engineering Research Conference.

4. Sarkis, J. (2003). A strategic decision framework for green supply chain management. Journal of cleaner production, 11(4), 397-409.

5. Linton, J. D., Klassen, R., & Jayaraman, V. (2007). Sustainable supply chains: an introduction. Journal of Operations Management, 25(6), 1075-1082.

Evaluation Pattern

1.   CIA I                                                    (10 marks)

2.   CIA III                                                 (30 marks)

3.   Attendance                                          (5 marks)

4.   CIA II (Written Exam)                           (25 marks)

5.   End Trimester Examination                  (30 marks)

6.  Project                                                (50 marks)

MBA645D - MANAGING PEOPLE AT WORK (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:150
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

A major challenge for today's supervisors and managers is the ability to motivate and manage people in an ever changing and increasingly complex workplace. In addition to managing resources effectively and efficiently while achieving quality results, supervisors and managers are also expected to be leaders with vision and have the ability to create a work environment where their employees can thrive and succeed. The objective of this course is to understand the key issues that people work with, and how to communicate effectively with them. It offers students a balance between theory and application. It provides tips and techniques as well as conceptual grounding to motivate participants to learn and apply a particular skill.

 

The pedagogy is based on lectures, seminars, class room discussions, experiments and role plays for experiential learning. Thirty hours will be dedicated to class room based pedagogy and fifteen hours learning will be based on experiments and project work.

Course Outcome

Knowledge:

·         Lead teams successfully

·         Enhance human relations skills for improved performance at the workplace

·         Increase self efficacy in tasks and duties relating to human resource development and management

·         Engage in receiving feedback from others and encourage self-feedback.

·         Mentor and coach subordinates and handle people issues at work.

 

Skill:  

·         Manage people at work effectively

·         Lead teams effectively

·         Deal with conflicts at work using effective interpersonal skills

 

Attitude:

·         Evolve in to a people sensitive manager with a collaborative mind set.

·         Receive feedback and use it constructively.

 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:7
Managing Self
 

Self-awareness, Self-disclosure and trust – Personal & Interpersonal skills, Goal Setting and self-management

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:9
Managing Others
 

Understand and working with diverse others and listening. Conveying and persuading others. Negotiation and managing conflicts

 

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:5
Team building and Management
 

Building teams, work groups and facilitating team success. Effective meetings, making decisions and solving problems.

 

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:6
Leading Individuals and Groups
 

Power, politicking, networking and mentoring. Coaching, providing feedback and project management. Leading and empowering self and others

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:3
Current trends
 

Social network analysis, Virtual team management, Cross-cultural management, Diversity Management

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:15
Project
 

A team of two students will undertake a project related to HR skills for managing people at work and submit a written report. The Project work provides a platform for students to practice and experiment their learning. The research design of the project has to be experimental in nature. The student should identify a topic of interest in consultation with teaching faculty. As far as possible the most relevant and current problems of the industry related to managing people at work must be addressed.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Essential Reading                                                                                                                           

  1. De Janasz, S. C., Dowd, K. O., and Schneider, B. Z. (2012).  Interpersonal skills in organizations. 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Edition.
  2. Robbins, S. P. and Hunsaker, P. L. (2012).  Training in interpersonal skills: Tips for Managing People at Work. 5th Edition. PHI Learning.

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Recommended Reading                                             

  1. Gallagher, K (2011). Skills development for Business and Management students. Oxford University Press.

2.       Hegar, K. W. (2012). Modern Human Relations at Work. (11th edition). Cengage Learning.

3.       Wallace, H. R. & Masters, A. (2012). Personal Development for Life and Work. Cengage Learning.

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation Pattern                                                       

1. 4 MCQ Tests - 50 marks

2. Practical Record – 15 marks

3. Individual Presentation - 10 marks

4. Group Presentation -15 marks

5. Attendance– 10 marks

6. Project -50 marks

MBA645E - FAMILY BUSINESS MANAGEMENT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:150
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

Family Businesses compose most of the businesses that operate in the country. The successes of these businesses contribute to the over-all economic health of the country. The course is designed for professionals who intend to manage their family business and for developing the business. This course promotes the continuity of successful family businesses and provides the knowledge necessary to support those families for whom continuity of family in business is a strategic objective. The best practices examined provide a road map to enable the family business to avoid the universal “shirt sleeves to shirt sleeves in three generations”. The issues and risks which lie at the intersection of ownership, control, and management of family businesses and the practices necessary to ensure effective optimization of business subsystems will be explored.

 Course Objective

This course attempts to provide the participants an opportunity to understand their family business better and to prepare them for expansion/diversification through phases of transition so as to ensure the professionals growth.

Course Outcome

Learning Outcomes:

By the end of the course, the student should be able to:

Knowledge

·       To provide the participants an opportunity to understand their family business better,

·       To prepare them for expansion/diversification through phases of transition

·       To help the professionals grow in an environment of increased competition

Skill

·       To prepare students in areas like planning, objective setting and astute management of their family’s business.

·       To build long term values for the family, the business and its stakeholders

Attitude

·       To create an atmosphere of trust and values for the success of family business.

Level of Knowledge: Working and Applied

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:6
Valuation
 

Strategic Planning and Non-Family Managers; Family Business Governance; Family Management - Human Capital; Family council (Harvard video: Family Governance); Resolving conflicts in the family;

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:6
Transition
 

Planning for Succession; Emotional transitions, Transferring entrepreneurship, Emotional transitions, The Owner-Managed Business Stage ,The Sibling Partnership Stage , The Cousin Collaboration, In-laws; Discussions on characteristics of successful transitions in family businesses around the globe.

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:6
Family Business
 

Centennial Family Companies; Balancing family and business planning; planning process; Family business planning questions; Professionalism in family business; building lasting family business; synergy in vision, values and strategy; excellence in family business

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:15
Project Based Learning
 

Individual research discussion in class; course integration; own family business experience; submission of final project report.

Project Report

 

The project report will follow the course main topics on Family Business.

Project work within family business, investigation and response to family business relevant problem or challenge, development of a formal succession plan or solution, industry analysis about new trends and changes, use of project management tools, analysis of employing technological innovations, project report and viva-voce, exchange of experiences and best practices.

The students have to write about the family dynamics, which may include relationships, systems, conflicts etc. On the family business include the characteristic of the founder, head of the business, difficulties encountered by the business that are family related, etc. The project should also include interdependence and integration of both the family dynamics and family business, how each affect the other.

 

Text Books And Reference Books:

Ernesto J. Poza., Family Business, 3rd Edition, South-Western Cengage Learning.2010

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.     Jakhete, Jyoti.Family Business Management, Prashant Publications, New Delhi. 2008

2.     Carlock S, Randel. Ward L, John.Strategic Planning for the Family Business, Palgrave Macmillan, New York. 2006

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation criteria:

CIA - 1 will be conducted in 5th trimester. All other CIAs and end term examinations in 6th trimester only

Marks Break up

Tested for

50 % weightage

Attendance

Total

CIA-1

20

10

0

10

MID TERM

50

25

0

25

CIA-3

20

10

0

10

Project Work

100

50

0

50

END TERM

100

50

5

55

 

290

145

5

150

1. The decentralised evaluation policy will continue next AY for both Senior and Junior Batches (Trimester 1 and 4). This means 70% for internal assessments and 30 % for End Trimester Exams. The 70% internal assessment includes 5% for attendance. Therefore, the CIA components will be for 65%.
 
2. The Internal Assessment will be done as under:
a. CIA 1 - 10% Marks (One Assignment, group or individual)
b. CIA 2 - 25% Marks (Written Exam for 2 Hrs)
c. CIA 3 - 30% Marks (15% One Assignment, 15% Quiz)
d. Attendance - 5%
 
3. End Trimester Exam (ETE) (30% Marks) will be for 2 Hrs / 50 Marks 
 
4. Passing criteria for a subject is overall 50% with a minimum of 40% for ETE.

 

MBA651F - ETHICS AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:10
No of Lecture Hours/Week:1
Max Marks:50
Credits:1

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Ethics are moral principles or values that govern the conduct of an individual or a group. This course introduces finance students to the importance of Ethics at workplace and will also help them develop the necessary skills in ethical decision-making. The topics will be applied to realistic situations, particularly in financial services, investment banking and security analysis.

 

Corporate governance is an academic discipline that brings together accounting, finance, law and management. This course is developed to disseminate the evolving principles of good corporate governance to the budding managers. This course give impetus, guidance and direction to undertake research

Course Outcome

At the end of the course, students should be able to:

 

Knowledge:

·         Understand the Code of Ethics and Standards of Professional Conduct

·         Understand Global Investment Performance Standards

·         Understand the framework of corporate governance

·         Analyse the purpose and limits of corporate governance

·         Compare the responsibilities of different stakeholders in corporate governance

 

Skill:

·         Develop the skill to take ethical decisions

·         Develop the skill to report portfolio performance using Global Investment Performance Standards

·         Develop the research skills to analyze and evaluate empirical research in the area of corporate governance

·         Formulate inquisitive questions on the corporate governance issues and use appropriate methods to conduct academic research


 

 

Attitude:

·         Appreciate the importance of ethical practices and corporate sustainability

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:2
Ethical dilemmas in Corporate Finance
 

CFOs’ and ethics- Personal formation of ethics-Fundamental of financial control- Role of Ethics and creative accounting- Conflict of interest on financial transactions- Earning management practices- ethical issues in tax planning

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:2
Ethics and Investment Professionalism
 

Need for ethics in the investment industry- Obligations of investment professional with clients, employees- code of conduct of investment professionals-consequences of conduct that is unethical and unprofessional- framework for making ethical decisions

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:2
Conceptual Framework of Corporate Governance
 

Evolution, need and scope of corporate governance - Theories of corporate governance - Agency theory - Stakeholder theory - Stewardship theory - Resource development theory - Developments in corporate governance - Indian and global perspective - Elements of good corporate governance- Board composition - Types of directors - role and responsibility of directors - CEO duality - board charter- board meetings - Directors’ training and development and performance evaluation - various board committees- audit committee, shareholders’ grievance committee, nomination committee.

 

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:2
Legislative Framework of Corporate Governance and Risk Management
 

Corporate governance in Companies Act 2013 - SEBI Guidelines - Listing agreement, (Enterprise risk management- Internal control- roles and responsibilities for internal control - Disclosures on risk, risk management and internal control - whistle blower policies.

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:2
Corporate Governance and stakeholders right
 

Rights of shareholders- corporate governance issues with related party transactions- role of institutional investors and investor associations on corporate governance- corporate governance and other stakeholders, employees, customers’ lenders, vendors and society.

Text Books And Reference Books:

1.       CFA course material on Ethics

2.       Indian Institute of Corporate Affairs (2016). Corporate Governance: New Delhi. Taxmann

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

http://www.nfcg.in/KOTAKCOMMITTEREPORT.pdf

Evaluation Pattern

Individual Quiz and Group project

MBA651L - IT LEADERSHIP AND GOVERNANCE (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:20
No of Lecture Hours/Week:2
Max Marks:100
Credits:2

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description

This course is offered as an add-on (choice-based) course for students of LOS specialization in the final trimester. Opening up aspects of IT leadership and IT Governance, the course is targeted at students who want to pursue a long term career objective of reaching leadership positions in IT functions like CIO or IT Director or acting as thought leaders in management consulting engagements with such roles.

The course largely follows an engaging fictional narrative, dwelling on true-to-life challenges that a new CIO faces in his first year as technology leader of his company. Through this story telling approach, learnings and insights are elicited on various IT leadership and governance areas.

 

Course Objective

This course attempts to round off the MBA education of systems oriented LOS specialization students by providing them a foundation to grow as leaders of IT function of an organization. Additionally, the course also provides awareness to students on Governance of Enterprise IT.

The course aims to help the management student view and appreciate IT as a leadership domain rather than a purely technology management domain. The CIO perspective of technology and business is expected to be gained by the student.

Course Outcome

Knowledge

  • Aware of nuances between technology management and IT leadership
  • Cognizant of leadership role needed for IT operations and crises
  • Learn the concepts of strategic decision areas for a CIO
  • Gain knowledge of IT Governance, Risk and Compliance domains
  • Appreciate challenges of a CIO in a digital business world
  • Understand aspects of managing internal and external talent as well as balancing between standardization and innovation

 

Skill

  • Decision making in a VUCA area such as an IT function
  • Using various frameworks for IT decision making and governance
  • Engaging with C-suite leaders, CEO, BoD

 

Attitude

  • Think like a CIO of a digital era
  • Humility to depend on the team for technical skills while providing leadership
  • Taking ownership and charge during crises
  • Move from “IT for business” to “Business of IT”
  • Act like a business executive instead of a pure delivery executive

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:1
Introduction and Overview
 

  • IT Leadership vs General Leadership, Technology Management vs IT Leadership.
  • CIO Challenges. CIO Leadership. Stakeholder Analysis for Architecture Leadership in IT.

 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:5
IT Leadership ? Strategic Decision Areas
 

  • IT Costs Mapping to IT Services, Chargebacks, Cost Leadership for IT.
  • Strategic Budgeting for IT.
  • IT Investment Portfolio Management approaches
  • Setting IT Priorities and Aligning to Business Strategy. IT Value Delivery.

 

Unit-3
Teaching Hours:5
Leadership and Decision Making During IT Operations and Crisis
 

  • Executive Leadership for Projects.
  • Engagement with C-suite Leaders, CEO and Board of Directors.
  • IT Crisis Management.
  • Approaches to Post-Crisis Closures - Doctrine of Completed Staff Work.

 

Unit-4
Teaching Hours:1
Sustainable IT Leadership
 

  •      Emerging Technologies Leadership.
  •      Vendor Partnering and Control.
  •      Managing Talent.
  •      Standardization and Innovation.

 

Unit-5
Teaching Hours:3
IT Governance, Risk and Compliance
 

  •      RiskIT framework.
  •      Governance of Enterprise IT, COBIT5 framework.
  •      Ensuring Compliance.

 

Unit-6
Teaching Hours:3
Digital Leadership
 

  • Transforming and Leading IT for the Digital Era.
  • Habits and Facets of a Digital CIO.

 

Unit-7
Teaching Hours:2
Emerging Trends and Current Issues in IT Leadership
 

  • Bimodal operating models for IT.
  • From Delivery Executive to Business Executive.
  • Becoming organizational change agents. Taking charge of business innovation
Text Books And Reference Books:

The Adventures of an IT Leader, 2016, Austin, R.D., Nolan, R.L., O'Donnell, S., Harvard Business Review Press, 2nd ed.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

1.         Corporate Information Strategy and Management: Text and Cases, 2017, Applegate, L.M., Austin, R.D., Soule, D., McGraw Hill, 8th ed.

2.         The CIO Paradox – Battling the Contradictions of IT Leadership, 2012, Heller, M., Perseus Books.

3.         Death March, 2015, Yourdon, E., Yourdon Press, 3rd ed.

4.         Transformation Strategy for the Digital CIO, 2018, Vishnu, V., Authors UpFront

Evaluation Pattern

CIA-1: 10 marks

CIA-2: 25 marks

CIA-3: 30 marks

Departmental Exam: 30 marks

Attendance: 5 marks

MBA682 - MASTERS THESIS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:15
No of Lecture Hours/Week:15
Max Marks:50
Credits:1

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

 

Master Thesis is an optional three-credit research based course that is done by students during their 5th and 6th trimesters.  The course is open to all MBA students.  A guide is allocated to every student to advise and guide him/her in conducting literature review, formulating the research problem, collection of data, analysis and preparation of report.

This course attempts to enable the student to identify and formulate relevant research questions, to get them trained in report writing and to prepare them for a consulting career.

Course Outcome

·         To enable the student to identify and formulate relevant research questions by integrating knowledge from different sources.

·         To help the students to get trained in report making which focuses on problem solving based on empirical evidence and data visualization techniques.

To prepare the student for a consulting career.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:7
Research topic and problem:
 

 The research problem should be more relevant to the latest business area, it should be grounded in theory and literature review. It should have potential significance or importance and should be do-able within the time frame and budget

 

Unit-2
Teaching Hours:8
Review of Literature:
 

The literature used should support the researcher’s arguments relating to his/her research question and aim and objectives of the study. It should uphold methodology. The literature review should be comprehensive and up-to-date. All the papers referred for literature review has to be properly referred strictly following the APA guidelines.

Text Books And Reference Books:

1.      American Psychological Association. (2009)). Publication manual of the American Psychological Association (6th ed.). Washington, DC.

2.      Chawla, D. (2011). Research Methodology Concepts and Cases. New Delhi: Vikas Publications.

3.      Cooper, D., & Schindler, P. (2009). Business research methods (4th ed.). New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Publications

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

    Cooper, D., & Schindler, P. (2009). Business research methods (4th ed.). New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Publications

 

Evaluation Pattern

Problem Identification - 20 marks

Literature Review - 30 marks

 

MBA683 - INDUSTRY PRACTICUM - LOS (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:150
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

The objective of this course is to provide industry exposure and environment for students to enable them to learn practically. Students undergoing this course are expected to take up a project in the industry and accomplish the set objectives. This will facilitates students to apply the knowledge they have acquired in their specialization area.

Course Content

The curriculum integrates applied learning through the Industry Practicum. It provides an avenue where the students can integrate concepts learnt, apply their learning, and gain new perspectives on business.  This is experiential learning and hands on, also known as “learning by doing”. The Practicum is offered as an alternative to the Dissertation and the Industry gets a lot of value in having bright people look at things in different ways. They feel it is great to tap into younger minds and get the new ideas and the insight on new trends. The pedagogy is based on practical work and the students have to identify a task with set objectives and need to complete it in the industry so chosen for this industry practicum.

Course Outcome

At the end of the course, students should be able to:

Knowledge:

·       Acquire an understanding of business processes, business working environment and identification of problems or issues faced by the industry.

·         Formulate and implement business solution for the problem identified and address the objectives set out for the Industry Practicum.

·         Familiarize innovation in business practices and learn the problem solving skills.

Skill:

·         Practice and experiment their learning by way of a project work.

·         Develop Written and verbal communication for the 21st Century. Students can prepare and present effective, well organized professional material in an effective manner, both orally and in writing (including presentation decks, graphical displays of numeric data, executive summaries, e-mails, etc.).

Attitude:

·         Solve large and complex technical challenges .Students are able to map large scale business challenges and questions into structured problems, and apply analytical techniques to solve them.

·         Nurture Collaboration and able to work in groups.Students can navigate corporate culture, and avoid potential obstacles to project success.

·         Reflect on professional learning. Students gain a deeper understanding of their personal strengths and weaknesses in the areas of technical skills, communication skills, and leadership.

Level of Knowledge

Students are expected to have prior basic understanding of business practices, specialization related concepts, application of such concepts in the area of operations and systems  management before they undertake this course. The course presents conceptual and application levels of knowledge in Industry Practicum.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:90
Course Content
 

Each student is allotted one faculty donning the role as Practicum Advisor. The Practicum Advisor need not necessarily be the student’s Faculty Mentor. Appropriate Practicum Advisor may be chosen by the student based on the area of expertise and the experience  that the faculty have in particular sector or domain that the student may want to work with.

Student opting for Industry Practicum instead of Dissertation should submit the proposal in the form of Practicum Charter.

This document is about 6-10 page document and it outline the work to be done, brief insight into the Literature review, a tentative engagement plan, and a timetable. On approval of the Practicum Charter by the Head of Specialization and the Practicum Advisor, the Industry Practicum could be taken up by the student and commence the work. 

The student are required to submit a 5-15 page Interim Report about half-way through the project indicating the activities completed thus far and highlighting any accomplishments completed.

The Final Report would be a document of  30 - 50 page. The final report is generated after completing the presentation about their findings and results to the corporate mentor and obtaining the certificate of completion. Students are required to give an oral presentation(Viva) to the Practicum Advisor or the panel  highlighting the  final results and accomplishments.

The student also need to provide weekly progress reports in moodle (just like  the Summer Internship Project) in a format agreed upon by the Practicum Advisor.

The student is expected to put in minimum  75-80 hours of work  (including Reports making and other related documentation preparation) on the Practicum. Two days per week will be freed up on in the Academic calendar in the sixth trimester  for this purpose. No Practicum related work will be taken up during exams (midterm and end term).

 

The Practicum Advisor may obtain feedback report from the Corporate Mentor before the awarding the marks for the Practicum.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Literaure Review in the area in which Industry Practicum project is undertaken.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Literature Review

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation Pattern

Total 150 marks

MBA684 - INDUSTRY PRACTICUM - MARKETING (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:30
No of Lecture Hours/Week:2
Max Marks:150
Credits:3

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

The objective of this course is to provide industry exposure and environment for students to enable them to learn practically. Students undergoing this course are expected to take up a project in the industry and accomplish the set objectives. This will facilitates students to apply the knowledge they have acquired in their specialization area.

Course Outcome

On completion of this course, the participants must be able to achieve the following learning outcomes.

 

Knowledge

·         Enable students to acquire an understanding of business processes, business working environment and identification of problems or issues faced by the industry.

·         Equip students to formulate and implement business solution for the problem identified and address the objectives set out for the practicum.

·         Familiarize students with innovation in business practices and learn the problem solving skills.

Skill

·         Provide a platform for students to practice and experiment their learning by way of a project work.

·         Written and verbal communication for the 21st Century. Students can prepare and present effective, well organized professional material in an effective manner, both orally and in writing (including presentation decks, graphical displays of numeric data, executive summaries, e-mails, etc.).

Attitude

·         Critical thinking to solve large and complex technical challenges .Students are able to map large scale business challenges and questions into structured problems, and apply analytical techniques to solve them.

·         Collaboration and work in groups .Students can navigate corporate culture, and avoid potential obstacles to project success.

·         Reflection on professional learning. Students gain a deeper understanding of their personal strengths and weaknesses in the areas of technical skills, communication skills, and leadership.

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:30
Course Content
 

 

Each student is allotted one faculty donning the role as Practicum Advisor. The Practicum Advisor need not necessarily be the student’s Faculty Mentor. Appropriate Practicum Advisor may be chosen by the student based on the area of expertise and the experience that the faculty have in particular sector or domain that the student may want to work with.

Student opting for Industry Practicum instead of Dissertation should submit the proposal in the form of Practicum Charter.

This document is about 6-10 page document and it outline the work to be done, brief insight into the Literature review, a tentative engagement plan, and a timetable. On approval of the Practicum Charter by the Head of Specialization and the Practicum Advisor, the Industry Practicum could be taken up by the student and commence the work. 

The student are required to submit a 5-15 page Interim Report about half-way through the project indicating the activities completed thus far and highlighting any accomplishments completed.

The Final Report would be a document of  30 - 50 page. The final report is generated after completing the presentation about their findings and results to the corporate mentor and obtaining the certificate of completion. Students are required to give an oral presentation(Viva) to the Practicum Advisor or the panel  highlighting the  final results and accomplishments.

The student also need to provide weekly progress reports in moodle (just like  the Summer Internship Project) in a format agreed upon by the Practicum Advisor.

The student is expected to put in minimum  75-80 hours of work  (including Reports making and other related documentation preparation) on the Practicum. Two days per week will be freed up on in the Academic calendar in the sixth trimester  for this purpose. No Practicum related work will be taken up during exams (midterm and end term).

The Practicum Advisor may obtain feedback report from the Corporate Mentor before the awarding the marks for the Practicum.

Text Books And Reference Books:

Journal research articles related to the topic chosen for the Industry Practicum. Students to submit literature review as part of the final report.

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Journal research articles related to the topic chosen for the Industry Practicum. Students to submit literature review as part of the final report.

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation Criteria (Total 150 marks)

Practicum Charter                 15 marks

Interim Report                       25 marks

Final Report                            50 marks

Oral Presentation (Viva)       25 marks

Weekly Reporting      & Performance review by corporate mentor -         25 marks

Attendance & Punctuality with endorsement from corporate mentor – 10 marks

MBA685 - INDUSTRY PRACTICUM - HR (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:45
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:150
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

 

The Institute of Management, Christ University (IoM CU) proposes to introduce Industry Practicum as an alternative to Dissertation project for students and this is to be completed in the sixth trimester. It gives students real life experience and exposure to industrial environment. Having almost learnt and imbibed the knowledge in a specific specialization area, students can now look into the practical aspects and see how best the concepts can be put into practice.

Course Content

 

The curriculum integrates applied learning through the Industry Practicum. It provides an avenue where the students can integrate concepts learnt, apply their learning, and gain new perspectives on business.  This is experiential learning and hands on, also known as “learning by doing”. The Practicum is offered as an alternative to the Dissertation and the Industry gets a lot of value in having bright people look at things in different ways. They feel it is great to tap into younger minds and get the new ideas and the insight on new trends. The pedagogy is based on practical work and the students have to identify a task with set objectives and need to complete it in the industry so chosen for this industry practicum.

Course Outcome

 

On completion of this course, the participants must be able to achieve the following learning outcomes.

 

Knowledge:

 

·       Enable students to acquire an understanding of business processes, business working environment  and identification of problems or issues faced by the industry.

 

·       Equip students to formulate and implement business solution for the problem identified and address the objectives set out for the practicum.

 

·       Familiarize students with innovation in business practices and learn the problem solving skills.

 

Skill :

 

·       Provide a platform for students to practice and experiment their learning by way of a project work.

 

·       Written and verbal communication for the 21st Century. Students can prepare and present effective, well organized professional material in an effective manner, both orally and in writing (including presentation decks, graphical displays of numeric data, executive summaries, e-mails, etc.).

 

 

 

Attitude :

 

 

 

·       Critical thinking to solve large and complex technical challenges .Students are able to map large scale business challenges and questions into structured problems, and apply analytical techniques to solve them.

 

 

 

·       Collaboration and work in groups.Students can navigate corporate culture, and avoid potential obstacles to project success.

 

 

 

 

 

·       Reflection on professional learning. Students gain a deeper understanding of their personal strengths and weaknesses in the areas of technical skills, communication skills, and leadership. 

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:45
Practicum Advisor and Practicum Charter
 

 

Each student is allotted one faculty donning the role as Practicum Advisor. The Practicum Advisor need not necessarily be the student’s Faculty Mentor. Appropriate Practicum Advisor may be chosen by the student based on the area of expertise and the experience that the faculty have in particular sector or domain that the student may want to work with.

 

Student opting for Industry Practicum instead of Dissertation should submit the proposal in the form of Practicum Charter.

 

This document is about 6-10 page document and it outline the work to be done, brief insight into the Literature review, a tentative engagement plan, and a timetable. On approval of the Practicum Charter by the Head of Specialization and the Practicum Advisor, the Industry Practicum could be taken up by the student and commence the work. 

 

The student are required to submit a 5-15 page Interim Report about half-way through the project indicating the activities completed thus far and highlighting any accomplishments completed.

 

The Final Report would be a document of  30 - 50 page. The final report is generated after completing the presentation about their findings and results to the corporate mentor and obtaining the certificate of completion. Students are required to give an oral presentation(Viva) to the Practicum Advisor or the panel  highlighting the  final results and accomplishments.

 

The student also need to provide weekly progress reports in moodle (just like  the Summer Internship Project) in a format agreed upon by the Practicum Advisor.

 

The student is expected to put in minimum  75-80 hours of work  (including Reports making and other related documentation preparation) on the Practicum. Two days per week will be freed up on in the Academic calendar in the sixth trimester  for this purpose. No Practicum related work will be taken up during exams (midterm and end term).

 

The Practicum Advisor may obtain feedback report from the Corporate Mentor before the awarding the marks for the Practicum.

Text Books And Reference Books:

 

Journal research articles related to the topic chosen for the Industry Practicum. Students to submit literature review as part of the final report

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

Respective corporate website and other relevant made available to the student.

Evaluation Pattern

Report Submission - 50 Marks

Viva - 50 Marks

Practicum Advisor Evaluation - 50 marks

TOTAL: 150 marks

MBA686 - CAPSTONE PROJECT (2018 Batch)

Total Teaching Hours for Semester:40
No of Lecture Hours/Week:3
Max Marks:100
Credits:4

Course Objectives/Course Description

 

Course Description  

The Business Analytics capstone project is a three credit course offered to students of MBA in Business Analytics in their fifth and sixth trimesters.  A capstone project is a mode of experiential learning, carried out at the culmination of the program. It gives the students an opportunity to apply what they have learnt about how to make data-driven decisions to a real business challenge faced by various companies.

The students will have to choose a reputed organization and study a specific business problem associated with it. The specific role that the student will be playing in the organization and the scope of their work in the company will have to be finalized in consultation with the corporate mentor and with the approval of the academic mentor.

The students are required to submit a final report in the specific format detailing their learning in the organization in addition to apprising their academic mentor of the weekly progress.

Objectives

1.             To expose and acclimatize the students to real time working environment in an organization

2.             To enable the students to make effective business decisions based on data

3.             To provide an opportunity to be in and on the job work setting where they have clearly defined targets and timelines

4.             To improve the critical problem solving skills required while entering the job

5.             To develop interpersonal skills required to excel in the corporate

Course Outcome

On completion of the capstone project, the students will acquire:

Knowledge

·         The ability to use data effectively to address business challenges

·         An understanding of how cutting-edge businesses use data to optimize their strategies

·         The ability to make data-driven decisions

Skills

·         The ability to apply and demonstrate their conceptual learning to a business situation

·         Problem-solving, analytical and practical learning ability

·         Work efficiently with statistical tools such as IBM SPSS, R, Weka and Python

·         The ability to conduct statistical analysis to generate insights using statistical software packages like IBM SPSS, Watson Analytics etc.

·         Critical thinking skills acquired through their program

Attitude

·         Appreciate the use of statistical thinking in taking effective business decisions

Unit-1
Teaching Hours:40
Capstone Project
 

The students will have to choose a reputed organization and study a specific business problem associated with it. The specific role that the student will be playing in the organization and the scope of their work in the company will have to be finalized in consultation with the corporate mentor and with the approval of the academic mentor.

The students are required to submit a final report in the specific format detailing their learning in the organization in addition to apprising their academic mentor of the weekly progress.

 

Essential Reading / Recommended Reading

As suggested by faculty mentor

Evaluation Pattern

Evaluation

Capstone project will be evaluated under three major categories; weekly updates, compliance to the format, content of the report and performance in viva voce.

The pattern of evaluation will be as under:

Weekly updates and compliance:                30 marks

Report evaluation by the guide:                   70 marks

Viva by panel:                                                 100 marks

Weekly Update

The student is expected to provide weekly updates to the academic mentor to enable him/her to check the efficacy of the process. Since weekly updates will act as the primary source for the academic mentor to provide guidance to the students, they must be as detailed and specific as possible.